{"id":"sl-2017-43","name":"Road Rules","slug":"road-rules","collection":"regulation","jurisdiction":"act","status":"in_force","isInForce":true,"actNumber":"43 of 2017","makingDate":null,"administeringDepartment":null,"currentVersion":{"id":173235,"registerId":"act-sl-2017-43-current","compilationNumber":null,"startDate":"2026-04-05","status":"InForce","reasons":null,"registeredAt":null},"sections":[{"sectionNumber":"244G","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on personal mobility device across road on crossing 258","content":"244G Travelling in or on personal mobility device across road on crossing 258\n244GA Use of mobile device in or on personal mobility device 259\n","sortOrder":0},{"sectionNumber":"244H","sectionType":"section","heading":"Person travelling in or on personal mobility device must wear bicycle","content":"244H Person travelling in or on personal mobility device must wear bicycle\nhelmet 261\n244HA Carrying passenger in or on personal mobility device 262\n244HB Child using personal mobility device 262\n244I Warning device—personal mobility device 262\n244J Personal mobility device use at night or hazardous weather conditions 262\n244K Travelling in or on personal mobility device—maintaining proper\ncontrol 263\n244L Travelling in or on personal mobility device without due care etc 263\n245 Riding bicycle 264\n246 Carrying people on bicycle 264\n247 Riding in bicycle lane on road 265\n247A Entering bicycle storage area 265\n\nPage\ncontents 14 Road Transport (Road Rules) Regulation 2017\n247B Giving way while entering or in bicycle storage area 265\n248A Riding across road on crossing 266\n249 Riding on separated footpath 267\n250 Riding on footpath or shared path 267\n251 Riding to left of oncoming bicycle rider on path 267\n252 No bicycles sign and marking 268\n253 Bicycle rider not to cause traffic hazard 268\n254 Bicycle being towed etc 268\n255 Riding too close to rear of motor vehicle 269\n256 Bicycle helmet 269\n257 Riding with person on bicycle trailer 270\n258 Equipment on bicycle 270\n259 Riding at night 271\n260 Stopping for red bicycle crossing light 271\n261 Stopping for yellow bicycle crossing light 272\n262 Proceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or another place\non a road 272\n263 Application—pt 16—people in or on tram 274\nDivision 16.2 Wearing seatbelts and seating positions—drivers and\npassengers\n264 Wearing seatbelt and seating position—driver 274\n265 Wearing seatbelt and seating position—passenger 16 years old or\nolder 275\n265A Driver to ensure passengers comply with seatbelt and seating position\nrequirements 276\nDivision 16.3 Requirements for seatbelts and seating positions—\npassengers under 16 years old\n266 Definitions—div 16.3 277\n266C Wearing seatbelts—passengers under 6 months old 277\n266D Wearing seatbelts—passengers 6 months old or older but under 4\nyears old 278\n266E Wearing seatbelts—passengers 4 years old or older but under 7 years\nold 279\n\nPage\ncontents 15\n266F Exemption for driver—passenger’s medical condition etc 280\n266G Seating position—passenger under 4 years old 281\n266H Seating position—passenger 4 years old or older but under 7 years old 281\n266I Seating position—passenger 7 years old or older but under 16 years\nold 283\n266J Passenger sitting in seating position fitted with particular seatbelt 283\n266K Exemptions for driver—public minibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck 284\n267 Exemptions—wearing seatbelt 285\n268 How people must travel in or on motor vehicle 287\n269 Opening door and getting out of vehicle etc 289\n270 Wearing motorbike helmet 289\n271 Riding on motorbike 292\n272 Interfering with driver’s control of vehicle etc 294\nPart 17 Additional rules for drivers of trams, tram\nrecovery vehicles and public buses\n273 Application—div 17.1—tram recovery vehicle or public bus travelling\nalong tram tracks 295\n274 Stopping for red T light 295\n275 Stopping for yellow T light 296\n276 Exception to stopping for red or yellow T light 296\n277 Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow T light 296\n278 Proceeding when red traffic light and white T light or white traffic arrow\nshowing 296\n279 Proceeding when white T light or white traffic arrow no longer showing 297\n280 Application—div 17.2 298\n281 Stopping for red B light 298\n282 Stopping for yellow B light 299\n283 Exception to stopping for red or yellow B light 299\n284 Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow B light 299\n\nPage\ncontents 16 Road Transport (Road Rules) Regulation 2017\n285 Proceeding when red traffic light and white B light or white traffic arrow\nshowing 300\n286 Proceeding when white B light or white traffic arrow no longer showing 300\n287 Duties of driver involved in crash 302\n288 Driving on path 303\n289 Driving on nature strip 305\n290 Driving on traffic island 306\n291 Making unnecessary noise or smoke 307\n291A Making unnecessary engine noise 307\n292 Insecure or overhanging load 307\n292A Restricting movement of load 308\n293 Removing fallen etc thing from road 309\n294 Keeping control of vehicle being towed 310\n295 Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with towline 310\n295A Number of vehicles that may be drawn 311\n295B Towing by vehicle under 4.5t 313\n296 Driving vehicle in reverse 314\n296A Driving without due care etc 315\n297 Driver to have proper control of vehicle etc 315\n298 Driving with person in trailer 316\n299 Television receiver or visual display unit in motor vehicle 317\n300 Use of mobile device 318\n300A Interrupting funeral procession etc 322\n300B Driving on road closed to traffic 322\n300C Approaching and passing stationary or slow moving emergency\nvehicle etc 323\n301 Leading animal while in or on vehicle 324\n302 Rider of animal on footpath or nature strip to give way to pedestrian 324\n303 Riding animal alongside more than 1 other rider 324\nDivision 18.2A Miscellaneous rules for other people\n303A Emission of waste oil or grease 325\n\nPage\ncontents 17\n303B Safety of person on trailer 326\n304 Direction by police officer or authorised person 326\n304A Direction by police officer to get off, or not get on, vehicle or animal 327\n305 Exemption—driver of police vehicle generally—Act, s 35 328\n305A Exemption—driver of police vehicle—training and assessment 329\n306 Exemption—driver of emergency vehicle 330\n307 Stopping and parking exemption—police or emergency vehicle or\nauthorised person 330\n307A Stopping and parking exemption—mobile device detection system or\nseatbelt detection system 331\n308 Exemption—police officer and emergency worker on foot 332\n309 Exemption—driver of tram etc 332\n309A Exemption from requirement about riding on motorbike 333\n310 Exemption—road worker etc 333\n311 Exemption—oversize vehicle 335\n312 Exemption—tow truck driver 337\nPart 20 Traffic control devices and traffic-related\nitems\n314 Diagram of traffic control device, traffic-related item or symbol 339\n315 Legal effect of traffic control device 339\n316 When traffic control device complies substantially with regulation 340\n317 Information on or with traffic control device 343\n318 Limited effect of certain traffic control devices 344\n319 Legal effect of traffic-related item 345\n320 When traffic-related item complies substantially with regulation 345\n321 Meaning of information on or with traffic control device and\ntraffic-related item 346\n322 Reference to traffic control device and traffic-related item on road etc 346\n323 Reference to light that is traffic signals 348\n323A Audible line 348\n\nPage\ncontents 18 Road Transport (Road Rules) Regulation 2017\nDivision 20.2 Application of traffic control devices to lengths of\nroads and areas\n324 Purpose—div 20.2 349\n325 Reference to traffic control device—application to length of road and\narea 349\n326 When traffic control device applies to length of road or area—basic\nrules 349\n327 Length of road to which traffic sign (except parking control sign)\napplies 350\n328 Reference to traffic control device applying to length of road 350\n329 Traffic control device applying to marked lane 350\n330 Traffic control device applying to slip lane 351\n331 Traffic control device applying to intersection 352\n332 Parking control sign applying to length of road 352\n333 Parking control sign applying to length of road in area to which other\nparking control sign applies etc 353\n334 How parking control sign applies to length of road 354\n335 Traffic control device applying to area 355\n336 How separated footpath sign and separated footpath road marking\napply 357\n337 Purpose—div 20.3 357\n338 Reference to traffic control device—application to people 358\n339 When traffic control device applies to person—basic rules 358\n340 Traffic control device (except road marking and parking control sign) 358\n341 Road marking 359\n342 Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to length of road 359\n343 Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to area 360\n344 Traffic control device applying to driver in marked lane 360\n345 Traffic control device applying to driver in slip lane 360\n346 Parking control sign 361\nDivision 20.4 Prescribed traffic control devices\n346A Preventing prescribed traffic control device being clearly visible 361\n347 Meaning of abbreviations and symbols 362\n\nPage\ncontents 19\n348 Reference to driver doing something etc 362\n349 Reference to certain kind of road 362\n350 Reference to stopping or parking on length of road etc 362\n351 Reference to left and right 363\n352 Reference to stopping as near as practicable to place 364\n353 Reference to pedestrian crossing road 364\nSchedule 1 Abbreviations and symbols 365\nSchedule 2 Standard or commonly used traffic signs 367\nSchedule 3 Other permitted traffic signs 387\nSchedule 4 Symbols and traffic-related items 411\nDictionary 414\n1 About the endnotes 440\n2 Abbreviation key 440\n3 Legislation history 441\n4 Amendment history 444\n5 Earlier republications 450\n\n1 Name of regulation\nThis regulation is the Road Transport (Road Rules) Regulation 2017.\n3 Dictionary\nThe dictionary at the end of this regulation is part of this regulation.\nNote 1 The dictionary at the end of this regulation defines certain terms used in\nthis regulation, and includes references (signpost definitions) to other\nterms defined elsewhere in this regulation.\nFor example, the signpost definition ‘parking permit—see the Road\ndictionary.’ means that the term ‘parking permit’ is defined in that\ndictionary and the definition applies to this regulation.\nNote 2 A definition in the dictionary (including a signpost definition) applies to\nthe entire regulation unless the definition, or another provision of the\nregulation, provides otherwise or the contrary intention otherwise appears\n(see Legislation Act, s 155 and s 156 (1)).\n","sortOrder":1},{"sectionNumber":"4","sectionType":"section","heading":"Diagrams","content":"4 Diagrams\nA diagram in this regulation is part of this regulation.\n","sortOrder":2},{"sectionNumber":"5","sectionType":"section","heading":"Examples","content":"5 Examples\nAn example in this regulation is part of this regulation.\nNote An example is not exhaustive and may extend, but does not limit, the\nmeaning of the provision in which it appears (see Legislation Act, s 126\nand s 132).\n","sortOrder":3},{"sectionNumber":"6","sectionType":"section","heading":"Notes","content":"6 Notes\nA note in this regulation is explanatory and is not part of this\nNote See the Legislation Act, s 127 (1), (4) and (5) for the legal status of notes.\n\nPreliminary Part 1\n","sortOrder":4},{"sectionNumber":"7","sectionType":"section","heading":"Offences against regulation—application of Criminal","content":"7 Offences against regulation—application of Criminal\nCode etc\nOther legislation applies in relation to offences against this\nNote 1 Criminal Code\nThe Criminal Code, ch 2 applies to all offences against this regulation\n(see Code, pt 2.1).\nThe chapter sets out the general principles of criminal responsibility\n(including burdens of proof and general defences), and defines terms used\nfor offences to which the Code applies (egconduct, intention,\nrecklessness and strict liability).\nNote 2 Penalty units\nThe Legislation Act, s 133 deals with the meaning of offence penalties\nthat are expressed in penalty units.\n","sortOrder":5},{"sectionNumber":"8","sectionType":"section","heading":"Offences against regulation—strict liability","content":"8 Offences against regulation—strict liability\nAn offence against this regulation is a strict liability offence.\n","sortOrder":6},{"sectionNumber":"9","sectionType":"section","heading":"Offences against regulation—defence","content":"9 Offences against regulation—defence\nIt is a defence to an offence against this regulation if the defendant\nproves that the offence—\n(a) was the result of an accident; or\n(b) could not have been avoided by any reasonable efforts by the\ndefendant.\n","sortOrder":7},{"sectionNumber":"10","sectionType":"section","heading":"Objects of regulation","content":"10 Objects of regulation\nThe objects of this regulation are to—\n(a) provide rules for all road users in the ACT that are substantially\nuniform with rules for road users elsewhere in Australia; and\n(b) specify behaviour for all road users that supports the safe and\nefficient use of roads in Australia.\n\n","sortOrder":8},{"sectionNumber":"11","sectionType":"section","heading":"Regulation applies to vehicles and road users on roads","content":"11 Regulation applies to vehicles and road users on roads\nand road related areas\nThis regulation applies to vehicles and road users on roads and road\nrelated areas.\n","sortOrder":9},{"sectionNumber":"12","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to road include road related area","content":"12 References to road include road related area\nUnless otherwise expressly stated in this regulation, a reference in this\nregulation (except in this division) to a road includes a road related\n","sortOrder":10},{"sectionNumber":"14","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of road user","content":"14 Meaning of road user\nroad user means a driver, rider, passenger or pedestrian.\n","sortOrder":11},{"sectionNumber":"15","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of vehicle","content":"15 Meaning of vehicle\nvehicle includes—\n(a) a motor vehicle, trailer and tram; and\n(b) a bicycle; and\n(c) an animal-drawn vehicle, and an animal that is being ridden or\ndrawing a vehicle; and\n(d) a combination; and\n\nApplication of this regulation Part 2\nRoad users and vehicles Division 2.2\n(e) a motorised wheelchair that can travel at over 10km/h (on level\nground);\nbut does not include another kind of wheelchair, a train, a personal\nmobility device, or a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy.\n","sortOrder":12},{"sectionNumber":"16","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of driver","content":"16 Meaning of driver\ndriver means the person who is driving a vehicle (except a motorbike,\nbicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle).\n(2) However, a driver does not include a person pushing a motorised\nwheelchair.\n","sortOrder":13},{"sectionNumber":"17","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of rider","content":"17 Meaning of rider\nrider means the person who is riding a motorbike, bicycle, animal or\nanimal-drawn vehicle.\n(2) However, a rider does not include—\n(a) a passenger; or\n(b) a person walking beside and pushing a bicycle.\n","sortOrder":14},{"sectionNumber":"18","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of pedestrian","content":"18 Meaning of pedestrian\npedestrian includes—\n(a) a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at\nover 10km/h (on level ground); and\n(b) a person in a non-motorised wheelchair; and\n(c) a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair; and\n\n(d) a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy;\nand\n(e) a person in or on a personal mobility device.\n","sortOrder":15},{"sectionNumber":"18A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of personal mobility device","content":"18A Meaning of personal mobility device\npersonal mobility device—\n(a) means a device—\n(i) propelled by an electric motor; and\n(ii) designed for use by only 1 person; and\n(iii) weighing not more than 60kg unladen; and\n(iv) with 1 or more wheels; and\n(v) with a brake system; and\n(vi) that cannot travel faster than 25km/h on level ground; and\n(vii) with dimensions not more than—\n(A) 1 250mm in length; and\n(B) 700mm in width; and\n(C) 1 350mm in height; but\n(b) does not include a motorised wheelchair.\nExamples—par (a) (i)\n• a segway-like device\n• an electric scooter\n• an electrically propelled skateboard\nNote Personal mobility device does not include wheeled recreational devices\nor wheeled toys because they are not propelled by electric motors.\n\nApplication of this regulation Part 2\nRoad users and vehicles Division 2.2\n","sortOrder":16},{"sectionNumber":"19","sectionType":"section","heading":"References to driver includes rider etc","content":"19 References to driver includes rider etc\nUnless otherwise expressly stated in this regulation, each reference in\nthis regulation (except in this division) to a driver includes a reference\nto a rider, and each reference in this regulation (except in this\ndivision) to driving includes a reference to riding.\n\n","sortOrder":17},{"sectionNumber":"20","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obeying speed limit","content":"20 Obeying speed limit\nA driver must not drive at a speed over the speed limit applying to the\ndriver for the length of road where the driver is driving.\n","sortOrder":18},{"sectionNumber":"21","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed limit where speed limit sign applies","content":"21 Speed limit where speed limit sign applies\n(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road to which a\nspeed limit sign applies is the number of kilometres per hour indicated\nby the number on the sign.\n(2) However, if the number on the speed limit sign is over 100 and the\ndriver is driving a bus with a GVM over 5t, or another vehicle with a\nGVM over 12t, the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of\nroad is 100km/h.\n(3) A speed limit sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning\nat the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:\n(a) a speed limit sign on the road with a different number on the\nsign;\n(b) an end speed limit sign or speed derestriction sign on the road;\n\nSpeed limits Part 3\n","sortOrder":19},{"sectionNumber":"22","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed limit in speed limited area","content":"22 Speed limit in speed limited area\n(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a speed\nlimited area is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the\nnumber on the area speed limit sign on a road into the area, unless\nanother speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under\nanother provision of this part.\nExample—another speed limit\nAlthough an area speed limit sign on a road into a speed limited area may indicate\na speed limit of 60km/h, a particular length of road in the area may have a school\nzone sign indicating a 40km/h speed limit for that length of road.\nspeed limited area is the network of roads in an area with—\n(a) an area speed limit sign on each road into the area, indicating the\n(b) an end area speed limit sign on each road out of the area.\n(3) In subsection (2):\n","sortOrder":20},{"sectionNumber":"23","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed limit in school zone","content":"23 Speed limit in school zone\n(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a school\nzone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on\nthe school zone sign on a road, or the road, into the zone.\nschool zone means—\n(a) if there is a school zone sign and an end school zone sign, or a\nspeed limit sign with a different number on the sign, on a road\nand there is no intersection on the length of road between the\nsigns—that length of road; or\n\n(b) if there is a school zone sign on a road that ends in a dead end\nand there is no intersection, nor a sign mentioned in\nparagraph (a), on the length of road beginning at the sign and\nending at the dead end—that length of road; or\n(c) in any other case—the network of roads in an area with—\n(i) a school zone sign on each road into the area, indicating the\n(ii) an end school zone sign, or a speed limit sign indicating a\ndifferent number, on each road out of the area.\n(3) In subsection (2) (c):\n","sortOrder":21},{"sectionNumber":"24","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed limit in shared zone","content":"24 Speed limit in shared zone\n(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a shared\nzone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on\nthe shared zone sign on a road, or the road into the zone.\nshared zone means—\n(a) if there is a shared zone sign and an end shared zone sign on a\nroad and there is no intersection on the length of road between\nthe signs—that length of road; or\n(b) if there is a shared zone sign on a road that ends in a dead end\nand there is no intersection on the length of road beginning at\nthe sign and ending at the dead end—that length of road; or\n(c) a network of roads in an area with—\n(i) a shared zone sign on each road into the area, indicating the\n(ii) an end shared zone sign on each road out of the area; or\n\nSpeed limits Part 3\n(d) a road related area that is between a shared zone sign that relates\nto the area and an end shared zone sign that relates to the area.\n(3) In subsection (2) (c):\n","sortOrder":22},{"sectionNumber":"25","sectionType":"section","heading":"Speed limit elsewhere","content":"25 Speed limit elsewhere\n(1) If a speed limit sign does not apply to a length of road and the length\nof road is not in a speed limited area, school zone or shared zone, the\nspeed limit applying to a driver for the length of road is the default\nspeed limit.\n(2) The default speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road in a\nbuilt-up area is 50km/h.\n(3) The default speed limit applying to a driver for any other length of\nroad is 100km/h.\n\n","sortOrder":23},{"sectionNumber":"26","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 4.1—roundabouts, road related areas","content":"26 Application—div 4.1—roundabouts, road related areas\nand adjacent land\n(1) This division does not apply to a driver entering or leaving a\nroundabout.\n(2) This division applies to a driver turning left from a road into a road\nrelated area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road,\nas if the driver were turning left at an intersection.\n","sortOrder":24},{"sectionNumber":"27","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting left turn from road (except multi-lane road)","content":"27 Starting left turn from road (except multi-lane road)\n(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a road (except a\nmulti-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection from as\nnear as practicable to the far left side of the road.\n(1A) Subsection (1) also applies to the rider of a bicycle who approaches\nand enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.\n(1B) Despite subsection (1), if there is space in a bicycle storage area for\n2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the right may\napproach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to the right\nside of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches and\nenters the intersection in accordance with this section.\n\nLeft turns Division 4.1\nStarting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane road)\n","sortOrder":25},{"sectionNumber":"28","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting left turn from multi-lane road","content":"28 Starting left turn from multi-lane road\n(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road must\napproach and enter the intersection from within the left lane unless—\n(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the\nintersection from within another marked lane under—\n(i) section 88 (1) (Left turn sign); or\n(ii) section 92 (Traffic lane arrows); or\n(iii) section 159 (Marked lane required to be used by particular\nkind of vehicle); or\n(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n\n(c) subsection (1A) or (2) applies to the driver.\nExample—s (1) (a)\nStarting a left turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as required or\npermitted under s 92\n(1A) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road that has\na slip lane must approach and enter the intersection—\n(a) from within the slip lane; or\n(b) if there is an obstruction that prevents the driver from entering\nthe intersection from within the slip lane—from within the left\n(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked\nlane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane if—\n\nLeft turns Division 4.1\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left from within the left\nlane; and\nturn left at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane,\nor both lanes.\nLong vehicle turning left from the left lane and next marked lane\n(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends\nacross 1 or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, the rider of a\nbicycle turning left must approach and enter the intersection from\nwithin the part of the bicycle storage area that is directly in front of\nthe left marked lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the left side of the\nleft lane means—\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road; or\n\n","sortOrder":26},{"sectionNumber":"29","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making left turn as indicated by turn line","content":"29 Making left turn as indicated by turn line\n(1) If a driver is turning left at an intersection and there is a turn line\nindicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must make\nthe turn as indicated by the turn line unless—\n(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n(b) subsection (2) applies to the driver.\nMaking a left turn as indicated by a turn line\n(2) A driver may turn left at an intersection other than as indicated by a\nturn line if—\n\n(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left as indicated by the\nturn line; and\n(d) the driver can safely turn left other than as indicated by the turn\nline.\n","sortOrder":27},{"sectionNumber":"30","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 4.2—certain right turns","content":"30 Application—div 4.2—certain right turns\n(1) This division does not apply to—\n(a) a driver turning right at an intersection where there is a hook turn\nonly sign; or\n(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn under division 4.3\n(Hook turns at intersections); or\n(c) a driver making a U-turn; or\n(d) a driver entering or leaving a roundabout.\n(2) This division applies to a driver turning right from a road into a road\nrelated area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road,\nas if the driver were turning right at an intersection.\n","sortOrder":28},{"sectionNumber":"31","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting right turn from road (except multi-lane road)","content":"31 Starting right turn from road (except multi-lane road)\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a road (except a\nmulti-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection in\naccordance with this section.\n(2) If the road has a dividing line or median strip, the driver must\napproach and enter the intersection from the left of, parallel to, and as\nnear as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.\n\n(3) If the road does not have a dividing line or median strip and is not a\none-way road, the driver must approach and enter the intersection\nfrom the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the centre of\n(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter the\nintersection from as near as practicable to the far right side of the road.\n(4A) Subsections (2) to (4) also apply to the rider of a bicycle who\napproaches and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.\n(4B) Despite subsections (2) to (4), if there is space in a bicycle storage\narea for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the\nleft may approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to\nthe left side of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches\nand enters the intersection in accordance with this section.\nStarting a right turn from a road with a dividing line\n\nStarting a right turn from a one-way road\n","sortOrder":29},{"sectionNumber":"32","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting right turn from multi-lane road","content":"32 Starting right turn from multi-lane road\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a multi-lane road must\napproach and enter the intersection from within the right lane\n(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the\nintersection from within another marked lane in accordance\nwith—\n(i) section 89 (1) (Right turn sign); or\n(ii) section 92 (Traffic lane arrows); or\n(iii) section 159 (Marked lane required to be used by particular\nkind of vehicle); or\n(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n\n(c) subsection (2) applies to the driver.\nExample—s (1) (a)\nStarting a right turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as required or\npermitted under s 92\n(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked\nlane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane if—\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right from within the\nright lane; and\nturn right at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane,\nor both lanes.\n\n(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that extends\nacross 1 or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, the rider of a\nbicycle turning right (but not making a hook turn) must approach and\nenter the intersection from within the part of the bicycle storage area\nthat is directly in front of the right marked lane or of a bicycle lane\nthat is on the right side of the road.\nright lane means—\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on\nthe road; or\n","sortOrder":30},{"sectionNumber":"33","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making right turn","content":"33 Making right turn\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection must make the turn in\naccordance with this section unless—\n(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in accordance\n(b) subsection (4) applies to the driver.\n(2) If there is a turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made,\nthe driver must make the turn as indicated by the turn line.\n\n(3) If there is no turn line indicating how the turn is required to be made,\nthe driver must make the turn so the driver—\n(a) passes as near as practicable to the right of the centre of the\n(b) turns into the left of the centre of the road the driver is entering,\nunless the driver is entering a one-way road.\nMaking a right turn as indicated by turn lines\n\nHook turns at intersections Division 4.3\nMaking a right turn from a road with no turn lines indicating how to make the turn\n(4) A driver may turn right other than as indicated by a turn line if—\n(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right as indicated by the\nturn line; and\n(d) the driver can safely make the turn other than as indicated by the\nturn line.\n","sortOrder":31},{"sectionNumber":"34","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making hook turn at hook turn only sign","content":"34 Making hook turn at hook turn only sign\n(1) A driver turning right at an intersection with traffic lights and a hook\nturn only sign must turn right by making a hook turn in accordance\n\n(2) To make a hook turn, the driver must take, in sequence, each of the\nfollowing steps:\n","sortOrder":32},{"sectionNumber":"1","sectionType":"section","heading":"Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable","content":"1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable\nto the far left side of the road that the driver is leaving.\n","sortOrder":33},{"sectionNumber":"2","sectionType":"section","heading":"Move forward, keeping as near as practicable to the left of the","content":"2 Move forward, keeping as near as practicable to the left of the\nintersection and clear of any marked foot crossing, until the\ndriver is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that\nthe driver is entering.\n","sortOrder":34},{"sectionNumber":"3","sectionType":"section","heading":"Remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic","content":"3 Remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic\nlights on the road that the driver is entering change to green.\n4 Turn right into that road.\nMaking a hook turn at a hook turn only sign\n\nHook turns at intersections Division 4.3\n","sortOrder":35},{"sectionNumber":"35","sectionType":"section","heading":"Optional hook turn by bicycle rider","content":"35 Optional hook turn by bicycle rider\n(1) The rider of a bicycle turning right at an intersection without a hook\nturn only sign, or a no hook turn by bicycles sign, may turn right at\nthe intersection by making a right turn under division 4.2 (Right\nturns) or a hook turn under this section.\n(2) The rider must make a hook turn under this section in accordance with\nsubsection (3).\n(3) To make a hook turn under this section, the rider must take, in\nsequence, each of the following steps:\n1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable\nto the far left side of the road that the rider is leaving.\n2 Move forward—\n(a) keeping as near as practicable to the far left side of the\n(b) keeping clear of any marked foot crossing; and\n(c) keeping clear, as far as practicable, of any driver turning\nleft from the left of the intersection;\nuntil the rider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road\nthat the rider is entering.\n3 If there are traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the\nposition reached under step 2 until the traffic lights on the road\nthat the rider is entering change to green.\n4 If there are no traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the\nposition reached under step 2 until the rider has given way to\napproaching drivers on the road that the rider is leaving.\n5 Turn right into the road that the rider is entering.\n\n(4) To make a hook turn under this section at an intersection that has a\nbicycle hook turn storage area on the left side of the intersection as\nthe rider approaches the intersection, the rider must take the following\ninitial 2 steps instead of the initial 2 steps listed in subsection (3):\n1 Approach the intersection from the far left side of the road the\nrider is leaving and enter the intersection by moving into the\nbicycle hook turn storage area, keeping clear of any marked\nfoot crossing.\n2 Move forward in the bicycle hook turn storage area until the\nrider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that the\nrider is entering.\nBicycle rider making a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights where there\nis a bicycle hook turn storage area\n\nU-turns Division 4.4\nBicycle rider making a hook turn at an intersection without traffic lights\n","sortOrder":36},{"sectionNumber":"36","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle rider making hook turn contrary to no hook turn","content":"36 Bicycle rider making hook turn contrary to no hook turn\nby bicycles sign\nThe rider of a bicycle must not make a hook turn at an intersection\nthat has a no hook turn by bicycles sign.\n","sortOrder":37},{"sectionNumber":"37","sectionType":"section","heading":"Beginning U-turn","content":"37 Beginning U-turn\nA driver must not begin a U-turn unless—\n(b) the driver can safely make the U-turn without unreasonably\nobstructing the free movement of traffic.\n\n","sortOrder":38},{"sectionNumber":"38","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when making U-turn","content":"38 Giving way when making U-turn\nA driver making a U-turn must give way to all vehicles and\n","sortOrder":39},{"sectionNumber":"39","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making U-turn contrary to no U-turn sign","content":"39 Making U-turn contrary to no U-turn sign\n(1) A driver must not make a U-turn at a break in a dividing strip on a\nroad if there is a no U-turn sign at the break in the dividing strip.\n(2) A driver must not make a U-turn on a length of road to which a no\nU-turn sign applies.\n(3) A no U-turn sign on a road (except a no U-turn sign at an intersection\nor at a break in a dividing strip) applies to the length of road beginning\nat the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:\n(a) the next intersection on the road;\n(b) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of the\n","sortOrder":40},{"sectionNumber":"40","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making U-turn at intersection with traffic lights","content":"40 Making U-turn at intersection with traffic lights\nA driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection with traffic lights\nunless there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection.\n","sortOrder":41},{"sectionNumber":"41","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making U-turn at intersection without traffic lights","content":"41 Making U-turn at intersection without traffic lights\nA driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection without traffic\nlights if there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.\n\nU-turns Division 4.4\n","sortOrder":42},{"sectionNumber":"42","sectionType":"section","heading":"Starting U-turn at intersection","content":"42 Starting U-turn at intersection\nA driver making a U-turn at an intersection must start the U-turn—\n(a) if the road where the driver is turning has a dividing line or\nmedian strip—from the marked lane nearest, or as near as\npracticable, to the dividing line or median strip; or\n(b) in any other case—from the left of the centre of the road.\nStarting a U-turn on a road with a median strip\n\n","sortOrder":43},{"sectionNumber":"Part 5","sectionType":"part","heading":"Change of direction and stop","content":"Part 5 Change of direction and stop\nsignals\n","sortOrder":44},{"sectionNumber":"44","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 5.1—entering or leaving roundabout","content":"44 Application—div 5.1—entering or leaving roundabout\nThis division does not apply to a driver entering, in or leaving a\nroundabout.\n","sortOrder":45},{"sectionNumber":"45","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of changes direction","content":"45 Meaning of changes direction\n(1) A driver changes direction if the driver changes direction to the left\nor the driver changes direction to the right.\n(2) A driver changes direction to the left by doing any of the following:\n(a) turning left;\n(b) changing marked lanes to the left;\n(c) diverging to the left;\n(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the left;\n(e) moving to the left to, or from, a stationary position;\n(f) turning left into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a median\nstrip parking area;\n(g) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the\nright—leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead\n(3) A driver changes direction to the right by doing any of the following:\n(a) turning right;\n(b) changing marked lanes to the right;\n(c) diverging to the right;\n\nChange of direction signals Division 5.1\n(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the right;\n(e) moving to the right to, or from, a stationary position;\n(f) turning right into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a\nmedian strip parking area;\n(g) making a U-turn;\n(h) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the left—\nleaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the\nterminating road.\nExample 1—s (2) (g)\nDriver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the continuing road\ncurves to the right and the driver is proceeding straight ahead onto the terminating\nroad\n\nExample 2—s (3) (h)\nDriver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the continuing road\ncurves to the left and the driver is proceeding straight ahead onto the terminating\nroad\n","sortOrder":46},{"sectionNumber":"46","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving left change of direction signal","content":"46 Giving left change of direction signal\n(1) Before a driver changes direction to the left, the driver must give a\nleft change of direction signal in accordance with section 47 for long\nenough to comply with subsection (2) and, if subsection (3) applies\nto the driver, that subsection.\n(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough\nto give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.\n(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a stationary\nposition at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area, the\ndriver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds\nbefore the driver changes direction.\n(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as\nthe driver completes the change of direction.\n\nChange of direction signals Division 5.1\n(5) This section does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not\n","sortOrder":47},{"sectionNumber":"47","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give left change of direction signal","content":"47 How to give left change of direction signal\nThe driver of a vehicle must give a left change of direction signal by\noperating the vehicle’s left direction indicator lights.\n","sortOrder":48},{"sectionNumber":"48","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving right change of direction signal","content":"48 Giving right change of direction signal\n(1) Before a driver changes direction to the right, the driver must give a\nright change of direction signal in accordance with section 49 for long\nenough to comply with subsection (2) and, if subsection (3) applies\nto the driver, that subsection.\n(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long enough\nto give sufficient warning to other drivers and pedestrians.\n(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a stationary\nposition at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area, the\ndriver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds\nbefore the driver changes direction.\n(3A) Subsection (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle that is stopped\nin traffic but not parked.\n(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as\nthe driver completes the change of direction.\n(5) This section does not apply to—\n(a) the driver of a tram that is not fitted with direction indicator\nlights; or\n(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn.\n\n","sortOrder":49},{"sectionNumber":"49","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give right change of direction signal","content":"49 How to give right change of direction signal\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a right change of direction signal by\noperating the vehicle’s right direction indicator lights.\n(2) However, if the vehicle’s direction indicator lights are not in working\norder or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with\ndirection indicator lights, the driver must give the change of direction\nsignal by giving a hand signal in accordance with section 50, or using\na mechanical signalling device fitted to the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":50},{"sectionNumber":"50","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give right change of direction signal by giving","content":"50 How to give right change of direction signal by giving\nhand signal\nTo give a hand signal for changing direction to the right, the driver\nmust extend the right arm and hand horizontally and at right angles\nfrom the right side of the vehicle, with the hand open and the palm\nfacing the direction of travel.\nGiving a hand signal for changing direction to the right\n","sortOrder":51},{"sectionNumber":"51","sectionType":"section","heading":"When use of direction indicator lights permitted","content":"51 When use of direction indicator lights permitted\nThe driver of a vehicle must not operate a direction indicator light\nexcept—\n(a) to give a change of direction signal when the driver is required\nto give the signal under this regulation; or\n\nStop signals Division 5.2\n(b) as part of the vehicle’s hazard warning lights.\n","sortOrder":52},{"sectionNumber":"52","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 5.2—bicycle riders and certain tram","content":"52 Application—div 5.2—bicycle riders and certain tram\ndrivers\nThis division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, or the driver of\na tram that is not fitted with brake lights.\n","sortOrder":53},{"sectionNumber":"53","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving stop signal","content":"53 Giving stop signal\n(1) A driver must give a stop signal in accordance with section 54 before\nstopping or when suddenly slowing.\n(2) If the driver is stopping, the driver must give the stop signal for long\nenough to give sufficient warning to other road users.\n(3) If the driver is slowing suddenly, the driver must give the stop signal\nwhile slowing.\n","sortOrder":54},{"sectionNumber":"54","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give stop signal","content":"54 How to give stop signal\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a stop signal by means of the\nvehicle’s brake lights.\n(2) However, if the vehicle’s brake lights are not in working order or are\nnot clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with brake lights, the\ndriver must give the stop signal by giving a hand signal in accordance\nwith section 55, or using a mechanical signalling device fitted to the\n\n","sortOrder":55},{"sectionNumber":"55","sectionType":"section","heading":"How to give stop signal by giving hand signal","content":"55 How to give stop signal by giving hand signal\n(1) To give a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing, the driver\nmust extend the right arm and hand at right angles from the right side\nof the vehicle, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and\nhand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing\nthe direction of travel.\n(2) However, the rider of a motorbike may give the hand signal by\nextending the left arm and hand at right angles from the left side of\nthe motorbike, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and\nhand pointing upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing\nthe direction of travel.\nGiving a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing\n\nPart 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows and\ntwin red lights\nDivision 6.1 Obeying traffic lights and traffic\narrows\n56 Stopping for red traffic light or arrow\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red traffic light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights—as near as\n(b) if there is a stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic\nlights, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the sign; or\n(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red signal sign at or near\nthe traffic lights—as near as practicable to, but before reaching,\nthe nearest or only traffic lights;\nand must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red signal sign\nor nearest or only traffic lights until the traffic lights show a green or\nflashing yellow traffic light or no traffic light.\n\nExample—s (1) (b)\nStopping at a stop here on red signal sign on a road the driver is entering\nIn this example the driver may go straight ahead, or turn right or left, if there is a\ngreen traffic light showing at 1. However, the driver must not go beyond the stop\nhere on red signal sign at 2 if there is a red traffic light showing on the road the\ndriver is entering (see 2 and 3).\n(1A) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\n(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a red traffic arrow\nwho is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop—\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows—as near as\n(b) if there is a stop here on red arrow sign at or near the traffic\narrows, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the sign; or\n\n(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red arrow sign at or near\nthe traffic arrows—as near as practicable to, but before reaching,\nthe nearest or only traffic arrows;\nand must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red arrow sign\nor nearest or only traffic arrows until the traffic arrows show a green\nor flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic arrow.\n(3) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to in\nsubsection (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subsection (1) (a)\nor (2) (a)—\n(a) in the case of the driver of a motor vehicle—is a reference to the\nfirst stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching\nthe lights; or\n(b) in the case of the rider of a bicycle—is a reference to the stop\nline that is nearest to the intersection.\n","sortOrder":56},{"sectionNumber":"57","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for yellow traffic light or arrow","content":"57 Stopping for yellow traffic light or arrow\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a yellow traffic light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic lights and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the traffic lights—as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic\nlights; or\n\n(c) if the traffic lights are at an intersection and the driver cannot\nstop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop\nsafely before entering the intersection—before entering the\nintersection;\nand must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic lights,\nor into the intersection, until the traffic lights show a green or flashing\nyellow traffic light or no traffic light.\n(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a yellow traffic\narrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must\nstop—\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the driver\ncan stop safely before reaching the traffic arrows—as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic\narrows; or\n(c) if the traffic arrows are at an intersection and the driver cannot\nstop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop\nsafely before entering the intersection—before entering the\nintersection;\nand must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic\narrows, or into the intersection, until the traffic arrows show a green\nor flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic arrow.\n\n(3) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows are at an intersection and the\ndriver is not able to stop safely under subsection (1) or (2) and enters\nthe intersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the\ndriver can do so safely.\n(4) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights referred to in\nsubsection (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subsection (1) (a)\nor (2) (a)—\n(a) in the case of the driver of a motor vehicle—is a reference to the\nfirst stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching\nthe lights;\n(b) in the case of the rider of a bicycle—is a reference to the stop\nline that is nearest to the intersection.\n","sortOrder":57},{"sectionNumber":"58","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to stopping for red or yellow traffic light","content":"58 Exceptions to stopping for red or yellow traffic light\n(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red traffic light or\nyellow traffic light does not have to stop if a green traffic arrow is\nalso showing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by\nthe arrow.\n(2) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights who approaches\nor is at a red traffic light on the road that the driver is entering does\nnot have to stop for that traffic light if there is no stop line or stop\nhere on red signal sign at or near the traffic light.\n","sortOrder":58},{"sectionNumber":"59","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through red traffic light","content":"59 Proceeding through red traffic light\n(1) If traffic lights at an intersection or marked foot crossing are showing\na red traffic light, a driver must not enter the intersection or marked\nfoot crossing.\n\n(2) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\n(3) Also, subsection (1) does not apply to a driver if section 58 (1) applies\nto the driver.\n","sortOrder":59},{"sectionNumber":"60","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through red traffic arrow","content":"60 Proceeding through red traffic arrow\nIf traffic arrows at an intersection or marked foot crossing are\nshowing a red traffic arrow, and a driver is turning in the direction\nindicated by the arrow, the driver must not enter the intersection or\nmarked foot crossing.\n","sortOrder":60},{"sectionNumber":"60A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding through bicycle storage area before red","content":"60A Proceeding through bicycle storage area before red\ntraffic light or arrow\n(1) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic lights that are showing\na red traffic light, the driver of a motor vehicle must not allow any\npart of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.\n(2) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic arrows that are showing\na red traffic arrow, and the driver of a motor vehicle is turning in the\ndirection indicated by the arrow, the driver must not allow any part of\nthe vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.\n\n","sortOrder":61},{"sectionNumber":"61","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when traffic light or arrow at intersection","content":"61 Proceeding when traffic light or arrow at intersection\nchanges to yellow or red\n(a) a driver at an intersection with traffic lights showing a green\ntraffic light who has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red\nsignal sign, or nearest or only traffic lights, at the intersection\nand is not making a hook turn at the intersection; or\n(b) a driver at an intersection with traffic arrows showing a green\ntraffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the\narrow and has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red arrow\nsign, or nearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.\nA driver may stop after the stop line at an intersection with traffic lights showing a\ngreen traffic light, and not proceed through the intersection, because traffic is\ncongested.\n(2) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red while the\ndriver is stopped and the driver has not entered the intersection, the\ndriver must not enter the intersection.\n(3) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a left turn on\n(4) Also, subsection (2) does not apply to a driver if section 58 (1) applies\nto the driver.\n(5) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red while the\ndriver is stopped and the driver has entered the intersection, the driver\nmust leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do so safely.\n\n","sortOrder":62},{"sectionNumber":"Div 6","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic","content":"Division 6.2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic\narrows\n","sortOrder":63},{"sectionNumber":"62","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when turning at intersection with traffic lights","content":"62 Giving way when turning at intersection with traffic lights\n(1) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights must give way\nto—\n(a) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering; and\n(b) if the driver is turning left at a left turn on red after stopping sign\nat the intersection—\n(i) any vehicle approaching from the right, turning right at the\nintersection into the road the driver is entering or making a\nU-turn; and\n(ii) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is on the road\nthe driver is leaving; and\n(c) if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is going\nstraight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle\nturning left using a slip lane).\n\nGiving way at traffic lights and traffic arrows Division 6.2\n(2) However, a driver who is turning at an intersection with traffic arrows\nshowing a green traffic arrow need not give way to an oncoming\nvehicle if the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the green\ntraffic arrow.\nGiving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering\nDriver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle going straight ahead\n\nDriver turning right does not have to give way to an oncoming vehicle that is turning\nleft into the road the driver is entering using a slip lane\n","sortOrder":64},{"sectionNumber":"63","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at intersection with traffic lights not operating","content":"63 Giving way at intersection with traffic lights not operating\nor only partly operating\n(1) This section applies to a driver at an intersection if traffic lights at the\nintersection are not operating, or the traffic lights are showing only a\nflashing yellow traffic light.\n(2) If there is a traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must\ncomply with section 67 (Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop\nline at intersection without traffic lights) as if the sign were a stop\nsign at an intersection without traffic lights.\n(3) If there is no traffic light-stop sign at the intersection, the driver must\ngive way to vehicles and pedestrians at or near the intersection in\naccordance with section 72 (Giving way at intersection (except\nT-intersection or roundabout)) or section 73 (Giving way at\nT-intersection) as if the intersection were an intersection without\ntraffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line.\n(4) Subsection (3) does not apply if the intersection is a roundabout.\n\nGiving way at traffic lights and traffic arrows Division 6.2\n","sortOrder":65},{"sectionNumber":"64","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at flashing yellow traffic arrow at intersection","content":"64 Giving way at flashing yellow traffic arrow at intersection\nA driver turning in the direction indicated by a flashing yellow traffic\narrow at an intersection with traffic lights must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the road the driver is entering; and\n(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering; and\n(c) if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is going\nstraight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle\nturning left using a slip lane).\n","sortOrder":66},{"sectionNumber":"65","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at marked foot crossing (except at","content":"65 Giving way at marked foot crossing (except at\nintersection) with flashing yellow traffic light\n(1) This section applies to a driver approaching or at a marked foot\ncrossing (except at or near an intersection) with a flashing yellow\ntraffic light at the crossing.\n(2) The driver must—\n(a) give way to any pedestrian on or entering the crossing; and\n(b) not obstruct any pedestrian on the crossing; and\n(c) not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give\nway at the crossing; and\n(d) give way to any bicycle rider on or entering the crossing; and\n(e) not obstruct any bicycle rider on or entering the crossing.\n\nDivision 6.3 Twin red lights (except at level crossings)\n(3) If there is no pedestrian or bicycle rider on the crossing, and no other\nvehicle travelling in the same direction as the driver that is stopping,\nor has stopped, to give way at the crossing, the driver may proceed\nthrough the crossing.\nDivision 6.3 Twin red lights (except at level\ncrossings)\n","sortOrder":67},{"sectionNumber":"66","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossing)","content":"66 Stopping for twin red lights (except at level crossing)\n(1) A driver approaching or at twin red lights on a road (except at a level\ncrossing) must stop in accordance with subsections (2) and (3).\n(2) If there is a stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop safely\nbefore reaching the stop line, the driver must stop as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the stop line.\n(3) If there is no stop line at or near the lights and the driver can stop\nsafely before reaching the lights, the driver must stop as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the lights.\n(4) If the driver stops for the lights, the driver must not proceed until the\nlights are not showing.\n\n","sortOrder":68},{"sectionNumber":"Div 7","sectionType":"division","heading":"1 Giving way at stop sign, stop line,","content":"Division 7.1 Giving way at stop sign, stop line,\ngive way sign or give way line\napplying to driver\n","sortOrder":69},{"sectionNumber":"67","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop line at","content":"67 Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop line at\nintersection without traffic lights\n(1) A driver at an intersection with a stop sign or stop line, but without\ntraffic lights, must stop and give way in accordance with this section.\n(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching—\n(a) the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line—the intersection.\n(3) The driver must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the\nintersection except—\n(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the\ndriver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane; or\n(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.\n(4) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver must\nalso give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is\ncrossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.\n\n(5) For this section, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a\nT-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be turning.\nStop line\nStopping and giving way at a stop sign to vehicles on the left and right\nIn this example, vehicle B must stop and give way to each vehicle A.\n\nStopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle at a stop sign\nStopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle that is not at a stop\nsign or give way sign\n\n","sortOrder":70},{"sectionNumber":"68","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop line at other","content":"68 Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop line at other\nplaces\n(1) A driver approaching or at a place with a stop sign or stop line must\nstop and give way in accordance with this section, unless the place\nis—\n(a) an intersection; or\n(b) a children’s crossing; or\n(c) an area of a road that is not a children’s crossing only because it\ndoes not have—\n(i) children crossing flags; or\n(ii) children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights; or\n(d) a level crossing; or\n(e) a place with twin red lights.\n1 a stop sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road used by\nthe main body of moving vehicles from a service road\n2 a stop sign on an exit from a car park where the exit joins the road\n(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching—\n(a) the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line—the stop sign.\n\n(3) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the\nstop line or stop sign.\nStopping and giving way at a stop sign at a break in a dividing strip\nStopping and giving way at a stop sign where a car park exit joins a road\n\n","sortOrder":71},{"sectionNumber":"69","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at give way sign or give way line at","content":"69 Giving way at give way sign or give way line at\nintersection (except roundabout)\n(1) A driver at an intersection (except a roundabout) with a give way sign\nor give way line must give way in accordance with this section.\n(2) Unless the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give\nway to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the intersection except—\n(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the\ndriver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane; or\n(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.\n(2A) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way\nto—\n(a) any vehicle on the road the driver is entering, or turning right at\nthe intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a\nvehicle making a U-turn at the intersection); and\n(b) any other vehicle or pedestrian on the slip lane.\n(3) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the driver must\nalso give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is\ncrossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.\n\n(4) For this section, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a\nT-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be turning.\nGive way line\nGiving way at a give way sign to vehicles on the left and right\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to each vehicle A.\n\nGiving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle at a give way sign\nGiving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle that is not at a stop sign or\ngive way sign\n\nDriver turning right at a give way line does not have to give way to a vehicle turning\nleft using a slip lane\n","sortOrder":72},{"sectionNumber":"70","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at give way sign at bridge or length of narrow","content":"70 Giving way at give way sign at bridge or length of narrow\nroad\nA driver approaching a bridge or length of narrow road with a give\nway sign must give way to any oncoming vehicle that is on, or\napproaching, the bridge or length of road when the driver reaches the\nGiving way at a bridge\n\nGiving way at a length of narrow road\n","sortOrder":73},{"sectionNumber":"71","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at give way sign or give way line at other","content":"71 Giving way at give way sign or give way line at other\nplaces\n(1) A driver approaching or at a place (except an intersection, bridge or\nlength of narrow road, level crossing, or a place with twin red lights)\nwith a give way sign or give way line must give way in accordance\n1 A give way sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the part of the road used\nby the main body of moving vehicles from a service road.\n2 A give way sign on a road at a place where a bicycle path meets the road.\n\n(2) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near the\ngive way sign or give way line.\nGiving way at a give way sign at a break in a dividing strip\nGiving way at a give way sign where a bicycle path meets a road\nIn this example, the motor vehicle must give way to the bicycle.\n\nDivision 7.2 Giving way at intersection without\ntraffic lights or stop sign, stop line,\ngive way sign or give way line\napplying to driver\n","sortOrder":74},{"sectionNumber":"72","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at intersection (except T-intersection or","content":"72 Giving way at intersection (except T-intersection or\nroundabout)\n(1) A driver at an intersection (except a T-intersection or roundabout)\nwithout traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give\nway line, must give way in accordance with this section.\n(2) If the driver is going straight ahead, the driver must give way to any\nvehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line, give\nway sign or give way line applies to the driver of the approaching\nDriver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that is going straight\nahead\n\nDriver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that is turning right\n(3) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane),\nthe driver must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop\nline, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the\napproaching vehicle; and\n(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering.\nDriver turning left giving way to a vehicle on the right that is going straight ahead\n\nDriver turning left giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering\n\n(4) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must give way\nto—\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right or turning right at the\nintersection into the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn at the intersection); and\n(b) any pedestrian on or entering the slip lane.\nDriver turning left using a slip lane giving way to a vehicle that is turning right into\nthe road the driver is entering\n(5) If the driver is turning right, the driver must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop\nline, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the\napproaching vehicle; and\n(b) any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning left\nat the intersection, unless—\n(i) a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies\nto the driver of the oncoming vehicle; or\n(ii) the oncoming vehicle is turning left using a slip lane; and\n\n(c) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the\nroad the driver is entering.\nDriver turning right giving way to a vehicle on the right that is turning right into\nthe road the driver is leaving\nDriver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead\non the road the driver is leaving\n\nExample 8\nDriver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is turning left into the\nroad the driver is entering\nExample 9\nDriver turning right giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is entering\n\n","sortOrder":75},{"sectionNumber":"73","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at T-intersection","content":"73 Giving way at T-intersection\n(1) A driver at a T-intersection without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop\nline, give way sign or give way line, must give way in accordance\n(2) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) or\nright from the terminating road into the continuing road, the driver\nmust give way to—\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection);\nand\n(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road at or near the\nintersection.\nDriver turning right from the terminating road giving way to a vehicle on the\ncontinuing road\n\nDriver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the terminating\nroad giving way to a pedestrian on the continuing road\n(3) If the driver is turning left from the terminating road into the\ncontinuing road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle\nmaking a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection);\nand\n(b) any pedestrian on the slip lane.\n(4) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane)\nfrom the continuing road into the terminating road, the driver must\ngive way to any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or\nnear the intersection.\n\nDriver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from the continuing road\ngiving way to a pedestrian on the terminating road\n(5) If the driver is turning from the continuing road into the terminating\nroad using a slip lane, the driver must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle approaching from the right (except a vehicle making\na U-turn from the terminating road at the T-intersection); and\n(b) any pedestrian on or entering the slip lane.\n(6) If the driver is turning right from the continuing road into the\nterminating road, the driver must give way to—\n(a) any oncoming vehicle that is travelling through the intersection\non the continuing road or turning left at the intersection; and\n(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near\nthe intersection.\n\nturning left from the continuing road into the terminating road, for\na driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the right at a\nT-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead\nturning right from the continuing road into the terminating road,\nfor a driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the left at\na T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead\nDriver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an oncoming vehicle\ntravelling through the intersection on the continuing road\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A\n\nDriver leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead on the terminating road\ngiving way to a vehicle travelling through the intersection on the continuing road\nThis example shows a T-intersection where the continuing road (which is marked\nwith broken white lines) goes around a corner. Vehicle B is leaving the continuing\nroad to enter the terminating road. In this example, vehicle B must give way to\nvehicle A.\nDriver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an oncoming vehicle\nturning left from the continuing road\n\nEntering or leaving road related areas and adjacent land Division 7.3\nDriver turning right from the continuing road giving way to a pedestrian on the\nterminating road\nDivision 7.3 Entering or leaving road related areas\nand adjacent land\n","sortOrder":76},{"sectionNumber":"74","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when entering road from road related area or","content":"74 Giving way when entering road from road related area or\nadjacent land\n(1) A driver entering a road from a road related area, or adjacent land,\nwithout traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give\nway line must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle travelling on the road or turning into the road (except\na vehicle turning right into the road from a road related area or\nadjacent land); and\n(b) any pedestrian on the road; and\n(c) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver\ncrosses to enter the road; and\n(d) for a driver entering the road from a road related area—\n(i) any pedestrian on the road related area; and\n\nDivision 7.3 Entering or leaving road related areas and adjacent land\n(ii) any other vehicle ahead of the driver’s vehicle or\napproaching from the left or right.\nDriver entering a road from a road related area giving way to a pedestrian on the\nfootpath and a vehicle on the road\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to the pedestrian on the footpath and to\nvehicle A.\n","sortOrder":77},{"sectionNumber":"75","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when entering road related area or adjacent","content":"75 Giving way when entering road related area or adjacent\nland from road\n(1) A driver entering a road related area or adjacent land from a place on\na road without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or\ngive way line must give way to—\n(a) any pedestrian on the road; and\n(b) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver\ncrosses or enters; and\n\nEntering or leaving road related areas and adjacent land Division 7.3\n(c) if the driver is turning right from the road—any oncoming\nvehicle on the road that is going straight ahead or turning left;\nand\n(d) if the road the driver is leaving ends at a T-intersection opposite\nthe road related area or adjacent land and the driver is crossing\nthe continuing road—any vehicle on the continuing road.\nDriver turning right from a road into a road related area giving way to an oncoming\nvehicle that is going straight ahead and to a pedestrian on the footpath\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. Vehicle B must also give\nway to the pedestrian on the footpath.\n\nDivision 7.4 Keeping clear of and giving way to particular vehicles\nDriver crossing a continuing road at a T-intersection to enter a road related area\ngiving way to a vehicle on the continuing road\nDivision 7.4 Keeping clear of and giving way to\nparticular vehicles\n","sortOrder":78},{"sectionNumber":"76","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping clear of tram travelling in tram lane etc","content":"76 Keeping clear of tram travelling in tram lane etc\n(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching tram\ntravelling in a tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side\nof the tracks by a broken or continuous yellow line parallel to the\ntracks.\n(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching tram travelling in a tram\nlane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a\nbroken or continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks, the driver must\nmove out of the path of the tram as soon as the driver can do so safely.\n\nKeeping clear of and giving way to particular vehicles Division 7.4\n","sortOrder":79},{"sectionNumber":"77","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to buses","content":"77 Giving way to buses\n(1) A driver driving on a length of road in a built-up area, in the left lane\nor left line of traffic, or in a bicycle lane on the far left side of the\nroad, must give way to a bus in front of the driver if—\n(a) the bus has stopped, or is moving slowly, at the far left side of\nthe road, on a shoulder of the road, or in a bus-stop bay; and\n(b) the bus displays a give way to buses sign and the right direction\nindicator lights of the bus are operating; and\n(c) the bus is about to enter or proceed in the lane or line of traffic\nin which the driver is driving.\nleft lane, of a road, means—\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road (the first\nlane) or, if the first lane is a bicycle lane, the marked lane next\nto the first lane; or\n(b) if there is an obstruction in the first lane (for example, a parked\ncar or roadworks) and the first lane is not a bicycle lane—the\nmarked lane next to the first lane.\nleft line of traffic, for a road, means the line of traffic nearest to the\nfar left side of the road.\n","sortOrder":80},{"sectionNumber":"78","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping clear of police or emergency vehicle","content":"78 Keeping clear of police or emergency vehicle\n(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching police or\nemergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light\n(whether or not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.\n\n(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching police or emergency\nvehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not\nit is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm, the driver must\nmove out of the path of the vehicle as soon as the driver can do so\n(3) This section applies to the driver despite any other provision of this\n","sortOrder":81},{"sectionNumber":"79","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to police or emergency vehicle","content":"79 Giving way to police or emergency vehicle\n(1) A driver must give way to a police or emergency vehicle that is\ndisplaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also\ndisplaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.\n(2) This section applies to the driver despite any other provision of this\nregulation that would otherwise require the driver of a police or\nemergency vehicle to give way to the driver.\n","sortOrder":82},{"sectionNumber":"80","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at children’s crossing","content":"80 Stopping at children’s crossing\n(1) A driver approaching a children’s crossing must drive at a speed at\nwhich the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.\n(2) A driver approaching or at a children’s crossing must stop as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the stop line at the crossing if—\n(a) a hand-held stop sign is displayed at the crossing; or\n(b) a pedestrian or bicycle rider is on or entering the crossing.\n\n(3) If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a hand-held stop sign, the\ndriver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian or bicycle rider\non or entering the crossing and the holder of the sign—\n(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver; or\n(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.\n(4) If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a pedestrian or bicycle\nrider, the driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian or\nbicycle rider on or entering the crossing.\n(5) For this section, if a children’s crossing extends across a road with a\ndividing strip, the part of the children’s crossing on each side of the\ndividing strip is taken to be a separate children’s crossing.\n(6) In this regulation:\nchildren’s crossing means an area of a road—\n(a) at a place with stop lines marked on the road, and—\n(i) children crossing flags; or\n(ii) children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights; and\n(b) indicated by—\n(i) 2 red and white posts erected on each side of the road; or\n(ii) 2 parallel continuous or broken lines on the road surface\nfrom 1 side of the road completely or partly across the\n(c) extending across the road between the posts or lines.\n\nDriver stopped at stop line for pedestrians on a children’s crossing with children\ncrossing flags\nIn this example, the driver must stop at the stop line because there are pedestrians\non the children’s crossing.\nDriver stopped at stop line for pedestrians on a children’s crossing with children’s\ncrossing signs and twin yellow lights\nIn this example, the driver must stop at the stop line because there are pedestrians\non the children’s crossing.\n\n","sortOrder":83},{"sectionNumber":"81","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at pedestrian crossing","content":"81 Giving way at pedestrian crossing\n(1) A driver approaching a pedestrian crossing must drive at a speed at\nwhich the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the crossing.\n(2) A driver must give way to any pedestrian or bicycle rider on or\nentering a pedestrian crossing.\npedestrian crossing means an area of a road—\n(a) at a place with white stripes on the road surface that—\n(i) run lengthwise along the road; and\n(ii) are of approximately the same length; and\n(iii) are approximately parallel to each other; and\n(iv) are in a row that extends completely, or partly, across the\n(b) with or without either or both of the following:\n(i) a pedestrian crossing sign;\n(ii) alternating flashing twin yellow lights.\n\nGiving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing\nIn this example, the driver must give way to the pedestrian on the crossing.\nGiving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing at a slip lane\nIn this example, the driver must give way to the pedestrian on the crossing.\n\n","sortOrder":84},{"sectionNumber":"82","sectionType":"section","heading":"Overtaking or passing vehicle at children’s crossing or","content":"82 Overtaking or passing vehicle at children’s crossing or\npedestrian crossing\nA driver approaching a children’s crossing, or pedestrian crossing,\nmust not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way to\na pedestrian, or bicycle rider, on or entering the crossing.\nDriver not passing a vehicle that has stopped to give way to a pedestrian at a\npedestrian crossing\nIn this example, vehicle A has stopped to give way to a pedestrian on the crossing.\nVehicle B must not overtake or pass vehicle A.\n","sortOrder":85},{"sectionNumber":"83","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way to pedestrian in shared zone","content":"83 Giving way to pedestrian in shared zone\nA driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian in\nthe zone.\n\n","sortOrder":86},{"sectionNumber":"84","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when driving through break in dividing strip","content":"84 Giving way when driving through break in dividing strip\n(1) If a driver drives through a break in a dividing strip that has no stop\nsign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, the driver must give\nway to—\n(a) any tram on the dividing strip; and\n(b) any vehicle travelling on the part of the road the driver is\nentering (except a vehicle to which a stop sign, stop line, give\nway sign, or give way line applies).\nGiving way when driving through a break in a median strip\n\nOther give way sections Division 7.6\nGiving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to leave a service road\nGiving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to enter a service road\n","sortOrder":87},{"sectionNumber":"85","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way on painted island","content":"85 Giving way on painted island\nA driver entering a turning lane from a painted island must give way\nto—\n(a) any vehicle in the turning lane; or\n(b) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the far left\nside of the road—any vehicle entering the turning lane from the\nmarked lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the right of the\nturning lane; or\n\n(c) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the dividing\nline or median strip on the road or the far right side of the road—\nany vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane, or\nline of traffic, immediately to the left of the turning lane.\nDriver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a vehicle entering\nthe turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the right of the turning lane\n\nOther give way sections Division 7.6\nDriver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a vehicle entering\nthe turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the left of the turning lane\n","sortOrder":88},{"sectionNumber":"86","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way in median turning bay","content":"86 Giving way in median turning bay\n(1) A driver entering a median turning bay must give way to any\noncoming vehicle already in the turning bay.\nmedian turning bay means a marked lane, or the part of a marked\nlane—\n(a) to which a median turning lane sign applies; or\n(b) where traffic lane arrows applying to the lane indicate that\nvehicles travelling in opposite directions must turn right.\n\nGiving way in a median turning bay\n","sortOrder":89},{"sectionNumber":"87","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving from side of road or median","content":"87 Giving way when moving from side of road or median\nstrip parking area\n(1) A driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the far left\nor right side of a road must give way to any vehicle travelling in the\nlane or line of traffic.\n(2) However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a\n(a) the driver of the vehicle is required to give way to the bus under\nsection 77 (Giving way to buses); and\n(b) it is safe for the bus to enter the lane or line of traffic in which\nthe vehicle is driving.\n(3) A driver turning from a median strip parking area into a marked lane,\nor a line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the lane\nor line of traffic.\n\nTraffic signs and road markings at intersections and other places Division 8.1\n","sortOrder":90},{"sectionNumber":"Div 8","sectionType":"division","heading":"1 Traffic signs and road markings at","content":"Division 8.1 Traffic signs and road markings at\nintersections and other places\n","sortOrder":91},{"sectionNumber":"88","sectionType":"section","heading":"Left turn sign","content":"88 Left turn sign\n(1) If there is a left turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn\nleft at the intersection.\n(2) If there is a left lane must turn left sign at an intersection, a driver who\nis in the left marked lane when entering the intersection must turn left\nat the intersection.\n","sortOrder":92},{"sectionNumber":"89","sectionType":"section","heading":"Right turn sign","content":"89 Right turn sign\n(1) If there is a right turn only sign at an intersection, a driver must turn\nright at the intersection.\n(2) If there is a right lane must turn right sign at an intersection, a driver\nwho is in the right marked lane when entering the intersection must\nturn right at the intersection.\nturn right does not include make a U-turn.\n","sortOrder":93},{"sectionNumber":"90","sectionType":"section","heading":"No turns sign","content":"90 No turns sign\nIf there is a no turns sign at an intersection, a driver must not turn left\nor right, or make a U-turn, at the intersection.\n\nDivision 8.1 Traffic signs and road markings at intersections and other places\n","sortOrder":94},{"sectionNumber":"91","sectionType":"section","heading":"No left turn and no right turn sign","content":"91 No left turn and no right turn sign\n(1) If there is a no left turn sign at an intersection, or another place on a\nroad, a driver must not turn left at the intersection or place.\n(2) If there is a no right turn sign at an intersection, or another place on a\nroad, a driver must not turn right or make a U-turn at the intersection\nor place.\n(3) However, a driver may make a U-turn at the intersection or place if\nthere is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection or place.\n","sortOrder":95},{"sectionNumber":"92","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic lane arrows","content":"92 Traffic lane arrows\n(1) If a driver is driving in a marked lane at an intersection (except a\nroundabout) and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the\ndriver must—\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that direction;\nor\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in 1 of those\ndirections.\n(2) However, this section does not apply to a driver if—\n(a) the arrows indicate a direction to the right (whether or not they\nalso indicate another direction) at an intersection and the driver\nis making a U-turn at the intersection; or\n(b) a traffic sign indicates that the driver may drive in a direction\ndifferent to that indicated by the traffic lane arrows; or\n(c) the driver is driving in the direction indicated by traffic lane\narrows that apply to 1 or more marked lanes and there is an\nobstruction in each of those lanes; or\n\nTraffic signs and road markings at intersections and other places Division 8.1\n(d) the driver is turning at an intersection in accordance with\nsection 28 (2) (Starting left turn from multi-lane road) or\nsection 32 (2) (Starting right turn from multi-lane road).\nTraffic lane arrows on the surface of marked lanes\nTraffic lane arrows on a traffic sign\n(3) The existence of a bicycle storage area in a marked lane does not alter\na driver’s obligation to comply with this section.\n\nDivision 8.2 Traffic signs and road markings\ngenerally\n","sortOrder":96},{"sectionNumber":"93","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking or passing sign","content":"93 No overtaking or passing sign\n(1) A driver must not—\n(a) drive past a no overtaking or passing sign if any oncoming\nvehicle is on the bridge or length of road to which the sign\n(b) overtake a vehicle on a bridge or length of road to which a no\novertaking or passing sign applies.\n(2) A no overtaking or passing sign on a road applies to the length of road\n(including a length of road on a bridge) beginning at the sign and\nending—\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at that\ndistance past the sign; or\n(b) if the sign applies to a bridge—at the end of the bridge; or\n(c) at an end no overtaking or passing sign on the road.\n","sortOrder":97},{"sectionNumber":"94","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking on bridge sign","content":"94 No overtaking on bridge sign\nA driver on a bridge with a no overtaking on bridge sign must not\novertake a vehicle between the sign and the far end of the bridge.\n","sortOrder":98},{"sectionNumber":"95","sectionType":"section","heading":"Emergency stopping lane only sign","content":"95 Emergency stopping lane only sign\n(1) A driver must not drive in an emergency stopping lane unless—\n(a) the driver needs to drive in the emergency stopping lane to avoid\na collision, to stop in the lane, or because the driver’s vehicle is\ndisabled; or\n\nTraffic signs and road markings generally Division 8.2\n(b) the driver is driving a police vehicle or emergency vehicle.\n(2) This section does not apply to the rider of a bicycle.\nemergency stopping lane means a marked lane, or the part of a\nmarked lane, to which an emergency stopping lane only sign applies.\n","sortOrder":99},{"sectionNumber":"96","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keep clear marking","content":"96 Keep clear marking\n(1) A driver must not stop on an area of a road marked with a keep clear\nmarking.\nkeep clear marking means the words ‘keep clear’ marked across all\nor part of a road, with or without continuous lines marked across all\nor part of the road.\nKeep clear marking bounded by line road markings\n\nKeep clear marking with no line road markings\n","sortOrder":100},{"sectionNumber":"97","sectionType":"section","heading":"Road access sign","content":"97 Road access sign\n(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a road access\nsign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that the driver\nor the driver’s vehicle is not permitted beyond the sign.\n(2) A road access sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning\nat the sign (including any road into which the length of road merges)\nand ending—\n(a) if the sign is on a freeway—at an end freeway sign or end road\naccess sign on the road; or\n(b) if the sign is not on a freeway—at the nearer of the following:\n(i) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of\nthe road;\n(ii) an end road access sign on the road.\n\nTraffic signs and road markings generally Division 8.2\nA road access sign on an access ramp to a freeway applies to the access ramp and\nthe freeway into which the access ramp merges\nRoad access sign End freeway sign\nEnd road access sign\n","sortOrder":101},{"sectionNumber":"98","sectionType":"section","heading":"One-way sign","content":"98 One-way sign\n(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a one-way sign\napplies except in the direction indicated by the arrow on the sign.\n(2) A one-way sign on a road applies to the length of road beginning at\nthe sign and ending at the nearer of the following:\n(a) a two-way sign on the road;\n(b) a keep left sign on the road;\n(c) another sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the\nroad is a two-way road;\n(d) if the road ends at a T-intersection—the end of the road.\n\n(3) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider—\n(a) is riding on a bicycle path, footpath, nature strip, separated\nfootpath or shared path adjacent to the length of road; and\n(b) is permitted to ride on the bicycle path, footpath, nature strip,\nseparated footpath or shared path under this regulation.\n","sortOrder":102},{"sectionNumber":"99","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keep left and keep right sign","content":"99 Keep left and keep right sign\n(1) A driver driving past a keep left sign must drive to the left of the sign.\n(2) A driver driving past a keep right sign must drive to the right of the\n(3) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the rider—\n(a) is riding on a bicycle path, footpath, nature strip, separated\nfootpath or shared path; and\n(b) is permitted to ride on the bicycle path, footpath, nature strip,\nseparated footpath or shared path under this regulation.\n","sortOrder":103},{"sectionNumber":"100","sectionType":"section","heading":"No entry sign","content":"100 No entry sign\nA driver must not drive past a no entry sign.\n","sortOrder":104},{"sectionNumber":"101","sectionType":"section","heading":"Hand-held stop sign","content":"101 Hand-held stop sign\n(1) A driver approaching a hand-held stop sign must stop before reaching\nthe sign.\n\nSigns for trucks, buses and other large vehicles Division 8.3\n(2) The driver must not proceed until the holder of the sign—\n(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver; or\n(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may proceed.\n(3) This section does not apply to a driver approaching or at a hand-held\nstop sign at a children’s crossing.\n","sortOrder":105},{"sectionNumber":"101A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Safety ramp and arrester bed sign","content":"101A Safety ramp and arrester bed sign\n(1) A driver must not drive on a safety ramp or arrester bed unless it is\nnecessary for the driver to do so in the interests of safety.\narrester bed means an area to which an arrester bed sign applies.\nsafety ramp means an area to which a safety ramp sign applies.\nDivision 8.3 Signs for trucks, buses and other\nlarge vehicles\n","sortOrder":106},{"sectionNumber":"102","sectionType":"section","heading":"Clearance and low clearance sign","content":"102 Clearance and low clearance sign\n(1) A driver must not drive past a clearance sign, or a low clearance sign,\nif the driver’s vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is higher than\nthe height (in metres) indicated by the sign.\nvehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":107},{"sectionNumber":"103","sectionType":"section","heading":"Load limit sign","content":"103 Load limit sign\n(1) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (gross mass) sign or\ngross load limit sign if the total of the gross mass (in tonnes) of the\ndriver’s vehicle, and any vehicle connected to it, is more than the\ngross mass indicated by the sign.\n(2) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (mass per axle group)\nsign if the mass (in tonnes) carried by an axle group of the driver’s\nvehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is more than the mass indicated\nby the sign for the axle group.\nvehicle includes any load carried by the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":108},{"sectionNumber":"104","sectionType":"section","heading":"No trucks sign","content":"104 No trucks sign\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks\nsign that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM\nof the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination, any\nvehicle in the combination) is more than that mass.\n(2) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no trucks\nsign that has information on or with it indicating a length if the length\nof the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination, the\nlength of the combination) is longer than that length.\n(3) The driver of a truck must not drive past a no trucks sign that has no\ninformation on or with it indicating a mass or length.\n\nSigns for trucks, buses and other large vehicles Division 8.3\n(4) This section does not apply to a driver if the destination of the driver\nlies beyond a no trucks sign and—\n(a) there is no other route by which the driver’s vehicle could reach\nthat destination; or\n(b) any other route by which the driver’s vehicle could reach that\ndestination would require the vehicle to pass another no trucks\n","sortOrder":109},{"sectionNumber":"105","sectionType":"section","heading":"Trucks must enter sign","content":"105 Trucks must enter sign\nIf the driver of a truck drives past a trucks must enter sign, the driver\nmust enter the area indicated by information on or with the sign.\n","sortOrder":110},{"sectionNumber":"106","sectionType":"section","heading":"No buses sign","content":"106 No buses sign\n(1) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has\ninformation on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM of the bus is\nmore than that mass.\n(2) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has\ninformation on or with it indicating a length if the bus is longer than\nthat length.\n(3) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign that has no\ninformation on or with it indicating a mass or length.\n","sortOrder":111},{"sectionNumber":"107","sectionType":"section","heading":"Buses must enter sign","content":"107 Buses must enter sign\nIf the driver of a bus drives past a buses must enter sign, the driver\nmust enter the area indicated by information on or with the sign.\n\n","sortOrder":112},{"sectionNumber":"108","sectionType":"section","heading":"Trucks and buses low gear sign","content":"108 Trucks and buses low gear sign\n(1) If the driver of a truck or bus is driving on a length of road to which\na trucks and buses low gear sign applies, the driver must drive the\ntruck or bus in a gear that is low enough to limit the speed of the truck\nor bus without the use of a primary brake.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the driver of a bus if information on\nor with the sign indicates that it applies only to trucks.\n(3) A trucks and buses low gear sign on a road applies to the length of\nroad beginning at the sign and ending—\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at that\ndistance on the road from the sign; or\n(b) in any other case—at an end trucks and buses low gear sign on\nprimary brake means the footbrake, or other brake, fitted to a truck\nor bus that is normally used to slow or stop the vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":113},{"sectionNumber":"109","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of roundabout","content":"109 Meaning of roundabout\nroundabout means an intersection—\n(a) with either—\n(i) 1 or more marked lanes, all of which are for the use of\nvehicles travelling in the same direction around a central\ntraffic island; or\n(ii) room for 1 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same\ndirection around a central traffic island; and\n(b) with or without a roundabout sign at each entrance.\n","sortOrder":114},{"sectionNumber":"110","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of halfway around roundabout","content":"110 Meaning of halfway around roundabout\nA driver leaves a roundabout halfway around the roundabout if the\ndriver leaves the roundabout on a road that is straight ahead, or\nsubstantially straight ahead, from the road on which the driver enters\nthe roundabout.\n","sortOrder":115},{"sectionNumber":"111","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering roundabout from multi-lane road or road with","content":"111 Entering roundabout from multi-lane road or road with\n2 or more lines of traffic travelling in same direction\n(1) A driver entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road, or a road with\nroom for 2 or more lines of traffic (other than motorbikes, bicycles,\nmotorised wheelchairs or animals) travelling in the same direction as\nthe driver, must enter the roundabout in accordance with this section.\n\n(2) If the driver is to leave the roundabout less than halfway around it,\nthe driver must enter the roundabout from the left marked lane or, if\nthe road is not a multi-lane road, as near as practicable to the left side\nLeaving a roundabout less than halfway around it\n(3) If the driver is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it,\nthe driver must enter the roundabout from the right marked lane or, if\nthe road is not a multi-lane road, from the left of, parallel to, and as\nnear as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.\n\nLeaving a roundabout more than halfway around it\n(4) If the driver is to leave the roundabout halfway around it, the driver\nmay enter the roundabout from any marked lane or, if the road is not\na multi-lane road, anywhere on the part of the road on which vehicles\ntravelling in the same direction as the driver may travel.\nLeaving a roundabout halfway around it\n\n(5) Despite subsections (2) to (4), if the driver is entering the roundabout\nfrom a marked lane and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the\nlane, the driver must—\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that direction\nafter entering the roundabout; or\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in 1 of those\ndirections after entering the roundabout.\nRoundabout with 3 entry points\n\nRoundabout with 5 entry points\n(6) Subsection (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.\n(7) Subsection (5) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal if the\nrider is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around it.\n(8) Despite subsection (2), a driver may approach and enter the\nroundabout from the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or\ninstead of, the left lane if—\nroundabout; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout less\nthan halfway around it from within the left lane; and\nleave the roundabout less than halfway around it by occupying\nthe next marked lane, or both lanes.\n\n(9) Despite subsection (3), the driver may approach and enter the\nroundabout from the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or\ninstead of, the right lane if—\nroundabout; and\n(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout more\nthan halfway around it from within the right lane; and\nleave the roundabout more than halfway around it by occupying\nthe next marked lane, or both lanes.\n(10) In this section:\nleft lane means—\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road; or\nright lane means—\n(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on\nthe road; or\n\n","sortOrder":116},{"sectionNumber":"112","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving left change of direction signal when entering","content":"112 Giving left change of direction signal when entering\n(1) This section applies to a driver entering a roundabout if—\n(a) the driver is to leave the roundabout at the first exit after entering\nthe roundabout; and\n(b) the exit is less than halfway around the roundabout.\n(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a left change of\ndirection signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other\ndrivers and pedestrians.\n(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal until\nthe driver has left the roundabout.\n(4) This section does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not\n","sortOrder":117},{"sectionNumber":"113","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving right change of direction signal when entering","content":"113 Giving right change of direction signal when entering\n(1) This section applies to a driver entering a roundabout if the driver is\nto leave the roundabout more than halfway around it.\n(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a right change\nof direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other\ndrivers and pedestrians.\n(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal while\nthe driver is driving in the roundabout, unless—\n(a) the driver is changing marked lanes, or entering another line of\ntraffic; or\n\n(b) the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator lights;\nor\n(c) the driver is about to leave the roundabout.\n","sortOrder":118},{"sectionNumber":"114","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when entering or driving in roundabout","content":"114 Giving way when entering or driving in roundabout\n(1) A driver entering a roundabout must give way to—\n(a) any vehicle in the roundabout; and\n(b) a tram that is entering or approaching the roundabout.\n(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give way to a tram that is in,\nentering or approaching the roundabout.\n","sortOrder":119},{"sectionNumber":"115","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving in roundabout","content":"115 Driving in roundabout\n(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must drive—\n(a) to the left of the central traffic island in the roundabout; or\n(b) if subsection (2) applies to the driver—on the edge of the central\ntraffic island, to the left of the centre of the island; or\n(c) if subsection (3) applies to the driver—over the central traffic\nisland, as near as practicable to the left of the centre of the\ncentral traffic island.\n\n(2) This subsection applies to a driver if—\n(a) the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout\nwithout driving on the edge of the central traffic island; and\n(b) the driver can safely drive on the edge of the central traffic\nisland.\n(3) This subsection applies to a driver if—\n(a) the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout\nwithout driving over the central traffic island; and\n(b) the central traffic island is designed to allow a vehicle of that\nkind to be driven over it; and\n(c) the driver can safely drive over the central traffic island.\n","sortOrder":120},{"sectionNumber":"116","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving","content":"116 Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving\nIf a driver is driving in a marked lane in a roundabout and there are\ntraffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must—\n(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in or leave the\nroundabout in that direction; or\n(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in or leave the\nroundabout in 1 of those directions.\n\n","sortOrder":121},{"sectionNumber":"117","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving change of direction signal when changing marked","content":"117 Giving change of direction signal when changing marked\nlane or line of traffic in roundabout\n(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change of direction\nsignal before the driver changes marked lanes to the left, or enters a\npart of the roundabout where there is room for another line of traffic\nto the left, in the roundabout, unless the driver’s vehicle is not fitted\nwith direction indicator lights.\n(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a right change of direction\nsignal before the driver changes marked lanes to the right, or enters a\npart of the roundabout where there is room for another line of traffic\nto the right, in the roundabout.\n","sortOrder":122},{"sectionNumber":"118","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving left change of direction signal when leaving","content":"118 Giving left change of direction signal when leaving\n(1) If practicable, a driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change\nof direction signal when leaving the roundabout.\n(2) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon as\nthe driver has left the roundabout.\n(3) This section does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle is not\n\n","sortOrder":123},{"sectionNumber":"119","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way by rider of bicycle or animal to vehicle leaving","content":"119 Giving way by rider of bicycle or animal to vehicle leaving\nThe rider of a bicycle or animal who is riding in the far left marked\nlane of a roundabout with 2 or more marked lanes, or the far left line\nof traffic in a roundabout with room for 2 or more lines of traffic\n(other than motorbikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals),\nmust give way to any vehicle leaving the roundabout.\n\n","sortOrder":124},{"sectionNumber":"120","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of level crossing","content":"120 Meaning of level crossing\nlevel crossing means—\n(a) an area where a road and a railway meet at substantially the same\nlevel, whether or not there is a level crossing sign on the road at\nall or any of the entrances to the area; or\n(b) an area where a road and tram tracks meet at substantially the\nsame level and that has a level crossing sign on the road at each\nentrance to the area.\n(1A) A reference to a level crossing in this section includes a reference to\nany area adjacent to the crossing that is denoted by painted\ncross-hatched road markings.\n","sortOrder":125},{"sectionNumber":"121","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and giving way at stop sign at level crossing","content":"121 Stopping and giving way at stop sign at level crossing\nA driver at a level crossing with a stop sign must—\n(a) stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line\nor, if there is no stop line, as near as practicable to, but before\nreaching, the stop sign; and\n(b) give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the\ncrossing.\n\nLevel crossings Part 10\n","sortOrder":126},{"sectionNumber":"122","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way at give way sign or give way line at level","content":"122 Giving way at give way sign or give way line at level\ncrossing\nA driver at a level crossing with a give way sign or give way line must\ngive way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the crossing.\n","sortOrder":127},{"sectionNumber":"123","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering level crossing when train or tram approaching","content":"123 Entering level crossing when train or tram approaching\netc\nA driver must not enter a level crossing if—\n(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red\nlights) are operating or warning bells are ringing; or\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or\nclosing; or\n(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing; or\n(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the\ncrossing, or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger\nof a collision with the train or tram if the driver entered the\ncrossing; or\n(e) the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the\ncrossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.\nExamples—par (e)\npedestrian, or by stock on the road.\n","sortOrder":128},{"sectionNumber":"124","sectionType":"section","heading":"Leaving level crossing","content":"124 Leaving level crossing\nA driver who enters a level crossing must leave the level crossing as\nsoon as the driver can do so safely.\n\n","sortOrder":129},{"sectionNumber":"Part 11","sectionType":"part","heading":"Keeping left, overtaking and","content":"Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking and\nother driving rules\n","sortOrder":130},{"sectionNumber":"125","sectionType":"section","heading":"Unreasonably obstructing driver or pedestrian","content":"125 Unreasonably obstructing driver or pedestrian\n(1) A driver must not unreasonably obstruct the path of another driver or\na pedestrian.\n(2) For this section, a driver does not unreasonably obstruct the path of\nanother driver or a pedestrian only because—\n(a) the driver is stopped in traffic; or\n(b) the driver is driving more slowly than other vehicles (unless the\ndriver is driving abnormally slowly in the circumstances).\nExample—driver driving abnormally slowly\nA driver driving at a speed of 20km/h on a length of road to which a speed limit of\n80km/h applies when there is no reason for the driver to drive at that speed on the\n","sortOrder":131},{"sectionNumber":"126","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping safe distance behind vehicle","content":"126 Keeping safe distance behind vehicle\nA driver must drive a sufficient distance behind a vehicle travelling\nin front of the driver so the driver can, if necessary, stop safely to\navoid a collision with the vehicle.\n\nGeneral Division 11.1\n","sortOrder":132},{"sectionNumber":"127","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping minimum distance between long vehicles","content":"127 Keeping minimum distance between long vehicles\n(1) The driver of a long vehicle must drive at least the required minimum\ndistance behind another long vehicle travelling in front of the driver,\nunless the driver is—\n(a) driving on a multi-lane road or any length of road in a built-up\narea; or\n(b) overtaking.\nlong vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or\nprojection, is 7.5m long, or longer.\nrequired minimum distance means—\n(a) for a road train that is behind a long vehicle—200m; or\n(b) for a long vehicle other than a road train that is behind a long\nvehicle—60m.\n","sortOrder":133},{"sectionNumber":"128","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering blocked intersection","content":"128 Entering blocked intersection\nA driver must not enter an intersection if the driver cannot drive\nthrough the intersection because the intersection, or a road beyond the\nintersection, is blocked.\nThe intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, may be blocked by congested\ntraffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between a vehicle and a\npedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.\n\n","sortOrder":134},{"sectionNumber":"128A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering blocked crossing","content":"128A Entering blocked crossing\n(1) A driver must not enter a children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or\npedestrian crossing if the driver cannot drive through the crossing\nbecause the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.\npedestrian, or by a fallen load on the road.\n(2) Despite subsection (1), a driver may enter a children’s crossing or a\npedestrian crossing if—\n(a) the crossing is immediately before an intersection that does not\nhave traffic lights; and\n(b) the crossing is not blocked; and\n(c) before entering the crossing, the driver gives way to any\npedestrian on the crossing.\n(3) Subsection (2) applies despite anything to the contrary in section 171\n(Stopping on or near children’s crossing) or section 172 (Stopping on\nor near pedestrian crossing (except at intersection)).\n(4) However, subsection (3) is not intended to permit a driver to park a\nvehicle contrary to section 171 or section 172.\n","sortOrder":135},{"sectionNumber":"129","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to far left side of road","content":"129 Keeping to far left side of road\n(1) A driver on a road (except a multi-lane road) must drive as near as\npracticable to the far left side of the road.\n(2) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike.\n\n","sortOrder":136},{"sectionNumber":"130","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to left on multi-lane road","content":"130 Keeping to left on multi-lane road\n(1) This section applies to a driver driving on a multi-lane road if—\n(a) the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of road\nwhere the driver is driving is over 80km/h; or\n(b) a keep left unless overtaking sign applies to the length of road\nwhere the driver is driving.\n(2) The driver must not drive in the right lane unless—\n(a) the driver is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of\nthe road, and is giving a right change of direction signal; or\n(b) the driver is overtaking; or\n(c) a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic lane arrows apply to\nany other lane and the driver is not turning left; or\n(d) the driver is required to drive in the right lane under section 159\n(Marked lane required to be used by particular kind of vehicle);\nor\n(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(f) the traffic in each other lane is congested; or\n(g) the traffic in every lane is congested; or\n(h) the right lane is a special purpose lane in which the driver, under\nanother provision of this regulation, is permitted to drive; or\n(i) there are only 2 marked lanes and the left lane is a slow vehicle\nturn out lane.\n\n(3) A keep left unless overtaking sign on a multi-lane road applies to the\nlength of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) an end keep left unless overtaking sign on the road;\n(b) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the\nroad is no longer a multi-lane road;\nlane, for a driver, means a marked lane for vehicles travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver, but does not include a special purpose\nlane in which the driver is not permitted to drive.\nslow vehicle turn out lane means a marked lane, or the part of a\nmarked lane, to which a slow vehicle turn out lane sign applies.\n","sortOrder":137},{"sectionNumber":"131","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to left of oncoming vehicle","content":"131 Keeping to left of oncoming vehicle\n(1) A driver must drive to the left of any oncoming vehicle unless—\n(a) the driver is turning right at an intersection; and\n(b) the driver is passing an oncoming vehicle turning right at the\n(c) there is no traffic sign or road marking indicating that the driver\nmust pass to the left of the oncoming vehicle.\n\n(2) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike that is a postal\nvehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if—\n(a) the rider is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path; and\n(b) the rider is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or\nshared path under this regulation; and\n(c) either—\n(i) the oncoming vehicle is not on the footpath, nature strip or\nshared path; or\n(ii) the oncoming vehicle is not permitted, under this\nregulation, to be on the footpath, nature strip or shared\npath.\nDriving to the left of an oncoming vehicle\n\nOncoming vehicles turning right passing to the right of each other\n","sortOrder":138},{"sectionNumber":"132","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to left of centre of road or dividing line","content":"132 Keeping to left of centre of road or dividing line\n(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip\nmust drive to the left of the centre of the road, except as permitted\nunder section 133 or section 139 (1) (Exceptions for avoiding\nobstruction on road).\n\n(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line must drive to the left of the\ndividing line, except as permitted under section 134 (Exceptions to\nkeeping to left of dividing line) or section 139 (2).\nDriving to the left of a single continuous dividing line only\nDriving to the left of a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken\ndividing line\n\nDriving to the left of 2 parallel continuous dividing lines\n(2A) A driver on a road with a single continuous dividing line, a single\ncontinuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line or\n2 parallel continuous dividing lines must not drive across the dividing\nlines to perform a U-turn.\nDriving across a single continuous dividing line to make a U-turn is not permitted\n\nDriving across a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line\nto make a U-turn is not permitted\nDriving across 2 parallel continuous dividing lines to make a U-turn is not\npermitted\n(3) This section, section 133, section 134 and section 139 (1) and (2)\napply to a service road to which a two-way sign applies as if it were\na separate road, but do not apply to any other service road.\nroad does not include a footpath, nature strip, bicycle path, separated\nfootpath or shared path.\n\n","sortOrder":139},{"sectionNumber":"133","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to keeping to left of centre of road","content":"133 Exceptions to keeping to left of centre of road\n(1) This section applies to a driver on a two-way road without a dividing\nline or median strip.\n(2) The driver may drive to the right of the centre of the road—\n(a) to overtake another driver; or\n(b) to enter or leave the road; or\n(c) to enter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\nemergency stopping lane).\n(3) The driver may also drive to the right of the centre of the road if—\n(a) because of the width or condition of the road, it is not practicable\nto drive to the left of the centre of the road; and\n(b) the driver can do so safely.\n","sortOrder":140},{"sectionNumber":"134","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to keeping to left of dividing line","content":"134 Exceptions to keeping to left of dividing line\n(1) This section applies to a driver on a road with a dividing line.\n(2) If the dividing line is a single broken dividing line only, or a broken\ndividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line, or\n2 parallel broken dividing lines, the driver may drive to the right of\nthe dividing line—\n(a) to overtake another driver; or\n(b) to perform a U-turn, unless another provision would prohibit the\ndriver performing the U-turn.\n\n(3) If the dividing line is a single continuous or broken dividing line, or\na broken dividing line to the left or right of a single continuous\ndividing line, or 2 parallel broken dividing lines, the driver may drive\nto the right of the dividing line—\n(b) to enter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\nemergency stopping lane); or\n(c) to park in angle parking on the opposite side of the road provided\nthat the driver does not need to perform a U-turn to reach the\nparking area.\nDriving to the right of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on a road with\na broken dividing line only\n\nDriving to the right of the centre of the road permitted—overtaking on a road with\na broken dividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line\nExample 2A\nDriving across a single continuous dividing line is permitted to enter or leave the\nroad\n\nExample 2B\nDriving across a single continuous dividing line is permitted to leave the road to\nenter a road related area\nExample 2C\nDriving across a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line\nis permitted to enter or leave the road\n\nDriving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted - overtaking on a road\nwith a single continuous dividing line only\nDriving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted - overtaking on a road\nwith a single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line\n\nDriving to the right of the centre of the road not permitted—overtaking on a road\nwith 2 parallel continuous dividing lines\n","sortOrder":141},{"sectionNumber":"135","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping to left of median strip","content":"135 Keeping to left of median strip\n(1) A driver on a road with a median strip must drive to the left of the\nmedian strip, unless the driver is—\n(a) entering or driving in a median strip parking area; or\n(b) required to drive to the right of the median strip by a keep right\nmedian strip does not include a painted island.\n\n","sortOrder":142},{"sectionNumber":"136","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on one-way service road","content":"136 Driving on one-way service road\nA driver on the part of the road that is a service road (except a service\nroad to which a two-way sign applies) must drive in the same\ndirection as a vehicle travelling on the part of the road closest to the\nservice road is required to travel.\n","sortOrder":143},{"sectionNumber":"137","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping off dividing strip","content":"137 Keeping off dividing strip\n(1) A driver must not drive on a dividing strip, except as permitted under\nthis section or section 139 (4) (Exceptions for avoiding obstruction\non road).\n(2) A driver may drive on a dividing strip that is at the same level as the\nroad, and marked at each side by a continuous line—\n(b) to enter or leave an area on the dividing strip to which a parking\ncontrol sign applies if the driver is permitted to park in the area.\n(2A) For subsection (2), a dividing strip is to be treated as being at the same\nlevel as the road even if it contains 1 or more raised pavement bars or\nmarkers.\ndividing strip does not include a painted island.\n\n","sortOrder":144},{"sectionNumber":"138","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping off painted island","content":"138 Keeping off painted island\n(1) A driver must not drive on or over a single continuous line, or\n2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or surrounding a painted\nisland, except as permitted under this section or section 139 (4).\nPainted island surrounded by 2 parallel continuous lines\n(2) A driver may drive on or over a single continuous line along the side\nof or surrounding a painted island for up to 50m—\n(b) to enter a turning lane that begins immediately after the painted\nisland; or\n(c) to enter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\nemergency stopping lane); or\n(d) to park in angle parking on the opposite side of the road provided\nthat the driver does not need to perform a U-turn to reach the\nparking area.\n\n(3) Subsection (2) (a) does not apply in the case of a painted island—\n(a) that separates a road that takes vehicles in 1 direction from\nanother road that takes vehicles in the same direction at a place\nwhere the roads merge; or\n(b) that separates 1 part of a road from other parts of the road to\ncreate a slip lane.\n\n","sortOrder":145},{"sectionNumber":"139","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions for avoiding obstruction on road","content":"139 Exceptions for avoiding obstruction on road\n(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip\nmay drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an obstruction\nif—\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the\ndriver to drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid the\n(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line may drive to the right of the\ndividing line to avoid an obstruction if—\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the\ndriver to drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid the\n(3) For subsection (2), if the dividing line is a single continuous dividing\nline to the left of a broken dividing line, a single continuous dividing\nline only or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, the hazard in driving\nto the right of such a dividing line must be taken into account in\ndeciding whether it is reasonable to drive to the right of the dividing\nline.\n(4) A driver may drive on a dividing strip, or on or over a single\ncontinuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or\nsurrounding a painted island, to avoid an obstruction if—\n(b) it is necessary and reasonable to drive on the dividing strip or\npainted island to avoid the obstruction; and\n\n","sortOrder":146},{"sectionNumber":"140","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking unless safe to do so","content":"140 No overtaking unless safe to do so\nA driver must not overtake a vehicle unless—\n(b) the driver can safely overtake the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":147},{"sectionNumber":"141","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking etc to left of vehicle","content":"141 No overtaking etc to left of vehicle\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not overtake a vehicle to\nthe left of the vehicle unless—\n(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be\nsafely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle; or\n(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre\nof the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and\nit is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle; or\n(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of\nthe vehicle; or\n(d) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with section 151A.\n(2) The rider of a bicycle must not ride past, or overtake, to the left of a\nvehicle that is turning left and is giving a left change of direction\nsignal.\nvehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or\nany vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n\nOvertaking Division 11.3\n","sortOrder":148},{"sectionNumber":"142","sectionType":"section","heading":"No overtaking to right of vehicle turning right etc","content":"142 No overtaking to right of vehicle turning right etc\n(1) A driver must not overtake to the right of a vehicle if the vehicle is\nturning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is\ngiving a right change of direction signal.\nvehicle does not include a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or\nany vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign.\n","sortOrder":149},{"sectionNumber":"143","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking vehicle displaying do not overtake","content":"143 Passing or overtaking vehicle displaying do not overtake\nturning vehicle sign\n(1) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is\nturning left and is giving a left change of direction signal, unless it is\nsafe to do so.\n(1A) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign unless—\n(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be\nsafely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle; or\n(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre\nof the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and\nit is safe to overtake to the left of the vehicle; or\n(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left of\n\n(2) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the right of a vehicle\ndisplaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the vehicle is\nturning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and is\ngiving a right change of direction signal, unless it is safe to do so.\nA driver driving on a multi-lane road who is turning right at an intersection to which\na right turn only sign applies may drive past a vehicle displaying a do not overtake\nturning vehicle sign that is turning right from another marked lane, and giving a\nright change of direction signal, if it is safe to do so.\n","sortOrder":150},{"sectionNumber":"144","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping safe distance when overtaking","content":"144 Keeping safe distance when overtaking\nA driver overtaking a vehicle—\n(a) must pass the vehicle at a sufficient distance to avoid a collision\nwith the vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle; and\n(b) must not return to the marked lane or line of traffic where the\nvehicle is travelling until the driver is a sufficient distance past\nthe vehicle to avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing\nthe path of the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":151},{"sectionNumber":"145","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driver being overtaken not to increase speed","content":"145 Driver being overtaken not to increase speed\nIf a driver is overtaking another driver on a two-way road by crossing\na dividing line, or crossing to the right of the centre of the road, the\nother driver must not increase the speed at which the driver is driving\nuntil the first driver—\n(a) has passed the other driver; and\n(b) has returned to the marked lane or line of traffic where the other\ndriver is driving; and\n\n(c) is a sufficient distance in front of the other driver to avoid a\ncollision.\n","sortOrder":152},{"sectionNumber":"Div 11","sectionType":"division","heading":"4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of","content":"Division 11.4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of\ntraffic\n","sortOrder":153},{"sectionNumber":"146","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving within single marked lane or line of traffic","content":"146 Driving within single marked lane or line of traffic\n(1) A driver on a multi-lane road must drive so the driver’s vehicle is\ncompletely in a marked lane, unless the driver is—\n(a) entering a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\na shoulder of the road); or\n(b) entering or leaving the road; or\n(c) moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane; or\n(d) avoiding an obstruction; or\n(e) obeying a traffic control device applying to the marked lane; or\n(ea) lane filtering in accordance with section 151A; or\n(f) permitted to drive in more than 1 marked lane under another\nprovision of this regulation.\n(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver, but without marked lanes, must drive so the\ndriver’s vehicle is completely in a single line of traffic unless—\n(a) it is not practicable to drive completely in a single line of traffic;\nor\n(b) the driver is entering a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of\nthe road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a\nservice road or a shoulder of the road); or\n\n(c) the driver is entering or leaving the road; or\n(d) the driver is moving from 1 line of traffic to another line of\ntraffic; or\n(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(f) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with section 151A.\n","sortOrder":154},{"sectionNumber":"147","sectionType":"section","heading":"Moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane","content":"147 Moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane\nacross continuous line separating lanes\nA driver on a multi-lane road must not move from 1 marked lane to\nanother marked lane by crossing a continuous line separating the\nlanes unless—\n(a) the driver is avoiding an obstruction; or\n(b) the driver is obeying a traffic control device applying to the first\nmarked lane; or\n(c) the driver is permitted to drive in both marked lanes under\nanother provision of this regulation; or\n(d) either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane in which the\ndriver is permitted to drive under this regulation and the driver\nis moving to or from the special purpose lane; or\n(e) either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane during\nspecified times only and the driver—\n(i) is moving to or from that lane outside of the times during\nwhich it is a special purpose lane; and\n(ii) is permitted to drive in that lane outside of the times during\nwhich it is a special purpose lane under this regulation; or\n(f) the driver is lane filtering in accordance with section 151A.\n\n","sortOrder":155},{"sectionNumber":"148","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving from 1 marked lane or line of","content":"148 Giving way when moving from 1 marked lane or line of\ntraffic to another marked lane or line of traffic\n(1) A driver who is moving from 1 marked lane (whether or not the lane\nis ending) to another marked lane must give way to any vehicle\ntravelling in the same direction as the driver in the marked lane to\nwhich the driver is moving.\nGiving way when moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane\n\nGiving way when moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane\n(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver, and who is moving from 1 line of traffic to\nanother line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver in the line of traffic to which the driver is\nmoving.\n\n(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to a driver if the line of traffic in which\nthe driver is driving is merging with the line of traffic to which the\ndriver is moving.\nGiving way when moving from 1 line of traffic to another line of traffic when the\nlines are not merging\nIn this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A\n","sortOrder":156},{"sectionNumber":"148A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when moving within single marked lane","content":"148A Giving way when moving within single marked lane\nIf a driver diverges to the left or right within a marked lane, the driver\nmust give way to any vehicle that is in the lane.\n\n","sortOrder":157},{"sectionNumber":"149","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way when lines of traffic merge into single line of","content":"149 Giving way when lines of traffic merge into single line of\ntraffic\nA driver in a line of traffic that is merging with 1 or more lines of\ntraffic travelling in the same direction as the driver must give way to\na vehicle in another line of traffic if any part of the vehicle is ahead\nof the driver’s vehicle.\nGiving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of traffic\n","sortOrder":158},{"sectionNumber":"150","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on or across continuous white edge line","content":"150 Driving on or across continuous white edge line\n(1) A driver must not drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a\nroad unless subsection (1A) or (1B) applies to the driver.\n(1A) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road\nif the driver is—\n(a) overtaking a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn\nfrom the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of\ndirection signal; or\n\n(b) driving a slow-moving vehicle, and it is necessary for the driver\nto drive on or over the edge line to allow the vehicle to be\novertaken or passed by another vehicle; or\n(c) driving a vehicle that is too wide, or too long, to drive on the\nroad without driving on or over the edge line; or\n(d) avoiding an obstruction.\n(1B) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a road\nfor up to 100m if the driver is—\n(a) turning at an intersection; or\n(b) entering or leaving the road; or\n(c) entering a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\nanother kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, a\nshoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane); or\n(d) stopping at the side of the road (including any shoulder of the\nroad).\n(2) This section does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal.\n(3) For this section, a driver drives over a continuous white edge line on\na road if—\n(a) for a line on the far left side of the road—the driver’s vehicle is\nwholly or partly to the left of the line; or\n(b) for a line on the far right side of the road—the driver’s vehicle\nis wholly or partly to the right of the line.\n","sortOrder":159},{"sectionNumber":"151","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding motorbike or bicycle alongside more than 1 other","content":"151 Riding motorbike or bicycle alongside more than 1 other\nrider\n(1) The rider of a motorbike or bicycle must not ride on a road that is not\na multi-lane road alongside more than 1 other rider, unless\nsubsection (3) applies to the rider.\n\n(2) The rider of a motorbike or bicycle must not ride in a marked lane\nalongside more than 1 other rider in the marked lane, unless\nsubsection (3) applies to the rider.\n(3) The rider of a motorbike or bicycle may ride alongside more than\n1 other rider if the rider is—\n(a) overtaking the other riders; or\n(b) taking part in an event approved by the road transport authority\nfor this subsection.\n(4) If the rider of a motorbike or bicycle is riding on a road that is not a\nmulti-lane road alongside another rider, or in a marked lane alongside\nanother rider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not over 1.5m\nfrom the other rider.\nroad does not include a road related area, but includes a bicycle path,\nshared path and any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":160},{"sectionNumber":"151A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Motorbike lane filtering","content":"151A Motorbike lane filtering\n(1) The following sections do not apply to a motorbike rider who is lane\nfiltering:\n(a) section 46 (Giving left change of direction signal);\n(b) section 48 (Giving right change of direction signal);\n(c) section 141 (No overtaking etc to left of vehicle);\n(d) section 146 (Driving within single marked lane or line of\ntraffic);\n(e) section 147 (Moving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane\nacross continuous line separating lanes).\n\n(2) However, the exemption in subsection (1) applies only if—\n(a) the motorbike rider holds a full motorcycle licence; and\n(b) the motorbike is travelling at less than 30km/h; and\n(c) the vehicles adjacent to the motorbike are travelling at a speed\nless than the motorbike; and\n(ca) the motorbike is travelling on a road on which the speed limit is\nmore than 40km/h; and\n(d) the motorbike is not in a school zone; and\n(e) the motorbike is not travelling past a parked vehicle; and\n(f) the motorbike is not travelling in a bicycle lane; and\n(fa) a no filtering sign does not apply to the length of road; and\n(g) it is safe for the motorbike rider to lane filter.\nExamples—where it would not be safe for a motorbike rider to lane filter\n1 the rider is proceeding through a roundabout\n2 the rider is riding kerbside\n3 the rider is crossing a children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing\n4 the rider lane filters between vehicles in a manner that does not seek to avoid\ncollisions (including lane filtering between vehicles where there is insufficient\nclearance)\n5 the lane filtering occurs past a bus or heavy vehicle\n(3) For subsection 151A (2) (fa), a no filtering sign on a road applies to\na length of road starting at the sign and ending at the nearer of the\n(a) if the length of road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the\nend of the length of road;\n(b) the next end no filtering sign that is on the road.\n\n(4) The rider of a motorbike must not lane filter along a length of road to\nwhich a no lane filtering sign applies.\nend no filtering sign means a traffic sign—\n(a) with a symbol displaying a motorbike positioned between\n2 vehicles with a black diagonal line across the symbol; and\n(b) with a symbol positioned below the symbol mentioned in\nparagraph (a) displaying the word ‘END’ in black letters.\nfull licence—see the Road Transport (Driver Licensing)\nRegulation 2000, section 5 (2) (Basic kinds of driver licence).\nlane filtering, for a motorbike rider, means riding a motorbike\nbetween 2 marked lanes of traffic travelling in the same direction as\nthe motorbike when there are vehicles adjacent to the motorbike in\nboth marked lanes.\nmotorcycle licence—see the Road Transport (Driver Licensing)\nno filtering sign means—\n(a) a traffic sign with a symbol displaying a motorbike positioned\nbetween 2 vehicles with a red diagonal line across the symbol;\nor\n(b) a traffic sign displaying the word ‘no filtering’.\n\nObeying overhead lane control devices applying to marked lanes Division 11.5\nDivision 11.5 Obeying overhead lane control\ndevices applying to marked lanes\n","sortOrder":161},{"sectionNumber":"152","sectionType":"section","heading":"Complying with overhead lane control device","content":"152 Complying with overhead lane control device\n(1) A driver in a marked lane to which an overhead lane control device\napplies must comply with this section.\n(2) If the device displays an illuminated red diagonal cross or is a traffic\nsign displaying a red diagonal cross, the driver must not drive in the\nmarked lane past the device.\n(3) If the device displays a flashing illuminated red diagonal cross, the\ndriver must leave the marked lane as soon as it is safe to do so.\n(4) If the device displays an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow\npointing downwards or indicating 1 or more directions, the driver\nmay drive in the marked lane past the device.\nOverhead lane control device applying to marked lanes\n\nDivision 11.6 Driving in marked lanes designated\nfor special purposes\n","sortOrder":162},{"sectionNumber":"153","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle lane","content":"153 Bicycle lane\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive in a bicycle\nlane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bicycle lane under\nthis section or section 158 (Exceptions to driving in special purpose\nlane etc).\n(2) If stopping or parking is permitted at a place in a bicycle lane under\nthis regulation, a driver may drive for up to 50m in the bicycle lane\nto stop or park at that place.\n(3) A driver may drive for up to 50m in a bicycle lane if the driver is—\n(a) driving a public bus, public minibus, taxi, rideshare vehicle or\nhire car; and\n(b) dropping off or picking up passengers.\n(4) In this regulation:\nbicycle lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane—\n(a) beginning at a bicycle lane sign applying to the lane, or a road\nmarking comprising both a white bicycle symbol and the word\nlane painted in white; and\n(b) ending at the nearest of the following:\n(i) an end bicycle lane sign applying to the lane, or a road\nmarking comprising both a white bicycle symbol and the\nwords end lane painted in white;\n(ii) an intersection (unless the lane is at the unbroken side of\nthe continuing road at a T-intersection or continued across\nthe intersection by broken lines);\n\n(iii) if the road ends at a dead end—the end of the road.\n","sortOrder":163},{"sectionNumber":"154","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bus lane","content":"154 Bus lane\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not drive in a bus\nlane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bus lane under\nsection 158 (Exceptions to driving in special purpose lane etc).\nbus lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane—\n(a) beginning at a bus lane sign (whether or not there is also a bus\nlane road marking) and ending at the nearest of the following:\n(i) an end bus lane sign;\n(ii) a traffic sign that indicates the beginning of another special\npurpose lane; or\n(b) beginning at a bus lane road marking (if there is no bus lane\nsign) and ending at the next intersection.\nbus lane road marking means a road marking consisting of—\n(a) the letters ‘BL’; or\n(b) the words ‘bus lane’; or\n(c) the words ‘bus only’.\n\n","sortOrder":164},{"sectionNumber":"155","sectionType":"section","heading":"Tram lane","content":"155 Tram lane\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public\nbus) must not drive in a tram lane, unless the driver is permitted to\ndrive in the tram lane under this section or section 158 (Exceptions to\ndriving in special purpose lane etc).\n(2) A driver may drive in a tram lane if the driver is driving a truck and\nit is necessary for the driver to drive in the tram lane to reach a place\nto drop off or pick up passengers or goods.\ntram lane means a part of a road with tram tracks that—\n(a) is between a tram lane sign and an end tram lane sign; and\n(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the\ndirection of travel of a tram on the tracks) by a continuous\nyellow line parallel to the tracks.\nTram lane\n\n","sortOrder":165},{"sectionNumber":"155A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Tramway","content":"155A Tramway\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or public\nbus) must not drive in a tramway, unless the driver is permitted to\ndrive in the tramway under subsection (2).\n(2) A driver may drive in a tramway if—\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tramway to avoid an\n(b) when driving in the tramway, the driver does not move into the\npath of an approaching tram or public bus travelling in the\ntramway.\ntramway means a part of a road with tram tracks that—\n(a) is between a tramway sign and an end tramway sign; and\n(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the\ndirection of travel of a tram on the tracks) by either—\n(i) 2 continuous yellow lines parallel to the tracks; or\n(ii) a structure (for example, a dividing strip, pedestrian refuge,\ntraffic island, row of bollards or separation kerb), whether\nor not the structure is also being used to indicate a safety\nzone;\nbut does include any part of the road where vehicles are permitted to\ncross the tramway.\n\n(4) For subsection (3) (b) (i), a line is to be considered to be continuous\ndespite any break in it that is designed to permit vehicles to cross the\ntramway.\nTramway with double yellow line\nTramway with separation kerb\n\n","sortOrder":166},{"sectionNumber":"156","sectionType":"section","heading":"Transit lane","content":"156 Transit lane\n(1) A driver must not drive in a transit lane unless—\n(a) the driver is driving—\n(i) a public bus, public minibus, motorbike, taxi, hire car or\ntram; or\n(ii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit\nlane (T2) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 1 other person;\nor\n(iii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a transit\nlane (T3) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 2 other people;\nor\n(b) the driver is permitted to drive in the transit lane under\nsection 158 (Exceptions to driving in special purpose lane etc).\ntransit lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane—\n(a) beginning at a transit lane sign; and\n(b) ending at an end transit lane sign.\n","sortOrder":167},{"sectionNumber":"157","sectionType":"section","heading":"Truck lane","content":"157 Truck lane\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a truck) must not drive in a truck lane,\nunless the driver is permitted to drive in the truck lane under\nsection 158.\ntruck lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane—\n(a) beginning at a truck lane sign; and\n\n(b) ending at an end truck lane sign.\n","sortOrder":168},{"sectionNumber":"158","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions to driving in special purpose lane etc","content":"158 Exceptions to driving in special purpose lane etc\n(1) The driver of any vehicle may drive for up to the permitted distance\nin a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if it is\nnecessary for the driver to drive in the lane—\n(b) to enter a part of the road of 1 kind from a part of the road of\nanother kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, the\nshoulder of the road or an emergency stopping lane); or\n(c) to overtake a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn\nfrom the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of\ndirection signal; or\n(d) to enter a marked lane, or part of the road where there is room\nfor a line of traffic (other than motorbikes, bicycles, motorised\nwheelchairs or animals), from the side of the road.\n(2) The driver of any vehicle may drive in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram\nlane, transit lane or truck lane if—\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to avoid an\nobstruction; or\n(b) information on or with a traffic sign applying to the lane\nindicates that the driver may drive in the lane.\n(2A) The driver of any of the following vehicles may drive in a bus lane:\n(a) a taxi;\n(b) a hire car;\n(c) a demand responsive service vehicle;\n(d) a motorbike.\n\n(3) It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a\nprovision of this division for driving in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram\nlane, transit lane or truck lane if—\n(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to stop at a place\nin the lane; and\n(b) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under this regulation,\nor it is a defence under section 165 (Stopping in emergency etc\nor to comply with another provision) for the driver to stop at that\nplace; and\n(c) if the lane is a bicycle lane—the driver drives in the lane for no\nmore than the permitted distance.\npermitted distance means—\n(a) for a bicycle lane or tram lane—50m; or\n(b) for any other lane—100m.\n","sortOrder":169},{"sectionNumber":"159","sectionType":"section","heading":"Marked lane required to be used by particular kind of","content":"159 Marked lane required to be used by particular kind of\nvehicle\n(1) If information on or with a traffic sign applying to a length of road\nindicates that a vehicle of a particular kind must drive in a particular\nmarked lane, a driver driving a vehicle of that kind on the length of\nroad must drive in the indicated lane, unless the driver is—\n(a) avoiding an obstruction; or\n(b) obeying a traffic control device applying to the indicated lane;\nor\n(c) permitted to drive in the indicated lane and also another marked\nlane under another provision of this regulation; or\n\n(d) intending to turn off the road or to make a U-turn, and in order\nto do so safely without disrupting other vehicles on the road it is\nnecessary to position the vehicle in another lane before starting\nthe turn, or to make the turn.\n(2) A traffic sign mentioned in this section that is on a road applies to the\nlength of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the\nfirst traffic sign no longer applies;\n(b) the next intersection on the road;\nExamples—traffic sign mentioned in the section and a traffic sign indicating\nthat the first traffic sign no longer applies\nTrucks use left lane sign End trucks use left lane sign\n\nPassing trams and safety zones Division 11.7\n","sortOrder":170},{"sectionNumber":"160","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking tram that is not at or near left side","content":"160 Passing or overtaking tram that is not at or near left side\nof road\n(1) This section applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks that\nare not at or near the far left side of the road.\n(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the right of the\ntram, unless the driver is permitted to do so by a traffic sign or road\nmarking.\n(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is\nturning left or is giving a left change of direction signal, unless the\ndriver is turning left and there is no danger of a collision with the\ntram.\n","sortOrder":171},{"sectionNumber":"161","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passing or overtaking tram at or near left side of road","content":"161 Passing or overtaking tram at or near left side of road\n(1) This section applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks at\nor near the far left side of the road.\n(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the left of the\ntram unless the driver is turning left and there is no danger of a\ncollision with the tram.\n(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is\nturning right or is giving a right change of direction signal.\n\n","sortOrder":172},{"sectionNumber":"162","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving past safety zone","content":"162 Driving past safety zone\n(1) A driver driving past a safety zone—\n(a) must not drive on the safety zone; and\n(b) must drive to the left of the safety zone at a speed that does not\nput at risk the safety of any pedestrian crossing the road to or\nfrom the safety zone.\nsafety zone means an area of a road—\n(a) at a place with safety zone signs at or near a tram stop; and\n(b) indicated by a structure on the road (for example, a dividing\nstrip, pedestrian refuge or traffic island).\n","sortOrder":173},{"sectionNumber":"163","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving past rear of stopped tram at tram stop","content":"163 Driving past rear of stopped tram at tram stop\n(a) the driver is driving behind the rear of a tram travelling in the\nsame direction as the driver; and\n(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n(2) The driver must stop before passing the rear of the tram.\n\nPassing trams and safety zones Division 11.7\n(3) After stopping in accordance with subsection (2), the driver must not\nproceed if—\n(4) After stopping in accordance with subsection (2), if the tram remains\nat the tram stop and subsection (3) does not apply, the driver must not\nproceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10km/h.\n(5) However, subsections (2) to (4) do not apply if the driver is directed\nto drive past the tram by an authorised person or police officer.\n","sortOrder":174},{"sectionNumber":"164","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping beside stopped tram at tram stop","content":"164 Stopping beside stopped tram at tram stop\n(a) the driver is driving alongside, or overtaking, a tram travelling\nin the same direction as the driver; and\n(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n(2) The driver must stop.\n(3) After stopping in accordance with subsection (2), the driver must not\nproceed if—\n\n(4) After stopping in accordance with subsection (2), if the tram remains\nat the tram stop and subsection (3) does not apply, the driver must not\nproceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10km/h.\n(5) However, subsections (2) to (4) do not apply if the driver is directed\nto drive past the tram by an authorised person or police officer.\n","sortOrder":175},{"sectionNumber":"164A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Staying stopped if tram comes from behind stopped","content":"164A Staying stopped if tram comes from behind stopped\ndriver and stops\n(a) the driver is stopped beside a tram stop; and\n(b) a tram stops at the tram stop, except at the far left side of the\n(2) The driver must not proceed if—\n(3) If the tram remains at the tram stop and subsection (2) does not apply,\nthe driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed greater than\n10km/h.\n\nMotor vehicles passing bicycle riders Division 11.8\n(4) However, subsections (2) and (3) do not apply if the driver is directed\nto proceed past the tram by an authorised person or police officer.\n","sortOrder":176},{"sectionNumber":"164B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping safe lateral distance when passing bicycle rider","content":"164B Keeping safe lateral distance when passing bicycle rider\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle passing the rider of a bicycle that is\ntravelling in the same direction as the driver must pass the bicycle at\na sufficient distance from—\n(a) the bicycle; or\n(b) if the rider is riding alongside another rider—the bicycle furthest\nto the right.\n(2) This section does not apply to a driver of a light rail vehicle.\n(3) For this section—\n(a) a driver passes a bicycle at a sufficient distance from the bicycle\nif the driver passes at a lateral distance from the bicycle of—\n(i) if the applicable speed limit at the point the driver passes\nthe bicycle is not more than 60km/h—at least 1m; or\n(ii) if the applicable speed limit at the point the driver passes\nthe bicycle is more than 60km/h—at least 1.5m; and\n(b) the lateral distance between a motor vehicle passing a bicycle\nand the bicycle is the distance between—\n(i) the most distant point to the left—\n(A) on the driver’s vehicle; or\n\n(B) on any projection from the vehicle (whether or not\nattached to the vehicle); and\n(ii) the most distant point to the right—\n(A) on the bicycle (or any part of the bicycle); or\n(B) on the rider of the bicycle; or\n(C) on any bicycle trailer towed by the bicycle; or\n(D) on any passenger in or on any bicycle trailer.\nExamples—part of a bicycle\nbasket, pannier bags\nExample—not part of a bicycle\na flag or stick, whether or not flexible, attached to the bicycle, that\nprojects sideways from the bicycle\n","sortOrder":177},{"sectionNumber":"164C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exceptions—passing bicycle rider","content":"164C Exceptions—passing bicycle rider\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle passing the rider of a bicycle that is\ntravelling in the same direction as the driver may make a permitted\nmanoeuvre to pass the rider if—\n(b) the permitted manoeuvre is necessary to comply with\nsection 164B; and\npermitted manoeuvre means—\n(a) if the driver is driving on a two-way road without a dividing line\nor median strip—drive to the right of the centre of the road; or\n(b) if the driver is driving on a road with a dividing line—drive to\nthe right of the dividing line; or\n(c) drive on a dividing strip that is at the same level as the road; or\n\nMotor vehicles passing bicycle riders Division 11.8\n(d) drive on or over a single continuous line; or\n(e) drive on or over 2 parallel lines; or\n(f) drive along a side, or surrounding, of a painted island.\n\n","sortOrder":178},{"sectionNumber":"Part 12","sectionType":"part","heading":"Restrictions on stopping and","content":"Part 12 Restrictions on stopping and\nparking\n","sortOrder":179},{"sectionNumber":"165","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in emergency etc or to comply with another","content":"165 Stopping in emergency etc or to comply with another\nprovision\nIt is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against a\nprovision of this part if—\n(a) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\navoid a collision, and the driver stops for no longer than is\nnecessary to avoid the collision; or\n(b) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the driver’s vehicle is disabled, and the driver stops for\nno longer than is necessary for the vehicle to be moved safely to\na place where the driver is permitted to park the vehicle under\nthis regulation; or\n(c) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ndeal with a medical or other emergency, or to assist a disabled\nvehicle, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in\n(d) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the condition of the driver, a passenger, or the driver’s\nvehicle makes it necessary for the driver to stop in the interests\nof safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in\n\nNo stopping and no parking signs and road markings Division 12.2\n(e) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ncomply with another provision of this regulation, and the driver\nstops for no longer than is necessary to comply with the other\nprovision.\nExample—par (e)\nIf a driver stops at an intersection at a stop line, stop sign, or traffic lights, or to give\nway to a vehicle, in accordance with this regulation, the driver does not contravene\ns 170.\n","sortOrder":180},{"sectionNumber":"166","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—pt 12—bicycles","content":"166 Application—pt 12—bicycles\nThis part (other than division 12.12A (Signs attached to vehicles\nparked in designated place)) does not apply to a bicycle that is parked\nat a bicycle rail or in a bicycle rack.\n","sortOrder":181},{"sectionNumber":"Div 12","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 No stopping and no parking signs and","content":"Division 12.2 No stopping and no parking signs and\nroad markings\n","sortOrder":182},{"sectionNumber":"167","sectionType":"section","heading":"No stopping sign","content":"167 No stopping sign\nA driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which a no\nstopping sign applies.\n","sortOrder":183},{"sectionNumber":"168","sectionType":"section","heading":"No parking sign","content":"168 No parking sign\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not stop on a length of road or in an area\nto which a no parking sign applies, unless the driver—\n(a) is dropping off or picking up passengers or goods; and\n(b) does not leave the vehicle unattended; and\n(c) completes the dropping off or picking up of the passengers or\ngoods, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within\nthe required time after stopping.\n\n(2) For this section, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3m from the closest point of\nrequired time means—\n(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a time—the indicated\ntime; or\n(b) if there is no indicated time—2 minutes; or\n(c) if there is no indicated time, or the indicated time is less than\n5 minutes, and section 206 (Time extension for people with\ndisabilities) applies to the driver—5 minutes.\n","sortOrder":184},{"sectionNumber":"169","sectionType":"section","heading":"No stopping on road with yellow edge line","content":"169 No stopping on road with yellow edge line\nA driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a continuous\nyellow edge line.\nDivision 12.3 Stopping at intersections and\ncrossings\n","sortOrder":185},{"sectionNumber":"170","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in or near intersection","content":"170 Stopping in or near intersection\n(1) A driver must not stop in an intersection unless—\n(a) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under this regulation;\nor\n(b) the intersection is a T-intersection without traffic lights and the\ndriver stops along the continuous side of the continuing road at\nthe intersection.\n\n(2) A driver must not stop on a road within 20m from the nearest point\nof an intersecting road at an intersection with traffic lights, unless the\ndriver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that\nplace under this regulation.\n(3) A driver must not stop on a road within 10m from the nearest point\nof an intersecting road at an intersection without traffic lights, unless\nthe driver stops—\n(a) at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking\ncontrol sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that\nplace under this regulation; or\n(b) if the intersection is a T-intersection—along the continuous side\nof the continuing road at the intersection.\n(4) For this section, distances are measured in the direction in which the\ndriver is driving, and—\n(a) for subsection (2)—as shown in example 1; or\n(b) for subsection (3)—as shown in example 2.\n\nMeasurement of distance—intersection with traffic lights\nMeasurement of distance—T-intersection without traffic lights\n\n","sortOrder":186},{"sectionNumber":"171","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near children’s crossing","content":"171 Stopping on or near children’s crossing\n(1) A driver must not stop on a children’s crossing, or on the road within\n20m before the crossing and 10m after the crossing, unless the driver\nstops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking\ncontrol sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place\nunder this regulation.\n(b) as shown in example 1 or 2.\nMeasurement of distance—children’s crossing with red and white posts\n\nMeasurement of distance—children’s crossing with 2 parallel continuous or broken\nlines\n","sortOrder":187},{"sectionNumber":"172","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near pedestrian crossing (except at","content":"172 Stopping on or near pedestrian crossing (except at\n(1) A driver must not stop on a pedestrian crossing that is not at an\nintersection, or on the road within 20m before the crossing and 10m\nafter the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of\nroad, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the\ndriver is permitted to stop at that place under this regulation.\n\nMeasurement of distance—pedestrian crossing\n","sortOrder":188},{"sectionNumber":"173","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near marked foot crossing (except at","content":"173 Stopping on or near marked foot crossing (except at\n(1) A driver must not stop on a marked foot crossing that is not at an\nintersection, or on the road within 10m before the traffic lights pole\nnearest to the driver at the crossing and 3m after the crossing, unless\nthe driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which\na parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at\nthat place under this regulation.\n\nMeasurement of distance—marked foot crossing\n","sortOrder":189},{"sectionNumber":"174","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at or near bicycle crossing lights (except at","content":"174 Stopping at or near bicycle crossing lights (except at\n(1) This section applies to a place on a road—\n(a) with bicycle crossing lights facing bicycle riders crossing the\n(b) with traffic lights facing traffic travelling on the road; and\n(c) that is not at an intersection.\n(2) A driver must not stop within 10m before the traffic lights nearest to\nthe driver at the place, and 3m after the traffic lights, unless the driver\nstops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking\ncontrol sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place\nunder this regulation.\n(3) For this section, distances are measured—\n\nMeasurement of distance—bicycle crossing lights\n","sortOrder":190},{"sectionNumber":"175","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on or near level crossing","content":"175 Stopping on or near level crossing\n(1) A driver must not stop on a level crossing, or on a road within 20m\nbefore the nearest rail or track to the driver approaching the crossing\nand 20m after the nearest rail or track to the driver leaving the\ncrossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in\nan area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is\npermitted to stop at that place under this regulation.\n(2) For this section, distances are measured as shown in the example.\n\nDivision 12.4 Stopping on clearways and freeways and in emergency stopping lanes\nMeasurement of distance—level crossing\nDivision 12.4 Stopping on clearways and freeways\nand in emergency stopping lanes\n176 Stopping on clearway\n(1) A driver must not stop on a length of road (other than a road related\narea) to which a clearway sign applies, unless the driver is—\n(a) driving a public bus, public minibus, taxi, rideshare vehicle or\nhire car; and\n(b) dropping off or picking up passengers.\n(2) A clearway sign applies, for the days or times indicated on the sign,\nto a length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of\nthe following:\n(a) a clearway sign on the road that indicates different days or times;\n(b) an end clearway sign on the road;\n(c) the end of the road.\n\n","sortOrder":191},{"sectionNumber":"177","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on freeway","content":"177 Stopping on freeway\n(1) A driver must not stop on a freeway unless the driver stops in an\nemergency stopping lane.\nfreeway means a length of road to which a freeway sign applies.\n(3) A freeway sign on a road applies to a length of road beginning at the\nsign (including any road into which the length of road merges) and\nending at the next end freeway sign on the road.\n","sortOrder":192},{"sectionNumber":"178","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in emergency stopping lane","content":"178 Stopping in emergency stopping lane\nA driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop in an emergency\nstopping lane unless—\n(a) the condition of the driver, a passenger or the driver’s vehicle,\nor any other factor, makes it necessary or desirable for the driver\nto stop in the emergency stopping lane in the interests of safety;\nand\n(b) the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the\ncircumstances.\nDivision 12.5 Stopping in zones for particular\n","sortOrder":193},{"sectionNumber":"179","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in loading zone","content":"179 Stopping in loading zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a loading zone unless the driver is driving—\n(a) a public bus that is dropping off or picking up passengers; or\n(b) a truck that is dropping off or picking up goods; or\n\n(c) a motor vehicle that is built mainly for the transport of goods\nand is dropping off or picking up goods; or\n(d) a vehicle that is displaying a current loading zone permit and is\ncomplying with the conditions of the permit; or\n(e) a taxi, rideshare vehicle or hire car, and the driver—\n(i) is dropping off or picking up passengers; and\n(ii) does not leave the vehicle unattended, otherwise than to\ncomply with a passenger assistance requirement.\n(2) A driver who is permitted to stop in a loading zone must not stay\ncontinuously in the zone for longer than—\n(a) 30 minutes; or\n(b) if information on or with the loading zone signs applying to the\nloading zone indicates another time—the indicated time; or\n(c) for a driver who is permitted to stop in the loading zone under a\nloading zone permit that provides for a shorter period—that\nperiod; or\n(d) for the driver of a taxi, rideshare vehicle or hire car permitted to\nstop in a loading zone under subsection (1) (e)—\n(i) 2 minutes; or\n(ii) if the driver is complying with a passenger assistance\nrequirement—the period necessary to comply with the\nrequirement.\nloading zone means a length of a road to which a loading zone sign\n\nloading zone permit means a loading zone permit issued under the\nRoad Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 2017,\nsection 64 (Parking permits).\npassenger assistance requirement means a requirement under the\nRoad Transport (Public Passenger Services) Regulation 2002,\nsection 132 (5) (which requires a wheelchair-accessible taxi driver to\nprovide reasonable assistance in loading and unloading a wheelchair,\nor a person in a wheelchair, into or from the taxi).\nunattended—a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver leaves\nthe vehicle so the driver is over 3m from the closest point of the\n","sortOrder":194},{"sectionNumber":"180","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in truck zone","content":"180 Stopping in truck zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a truck zone unless the driver is driving a\ntruck that is dropping off or picking up goods.\ntruck zone means a length of a road to which a truck zone sign\n","sortOrder":195},{"sectionNumber":"181","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in works zone","content":"181 Stopping in works zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a works zone unless the driver is driving a\nvehicle that is engaged in construction work in or near the zone.\nworks zone means a length of a road to which a works zone sign\n\n","sortOrder":196},{"sectionNumber":"182","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in taxi zone","content":"182 Stopping in taxi zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a taxi zone, unless the driver is driving a\ntaxi.\ntaxi zone means a length of a road to which a taxi zone sign applies.\n","sortOrder":197},{"sectionNumber":"183","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in bus zone","content":"183 Stopping in bus zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a bus zone unless the driver is driving a\npublic bus (except a public bus of a kind that is not permitted to stop\nin the bus zone by information on or with the bus zone sign applying\nto the bus zone).\n(2) However, the driver of a demand responsive service vehicle may stop\nin a bus zone if—\n(a) the driver is dropping off or picking up a passenger; and\n(b) the vehicle is authorised to stop in the bus zone under an\nauthority under the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services)\nRegulation 2002, section 305 (1) (DRS vehicles—bus stop and\nbus zone authorities).\nbus zone means a length of a road to which a bus zone sign applies.\n\n","sortOrder":198},{"sectionNumber":"183A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping public bus in bus zone","content":"183A Stopping public bus in bus zone\n(1) The driver of a public bus must not stop in a bus zone unless the\ndriver—\n(a) is dropping off or picking up passengers; or\n(b) is stopping for a regular route service.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the driver of a public bus that is not\npermitted to stop in the bus zone by information on or with the bus\nzone sign applying to the bus zone.\n","sortOrder":199},{"sectionNumber":"184","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in minibus zone","content":"184 Stopping in minibus zone\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public minibus) must not stop in a\nminibus zone.\nminibus zone means a length of road to which a minibus zone sign\n","sortOrder":200},{"sectionNumber":"185","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in permit zone","content":"185 Stopping in permit zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a permit zone unless the driver’s vehicle\ndisplays a current permit issued under the Road Transport (Safety and\nTraffic Management) Regulation 2017, section 64 (Parking permits)\nthat permits the vehicle to stop in the zone\npermit zone means a length of a road to which a permit zone sign\n\n","sortOrder":201},{"sectionNumber":"186","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in mail zone","content":"186 Stopping in mail zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a mail zone.\n(2) This section does not apply to the driver of a postal vehicle.\nmail zone means a length of a road to which a mail zone sign applies.\nDivision 12.6 Other places where stopping is\nrestricted\n","sortOrder":202},{"sectionNumber":"187","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, tramway,","content":"187 Stopping in bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, tramway,\ntransit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks\n(1) A driver must not stop in a bus lane, transit lane or truck lane unless\nthe driver—\n(a) is driving a public bus, public minibus, taxi or hire car and is\ndropping off or picking up passengers; and\n(b) is permitted to drive in the lane under this regulation.\n(2) A driver must not stop in a bicycle lane unless the driver—\n(a) is driving a public bus, public minibus, taxi or hire car; and\n(b) is dropping off or picking up passengers; and\n(c) is permitted to drive in the lane under this regulation.\n(3) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a\npublic bus) must not stop in a tram lane, a tramway or on tram tracks.\n\n","sortOrder":203},{"sectionNumber":"188","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in shared zone","content":"188 Stopping in shared zone\nA driver must not stop in a shared zone unless—\nto stop at that place under this regulation; or\nstop in the parking bay under this regulation; or\n(c) the driver is dropping off or picking up passengers or goods; or\n(d) the driver is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection\nof goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage.\n","sortOrder":204},{"sectionNumber":"189","sectionType":"section","heading":"Double parking","content":"189 Double parking\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road if to do so would put any part of the\nvehicle that the driver is driving between a vehicle that is parked on\nthe road and the centre of the road.\nDouble parked on a two-way road without a dividing line\n\nDouble parked on two-way road with a centre dividing line\nDouble parked on the right side of a one-way road with no vehicles parked on the\nleft side of the road\n\nDouble parked on the left side of a one-way road with other vehicles lawfully\nparked on the right side of the road\n(2) A driver does not contravene this section by parking on the side of\nthe road, or in a median strip parking area, in accordance with\nsection 210 (Angle parking).\nIn this example, the angle-parked vehicles are not stopped in contravention of this\n\n(3) Also, the rider of a motorbike may stop on the road with part of the\nmotorbike between another motorbike that is parked on the road and\nthe centre of the road if both motorbikes are parked within the same\nparking bay.\n","sortOrder":205},{"sectionNumber":"190","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in or near safety zone","content":"190 Stopping in or near safety zone\n(1) A driver must not stop in a safety zone, or on a road within 10m before\nor after a safety zone, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of\nroad, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the\ndriver is permitted to stop at that place under this regulation.\n(b) from the end of the structure; and\n(c) as shown in the example.\nMeasurement of distance—safety zone\nIn this example, the vehicles marked with an ‘X’ are stopped in contravention of\nthis section.\n\n","sortOrder":206},{"sectionNumber":"191","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near obstruction","content":"191 Stopping near obstruction\nA driver must not stop on a road near an obstruction on the road in a\nposition that obstructs traffic on the road.\n","sortOrder":207},{"sectionNumber":"192","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on bridge or in tunnel etc","content":"192 Stopping on bridge or in tunnel etc\n(1) A driver must not stop on a bridge, causeway, ramp or similar\nstructure unless—\n(a) the road is at least as wide on the structure as it is on each of the\napproaches; or\n(b) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to\nto stop at that place under this regulation.\n(2) A driver must not stop in a tunnel or underpass unless—\n(a) the road is at least as wide in the tunnel or underpass as it is on\neach of the approaches; or\nStopping on a bridge where the road on the bridge is narrower than on an approach\nIn this example, the vehicle is stopped in contravention of s (1).\n\n","sortOrder":208},{"sectionNumber":"193","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on crest or curve outside built-up area","content":"193 Stopping on crest or curve outside built-up area\n(1) A driver must not stop on or near a crest or curve on a length of road\nthat is not in a built-up area unless—\n(a) the driver’s vehicle is visible for 100m to drivers approaching\nthe vehicle and travelling in the direction of travel of traffic on\nthe same side of the road as the vehicle; or\n(b) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to\nto stop at that place under this regulation.\n","sortOrder":209},{"sectionNumber":"194","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near fire hydrant etc","content":"194 Stopping near fire hydrant etc\n(1) A driver must not stop within 1m of a fire hydrant, fire hydrant\nindicator, or fire plug indicator, unless—\n(a) the driver is driving a public bus, and the driver stops at a bus\nstop or in a bus zone and does not leave the bus unattended; or\n(b) the driver is driving a taxi or hire car, and the driver stops in a\ntaxi zone and does not leave the taxi or hire car unattended; or\n(c) the driver is driving a public minibus, and the driver stops in a\nminibus zone and does not leave the minibus unattended.\n(2) For this section, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3m from the closest point of\n\nfire hydrant means an upright pipe with a spout, nozzle or other outlet\nfor drawing water from a main or service pipe in case of fire or other\nemergency.\nFire hydrant indicators\nFire plug indicator\n","sortOrder":210},{"sectionNumber":"195","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at or near bus stop","content":"195 Stopping at or near bus stop\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not stop at a bus stop,\nor on the road, within 20m before a sign on the road that indicates the\nbus stop, and 10m after the sign, unless the driver stops at a place on\na length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies\nand the driver is permitted to stop at that place under this regulation.\n(1A) However, the driver of a demand responsive service vehicle may stop\nat a bus stop, or on the road, within 20m before a sign on the road that\nindicates the bus stop, and 10m after the sign if—\n(a) the driver is dropping off or picking up passengers; and\n\n(b) the vehicle is authorised to stop at the bus stop under an\nauthority under the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services)\nRegulation 2002, section 305 (1) (DRS vehicles—bus stop and\nbus zone authorities).\n(2) For this section, distances are measured in the direction in which the\nauthorised to stop, at a bus stop, for a demand responsive service\nvehicle, means a bus stop that the demand responsive service vehicle\nis authorised to stop at under an authority under the Road Transport\n(Public Passenger Services) Regulation 2002, section 305 (1).\n","sortOrder":211},{"sectionNumber":"195A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping public bus at bus stop","content":"195A Stopping public bus at bus stop\nThe driver of a public bus must not stop at a bus stop, or on the road,\nwithin 20m before a sign on the road that indicates the bus stop, and\n10m after the sign, unless the driver—\n(a) stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop\nat that place under this regulation; or\n(b) is dropping off or picking up passengers; or\n(c) is stopping for a regular route service.\n\n","sortOrder":212},{"sectionNumber":"196","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping at or near tram stop","content":"196 Stopping at or near tram stop\n(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or a\npublic bus travelling along tram tracks) must not stop at a tram stop\nor on the road within 20m before a sign that indicates a tram stop,\nwhich a parking control sign applies; and\n(2) For this section, the distance is measured in the direction in which the\n","sortOrder":213},{"sectionNumber":"197","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on path, dividing strip, nature strip, painted","content":"197 Stopping on path, dividing strip, nature strip, painted\nisland or traffic island\n(1) A driver must not stop on a bicycle path, footpath, shared path or\ndividing strip, or a nature strip adjacent to a length of road in a\nbuilt-up area, unless—\nwhich a parking control sign applies; and\n(1A) A driver must not stop on a painted island.\n(1B) A driver must not stop on a traffic island.\n\n(2) Subsections (1) and (1B) do not apply to the rider of a bicycle or\nanimal.\n","sortOrder":214},{"sectionNumber":"198","sectionType":"section","heading":"Obstructing access to and from footpath, driveway etc","content":"198 Obstructing access to and from footpath, driveway etc\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road in a position that obstructs access by\nvehicles or pedestrians to or from a footpath ramp or a similar way of\naccess to a footpath, or a bicycle path or passageway unless—\n(a) the driver is driving a public bus that is dropping off or picking\nup passengers; or\nstop in the parking bay under this regulation.\n(2) A driver must not stop on or across a driveway or other way of access\nfor vehicles travelling to or from adjacent land unless—\n(a) the driver—\n(i) is dropping off or picking up passengers; and\n(ii) does not leave the vehicle unattended; and\n(iii) completes the dropping off or picking up of the passengers,\nand drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within\n2 minutes after stopping; or\nstop in the parking bay under this regulation.\n\nBlocking a driveway\nIn the example, the vehicle marked with an ‘X’ is stopped in contravention of s (2).\n(3) For this section, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the driver\nleaves the vehicle so that the driver is over 3m from the closest point\nof the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":215},{"sectionNumber":"199","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping near postbox","content":"199 Stopping near postbox\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road within 3m of a public postbox, unless\nthe driver—\n(a) is dropping off or picking up passengers or mail; or\n(b) stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a\nparking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop\nat that place under this regulation.\npublic postbox means a postbox erected, maintained or used by\nAustralia Post.\n\n","sortOrder":216},{"sectionNumber":"200","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on roads—heavy or long vehicle","content":"200 Stopping on roads—heavy or long vehicle\n(1) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a\nlength of road that is not in a built-up area, except on the shoulder of\n(2) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a\nlength of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour, unless the\ndriver is permitted to stop on the length of road for longer than 1 hour\nby information on or with a traffic control device, or under\nsubsection (2A).\n(2A) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, other than a bus, is\npermitted to stop on a length of road in a built up area for longer than\n1 hour if, throughout the period when the vehicle is stopped on the\nlength of road, the driver is engaged in dropping off or picking up\ngoods.\nlong vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or\nprojection, is 7.5m long, or longer.\n","sortOrder":217},{"sectionNumber":"201","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on road with bicycle parking sign","content":"201 Stopping on road with bicycle parking sign\nA driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop on a length of\nroad to which a bicycle parking sign applies, unless the driver is\ndropping off or picking up passengers.\n\n","sortOrder":218},{"sectionNumber":"202","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping on road with motorbike parking sign","content":"202 Stopping on road with motorbike parking sign\nA driver (except the rider of a motorbike) must not stop on a length\nof road to which a motorbike parking sign applies, unless the driver\nis dropping off or picking up passengers.\n","sortOrder":219},{"sectionNumber":"203","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in parking area for people with disabilities","content":"203 Stopping in parking area for people with disabilities\n(1) A driver must not stop in a parking area for people with disabilities\n(a) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current mobility parking\nscheme authority; and\n(b) the driver complies with the conditions (if any) of the authority.\nparking area for people with disabilities means a length or area of a\nroad—\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying a people with\ndisabilities symbol applies; or\n(b) to which a people with disabilities parking sign applies; or\n(c) indicated by a road marking (a people with disabilities road\nmarking) that consists of, or includes, a people with disabilities\n\n","sortOrder":220},{"sectionNumber":"203A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in slip lane","content":"203A Stopping in slip lane\nA driver must not stop in a slip lane unless—\n(a) a parking control sign applies to the place where the driver stops;\nand\n","sortOrder":221},{"sectionNumber":"203B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in parking area for electric-powered vehicles","content":"203B Stopping in parking area for electric-powered vehicles\n(1) A driver of a vehicle that is not an electric-powered vehicle must not\nstop in a parking area for electric-powered vehicles.\nelectric-powered vehicle means a vehicle that—\n(a) is powered by 1 or more electric motors or traction motors,\nregardless of whether the vehicle is also powered by another\nform of propulsion; and\n(b) can be recharged from an external source of electricity.\n\nelectric-powered vehicle parking sign means a sign displaying an\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol.\nExample—electric-powered vehicle parking sign\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol means a picture of a vehicle with an\nadjacent charging plug as shown in the diagram in schedule 4.\nparking area for electric-powered vehicles means a length or area of\na road—\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying an\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol applies; or\n(b) to which an electric-powered vehicle parking sign applies; or\n(c) indicated by a road marking (an electric-powered vehicle road\nmarking) that consists of, or includes, an electric-powered\nvehicle symbol.\n","sortOrder":222},{"sectionNumber":"203C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in parking area for charging of electric-powered","content":"203C Stopping in parking area for charging of electric-powered\n(1) A driver must not stop in a parking area for the charging of\nelectric-powered vehicles unless—\n(a) the driver’s vehicle is an electric-powered vehicle; and\n\n(b) the electric-powered vehicle is plugged in to an external source\nof electricity.\nelectric-powered vehicle—see section 203B (2).\nelectric-powered vehicle charging parking sign means a sign\ndisplaying an electric-powered vehicle symbol and the words\n‘while charging’.\nExample—electric-powered vehicle charging parking sign\nelectric-powered vehicle charging road marking means a picture\nthat consists of, or includes a picture of an ‘EV’ symbol with an\nadjacent charging plug as shown in the diagram in schedule 4.\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol—see section 203B (2).\nparking area for charging of electric-powered vehicles means a\nlength or area of a road—\n(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying an\nelectric-powered vehicle symbol and the words ‘while charging’\n(b) to which an electric-powered vehicle charging parking sign\n\nPermissive parking signs and parking fees Division 12.7\n(c) indicated by an electric-powered vehicle charging road marking.\nDivision 12.7 Permissive parking signs and parking\nfees\n","sortOrder":223},{"sectionNumber":"204","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of certain information on or with permissive","content":"204 Meaning of certain information on or with permissive\nparking sign\n(1) This section explains the meaning of certain information on or with a\npermissive parking sign applying to a length of road or an area.\n(2) A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction,\nimmediately to the left of the letter ‘P’ indicates that a driver must not\npark on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than\nthe period of hours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the number,\nfraction, or number and fraction, shown.\nExample 1—permissive parking sign showing permitted parking periods and\ntimes of operation\nPermissive parking sign applying to a length of road with a whole number to the\nleft of P\nIn this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for\nlonger than 1 hour on Saturdays between 9 am and 12 noon.\n\nExample 2—permissive parking sign showing permitted parking periods and\ntimes of operation\nPermissive parking sign applying to an area with a whole number to the left of P\nIn this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park in the area for longer\nthan 2 hours on Mondays to Fridays between 8.30 am and 5 pm, and on Saturdays\nbetween 8.30 am and 12 noon, unless permitted by information on or with another\ntraffic control device.\n(3) A number, together with the word ‘minute’, immediately to the right\nof the letter ‘P’ indicate that a driver must not park on the length of\nroad, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number\nof minutes shown.\nPermissive parking sign with a number of minutes to the right of P\nIn this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park continuously for\nlonger than 5 minutes on Mondays to Fridays between 9 am and 4 pm.\n(4) The word ‘parking’, together with words indicating a number of hours\nor minutes, indicate that a driver must not park on the length of road,\nor in the area, continuously for longer than the number of hours\nor minutes shown.\n\nPermissive parking signs and parking fees Division 12.7\n","sortOrder":224},{"sectionNumber":"205","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking for longer than indicated","content":"205 Parking for longer than indicated\n(1) A driver must not park continuously on a length of road, or in an area,\nto which a permissive parking sign applies for longer than the period\nindicated by information on or with the sign or, if section 206 (Time\nextension for people with disabilities) applies to the driver, the period\nallowed under that section.\n(1A) If a permissive parking sign does not indicate a period and does not\nindicate that it applies at particular times, or at particular times on\nparticular days, a driver may, at any time, park continuously on a\nlength of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies, unless—\n(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or area;\nand\n(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in\nthe area, under this regulation.\n(2) For subsection (1), a driver parks continuously on a length of road, or\nin an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies, from the time\nwhen the driver parks on the length of road, or in the area, until the\ndriver, or another driver, moves the vehicle off the length of road, or\nout of the area, to which the permissive parking sign applies.\n","sortOrder":225},{"sectionNumber":"205A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking outside time indicated","content":"205A Parking outside time indicated\nIf a permissive parking sign indicates that it applies at particular\ntimes, or at particular times on particular days, a driver may park on\nthe length of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies at a time,\nor at a time on a day, when the sign does not apply, unless—\n(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or area;\nand\n(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in\nthe area, at that time, or at that time on that day, under this\n\n","sortOrder":226},{"sectionNumber":"206","sectionType":"section","heading":"Time extension for people with disabilities","content":"206 Time extension for people with disabilities\n(1) This section applies to a driver if—\n(a) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current mobility parking\nscheme authority; and\n(b) the driver complies with the conditions (if any) of the authority.\n(2) The driver may park continuously on a length of road, or in an area,\nto which a permissive parking sign applies—\n(a) in a parking area for electric-powered vehicles or a parking area\nfor charging of electric-powered vehicles—for 30 minutes\nlonger than the period indicated on the permissive parking sign;\nor\n(b) in any other case, for the longer of—\n(i) if the time limit on the sign is 30 minutes or less—2 hours;\nor\n(ii) if the time limit on the sign is longer than 30 minutes—an\nunlimited period.\n(3) Subsection (2) (b) does not apply if the driver parks in a parking area\nfor people with disabilities.\nparking area for charging of electric-powered vehicles—see\nsection 203C (2).\nparking area for electric-powered vehicles—see section 203B (2).\n","sortOrder":227},{"sectionNumber":"207","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking where fee payable","content":"207 Parking where fee payable\n(1) This section applies to a driver who parks a vehicle on a length of\nroad, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies if\ninformation on or with the sign indicates that a fee is payable for\nparking by buying a ticket or putting money into a parking meter.\n\nParallel parking Division 12.8\n(2) The driver must—\n(a) pay the relevant parking fee (if any) for parking the vehicle on\nthe road or in the area; and\n(b) obey any instructions on or with the sign, meter, ticket or\nticket-vending machine.\n","sortOrder":228},{"sectionNumber":"208","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking on road (except in median strip parking","content":"208 Parallel parking on road (except in median strip parking\narea)\n(1) A driver who parks on a road (except in a median strip parking area)\nmust position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with subsections (2)\nto (8).\n(2) The driver must position the vehicle to face—\n(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line\nof traffic on, or next to, the part of the road where the driver\nparks; or\n(b) if there is no traffic on, or next to, that part of the road—in the\ndirection in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of\n(3) If the road is a two-way road, the driver must position the vehicle\nparallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left side of the road.\n(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must position the vehicle\nparallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left or far right side of\nthe road, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a\nparking control sign.\n\n(5) If the driver does not park in a parking bay, the driver must position\nthe vehicle at least 1m from the closest point of any vehicle in front\nof it and any vehicle behind it.\n(6) If the road has a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip, the driver\nmust position the vehicle at least 3m from the continuous dividing\nline or dividing strip, unless otherwise indicated by information on or\nwith a parking control sign.\n(7) If the road does not have a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip,\nthe driver must position the vehicle so there is at least 3m of the road\nalongside the vehicle that is clear for other vehicles to pass, unless\notherwise indicated by information on or with a parking control sign.\n(8) The driver must position the vehicle so the vehicle does not\nunreasonably obstruct the path of other vehicles or pedestrians.\n(9) This section does not apply to—\n(a) a driver if the driver parks on a length of road, or in an area, to\nwhich a parking control sign or road marking applies, and\ninformation on or with the sign or road marking includes the\nwords ‘angle parking’ or ‘angle’; or\n(b) the rider of a motorbike if the rider parks the motorbike on a\nlength of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign\napplies and the sign indicates that the length of road or area is\nfor parking motorbikes.\n(10) Subsections (3) and (4) do not apply to the rider of a motorbike if the\nrider positions the motorbike so at least 1 wheel is as near as\npracticable to the far left or far right side of the road.\n(11) If a road has 1 or more service roads, the part of the road used by the\nmain body of moving vehicles, and each service road, is taken to be\na separate road for this section.\n\nParallel parking Division 12.8\n(12) In this section:\ncontinuous dividing line means—\n(a) a single continuous dividing line only; or\n(b) a single continuous dividing line to the left or right of a broken\ndividing line; or\n(c) 2 parallel continuous dividing lines.\nParallel parking—minimum distance from other vehicles and dividing strip\nIn this example, the vehicles marked with an ‘X’ are parked in contravention of this\n","sortOrder":229},{"sectionNumber":"208A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking in road related area (except in median","content":"208A Parallel parking in road related area (except in median\nstrip parking area)\n(1) A driver who parks in a road related area (except in a median strip\nparking area) must position the driver’s vehicle to face—\n(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line\nof traffic next to the part of the road related area where the driver\nparks; or\n(b) if there is no traffic next to that part of the road related area—in\nthe direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel in the road\nrelated area; or\n\n(c) if the road related area is an area that divides a road—either—\n(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or\nline of traffic to the left of the driver; or\n(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the direction\nin which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if signs or road markings indicate that\nangle parking is required in the road related area.\n","sortOrder":230},{"sectionNumber":"209","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parallel parking in median strip parking area","content":"209 Parallel parking in median strip parking area\n(1) This section applies to a driver who parks in a median strip parking\narea if a parking control sign or road marking applies to the area, and\ninformation on or with the sign or road marking indicates that the\ndriver’s vehicle must be positioned parallel to the median strip.\n(2) The driver must position the driver’s vehicle—\n(a) to face—\n(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or\nline of traffic to the left of the driver; or\n(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the direction\nin which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the\n(b) parallel, and as near as practicable, to the centre of the median\nstrip; and\n(c) if the driver does not park in a parking bay—at least 1m from\nthe closest point of any vehicle in front of it and any vehicle\nbehind it.\n(3) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike.\n\n","sortOrder":231},{"sectionNumber":"210","sectionType":"section","heading":"Angle parking","content":"210 Angle parking\n(1) If a driver parks in a parking area on the side of a road, or in a median\nstrip parking area—\n(a) to which a parking control sign with the words ‘angle parking’\nor ‘angle’ applies; or\n(b) to which a road marking indicating an angle applies;\nthe driver must position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with\nsubsections (2) to (4).\n(2) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle\nmust be positioned at a specified angle (other than 90), the driver\nmust position the vehicle—\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to the\nspecified angle; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the rear of\n(2A) If the parking control sign or road marking does not indicate the angle\nat which the vehicle must be positioned, the driver must position the\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to 45, as\nshown in example 1 or 2; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the rear of\n\nParking at 45 at the side of a two-way road\nParking at 45 at the right side of a one-way road\n(2B) Subsections (2) and (2A) do not apply if the road marking, or\ninformation on the parking control sign, includes the words ‘rear in’\nor similar words.\n\n(3) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the vehicle\nmust be positioned at an angle of 90, the driver—\n(a) must position the driver’s vehicle so the vehicle is at an angle as\nnear as practicable to 90, as shown in example 3 or 4; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—\n(i) if the road marking, or information on the parking control\nsign, includes the words ‘rear in’ or ‘front in’, or similar\nwords—must position the vehicle so that the front of the\nvehicle is nearest the centre of the road, or the rear of the\nvehicle is nearest the centre of the road, in accordance with\nthe road marking or sign; or\n(ii) otherwise—may position the vehicle either way around.\nParking at 90 at the side of a two-way road\n\nParking at 90 at the right side of a one-way road\n(4) If the road marking, or information on the parking control sign,\nincludes the words ‘rear in’, or similar words, the driver must position\nthe driver’s vehicle—\n(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to—\n(i) the angle indicated by the road marking or parking control\nsign; or\n(ii) if the road marking or parking control sign does not\nindicate an angle—45; and\n(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the front of\n\nParking ‘rear in’ at 30 at the side of a road\nParking ‘rear in’ at 30 in a median strip parking area\n\nParking ‘rear in’ at 45 at the side of a road\nExample 8\nParking ‘rear in’ at 45 in a median strip parking area\n\nExample 9\nParking ‘rear in’ at 60 at the side of a road\nExample 10\nParking ‘rear in’ at 60 in a median strip parking area\n(4A) Subsection (4) does not apply if the parking control sign or road\nmarking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angle\nof 90.\n(5) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike.\n\n","sortOrder":232},{"sectionNumber":"211","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking in parking bay","content":"211 Parking in parking bay\n(1) This section applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in\nan area, that has parking bays (whether or not a park in bays only sign\napplies to the length of road or area).\n(2) The driver must position the driver’s vehicle completely within a\nsingle parking bay, unless the vehicle is too wide or long to fit\ncompletely within the bay.\n(3) If the vehicle is too wide or long to fit completely within a single\nparking bay, the driver must park the driver’s vehicle within the\nminimum number of parking bays needed to park the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":233},{"sectionNumber":"212","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering and leaving median strip parking area","content":"212 Entering and leaving median strip parking area\n(1) If information on or with a traffic control device indicates that a driver\nmust enter or leave a median strip parking area in a particular\ndirection, the driver must enter or leave the area in that direction.\n(2) If there is no information on or with a traffic control device that\nindicates that a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking area\nin a particular direction, the driver must enter or leave the area by\ndriving forward.\n\nOther parking related sections Division 12.10\nLeaving median strip parking area by driving forward\n","sortOrder":234},{"sectionNumber":"213","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making motor vehicle secure","content":"213 Making motor vehicle secure\n(1) This section applies to the driver of a motor vehicle who stops and\nleaves the vehicle on a road.\n(2) Before leaving the vehicle, the driver must apply the parking brake\neffectively or, if weather conditions (for example, snow) would\nprevent the effective operation of the parking brake, effectively\nrestrain the motor vehicle’s movement in another way.\n(3) If the driver will be over 3m from the closest part of the vehicle, the\ndriver must switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle.\n(4) If the driver will be over 3m from the closest part of the vehicle,\nand—\n(a) there is no-one left in the vehicle; or\n(b) there is only a child or children under 16 years old left in the\nvehicle;\nthe driver must remove the ignition key before leaving the vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":235},{"sectionNumber":"213A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Metered parking—parking in space","content":"213A Metered parking—parking in space\n(1) A driver commits an offence if—\n(a) the driver parks in a metered parking area; and\n(b) the driver’s vehicle is not parked in a metered parking space.\n(2) A driver must not park the driver’s vehicle in a metered parking space\nif another vehicle is parked in the space.\n(3) Subsection (2) does not apply to the rider of a motorbike if the other\nvehicle is also a motorbike.\n(4) A driver who parks in a metered parking space must position the\ndriver’s vehicle completely within the space.\n","sortOrder":236},{"sectionNumber":"213B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Metered parking—parking in space—motorbike","content":"213B Metered parking—parking in space—motorbike\n(1) The rider of a motorbike commits an offence if—\n(a) the rider parks the motorbike in a metered parking space; and\n(b) there are more than 2 other motorbikes already parked in the\nspace.\n(2) The rider of a motorbike commits an offence if—\n(a) the rider parks the motorbike in a metered parking space; and\n(b) another motorbike is already parked in the space; and\n\nMetered parking Division 12.11\n(c) the rider parks the motorbike in a position that unreasonably\nobstructs the path of the other motorbike out of the space.\n","sortOrder":237},{"sectionNumber":"213C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Metered parking—parking fee","content":"213C Metered parking—parking fee\n(1) A driver must not park in a metered parking space without paying the\nrelevant parking fee for the space.\n(2) A driver does not commit an offence against subsection (1) if—\n(a) the relevant parking fee for the metered parking space is paid\nimmediately after the driver parks the driver’s vehicle in the\nmetered parking space; or\n(b) the parking meter for the metered parking space indicates that\nthe period for which parking in the space has been paid for has\nnot expired; or\n(c) the parking meter for the metered parking space—\n(i) is not working; or\n(ii) is covered with a parking meter hood bearing the words\n‘out of order time limit applies’.\n","sortOrder":238},{"sectionNumber":"213D","sectionType":"section","heading":"Metered parking—maximum length of stay","content":"213D Metered parking—maximum length of stay\n(1) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a\nmetered parking space if the parking meter for the space indicates that\nthe period for which parking in the space has been paid for has\nexpired.\n\n(2) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a\nmetered parking space for longer than the period (if any) indicated on\nthe metered parking signs applying to the space as the maximum\nperiod for which a vehicle may be parked in the space.\n","sortOrder":239},{"sectionNumber":"213E","sectionType":"section","heading":"Metered parking—exceptions","content":"213E Metered parking—exceptions\n(1) Section 213C (Metered parking—parking fee) and section 213D\n(Metered parking—maximum length of stay) do not apply to—\n(a) a driver for any period the driver’s vehicle is parked in a metered\nparking space outside the controlled parking hours for the space;\nor\n(b) a driver if—\n(i) the driver’s vehicle is parked in a metered parking space;\nand\n(ii) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current mobility\nparking scheme authority; and\nauthority; or\n(c) a driver if—\n(i) the driver’s vehicle is parked in a metered parking space\ndesignated by a permit zone sign for use by the holder of a\nstated kind of parking permit; and\n(ii) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current parking\npermit of that kind; and\n\nMetered parking Division 12.11\ncontrolled parking hours, in relation to a metered parking space,\nmeans the periods (as indicated by information on or with traffic signs\napplying to the space) when a vehicle may not be parked in the space\nunless the relevant parking fee has been paid.\n","sortOrder":240},{"sectionNumber":"213F","sectionType":"section","heading":"Temporary closure of metered parking space","content":"213F Temporary closure of metered parking space\n(1) If the road transport authority decides that the use of a metered\nparking space should be temporarily discontinued, the authority may\nclose the space by—\n(a) installing a sign, at or near the space, that displays words to the\neffect that the space is closed; or\n(b) covering the parking meter applying to the space with a parking\nmeter hood bearing the words ‘no parking’.\n(2) A driver must not park in a metered parking space that has been\nclosed under subsection (1).\nsign includes a board, device, plate, screen, words or anything else,\nwhether or not installed with or on a traffic sign.\n","sortOrder":241},{"sectionNumber":"213G","sectionType":"section","heading":"Misuse of parking meter","content":"213G Misuse of parking meter\n(a) insert in a parking meter anything other than coins appropriate\nfor the meter; or\n(b) attach anything (for example, advertising material) to a parking\nmeter.\n\n","sortOrder":242},{"sectionNumber":"213H","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with parking meter etc","content":"213H Interfering with parking meter etc\n(a) do anything that interferes with (or is likely to interfere with) the\nproper working of a parking meter; or\n(b) fraudulently operate a parking meter.\n","sortOrder":243},{"sectionNumber":"213I","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—parking in space","content":"213I Ticket parking—parking in space\n(1) A driver commits an offence if—\n(a) the driver parks in a ticket parking area; and\n(b) the driver’s vehicle is not parked in a ticket parking space.\n(2) However, the driver does not commit an offence against\nsubsection (1) if the driver parks in a metered parking space within a\nticket parking area and the driver complies with division 12.11\n(Metered parking) in relation to parking in the space.\n(3) A driver must not park the driver’s vehicle in a ticket parking space\nif another vehicle is parked in the space.\n(4) Subsection (3) does not apply to the rider of a motorbike if the other\nvehicle is also a motorbike.\n(5) A driver who parks in a ticket parking space must position the driver’s\nvehicle completely within the space.\n\n","sortOrder":244},{"sectionNumber":"213J","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—parking in space—motorbike","content":"213J Ticket parking—parking in space—motorbike\n(1) The rider of a motorbike commits an offence if—\n(a) the rider parks the motorbike in a ticket parking space; and\n(b) there are more than 2 other motorbikes already parked in the\nspace.\n(2) The rider of a motorbike commits an offence if—\n(a) the rider parks the motorbike in a ticket parking space; and\n(b) another motorbike is already parked in the space; and\n(c) the rider parks the motorbike in a position that unreasonably\nobstructs the path of the other motorbike out of the space.\n","sortOrder":245},{"sectionNumber":"213K","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—display of ticket","content":"213K Ticket parking—display of ticket\n(1) A driver may park the driver’s vehicle in a ticket parking area only\nif—\n(a) for an RTA multi-stay ticket parking area—\n(i) a current parking ticket for the area is correctly displayed\nin or on the vehicle; or\n(ii) a current part-day parking ticket for another RTA\nmulti-stay ticket parking area is correctly displayed in or\non the vehicle; or\n(iii) a current equivalent all-day parking ticket for another RTA\nmulti-stay ticket parking area is correctly displayed in or\non the vehicle; or\n\n(b) for any other ticket parking area—a current parking ticket for\nthe area is correctly displayed in or on the vehicle.\nExamples—par (b)—ticket parking areas\n1 a ticket parking area set up by the road transport authority in which parking up\nto a maximum of 4 hours is permitted by the ticket parking signs applying to\nthe area\n2 a ticket parking area set up by a parking authority\n(2) Subsection (1) (a) does not apply to a driver if, immediately after\nparking in the ticket parking area, the driver—\n(a) obtains a parking ticket for the ticket parking area and the ticket\nis correctly displayed in or on the driver’s vehicle; or\n(b) correctly displays in or on the driver’s vehicle a parking ticket\nmentioned in subsection (1) (a) (ii) or (iii).\n(3) Subsection (1) (b) does not apply to a driver if, immediately after\nparking in the ticket parking area, the driver obtains a parking ticket\nfor the ticket parking area and the ticket is correctly displayed in or\non the driver’s vehicle.\n(4) It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against\nsubsection (1) if the driver proves that—\n(a) a parking ticket was displayed in accordance with the\nsubsection; and\n(b) the driver took reasonable steps to ensure that the ticket\nremained correctly displayed while the driver’s vehicle was\nparked in the ticket parking area.\nall-day parking ticket, for a ticket parking area, means a parking\nticket for which the relevant parking fee for parking all-day in the\narea has been paid.\n\ncorrectly displayed—a parking ticket is correctly displayed in or on\na vehicle if the ticket is displayed—\n(a) in or on the front left-hand side of the vehicle or, if the ticket\nrequires the driver to display the ticket in or on a part of the\nvehicle, in or on that part of the vehicle; and\n(b) in a way that its expiry date (and, for a parking ticket other than\nan all-day parking ticket, its expiry time) and the ticket parking\narea for which it is issued, are clearly visible from outside the\nequivalent, for a multi-stay ticket parking area, means another ticket\nparking area for which the relevant parking fee for an all-day parking\nticket for the area is the same or higher.\npart-day parking ticket means a parking ticket that is not an all-day\nparking ticket.\nRTA multi-stay ticket parking area means a ticket parking area set\naside under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)\nRegulation2017, section 35 (2) (a) (Ticket parking schemes—road\ntransport authority) where all-day parking is permitted by the ticket\nparking signs applying to the area.\n","sortOrder":246},{"sectionNumber":"213L","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—e-payment","content":"213L Ticket parking—e-payment\nSection 213K (1) does not apply to a driver if—\n(a) the driver’s vehicle is parked in a parking space in a ticket\nparking area; and\n(b) the driver has paid for the parking space using an approved\ne-payment method.\n\n","sortOrder":247},{"sectionNumber":"213M","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—maximum length of stay","content":"213M Ticket parking—maximum length of stay\n(1) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a\nticket parking area after the expiry of a parking ticket displayed in or\non the vehicle.\n(2) A driver who has used an approved e-payment method to pay for a\nparking space must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in\nthe parking space after the e-payment parking period for which\nparking in the space has been paid for ends.\n(3) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain parked in a\nticket parking area for longer than the period (if any) indicated on the\nticket parking signs applying to the area as the maximum period for\nwhich a vehicle may be parked in the area.\n","sortOrder":248},{"sectionNumber":"213N","sectionType":"section","heading":"Ticket parking—exceptions to s 213K and s 213M","content":"213N Ticket parking—exceptions to s 213K and s 213M\n(1) Section 213K (Ticket parking—display of ticket) and section 213M\n(Ticket parking—maximum length of stay) do not apply to—\n(a) a driver if the driver parks the driver’s vehicle in a metered\nparking space within a ticket parking area and the driver\ncomplies with division 12.11 (Metered parking) in relation to\nparking in the space; or\n(b) a driver for any period the driver’s vehicle is parked in a ticket\nparking space outside the controlled parking hours for the space;\nor\n(c) a driver if—\n(i) the driver’s vehicle is parked in a ticket parking space; and\n\n(ii) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current mobility\nparking scheme authority; and\nauthority; or\n(d) a driver if—\n(i) the driver’s vehicle is parked in a ticket parking space, or\non a length of road in a ticket parking area, designated by\na permit zone sign for use by the holder of a stated kind of\nparking permit; and\n(ii) the driver displays in or on the vehicle a current parking\npermit of that kind; and\ncontrolled parking hours, in relation to a ticket parking space, means\nthe periods (as indicated by information on or with traffic signs\napplying to the space) when a vehicle may not be parked in the space\nunless the relevant parking fee has been paid.\n","sortOrder":249},{"sectionNumber":"213O","sectionType":"section","heading":"Temporary closure of ticket parking space and area","content":"213O Temporary closure of ticket parking space and area\n(1) If the road transport authority decides that the use of a ticket parking\narea, or ticket parking space, should be temporarily discontinued, the\nauthority may close the area or space by—\n(a) for the closure of a ticket parking area—installing a sign, at or\nnear each traffic sign applying to the area, that displays words\nto the effect that the area is closed; or\n(b) for the closure of a ticket parking space—installing a sign, at or\nnear the space, that displays words to that effect.\n\n(2) If a parking authority decides that the use of a ticket parking area, or\nticket parking space, within its area of operations should be\ntemporarily discontinued, the authority may close the area or space\nby—\n(a) for the closure of a ticket parking area—installing a sign, at or\nnear each traffic sign applying to the area, that displays words\nto the effect that the area is closed; or\n(b) for the closure of a ticket parking space—installing a sign, at or\nnear the space, that displays words to that effect.\n(3) A driver must not park in a ticket parking area or ticket parking space\nthat has been closed under subsection (1) or (2).\nsign includes a board, device, plate, screen, words or anything else,\nwhether or not installed with or on a traffic sign.\n","sortOrder":250},{"sectionNumber":"213P","sectionType":"section","heading":"Use of false or damaged parking ticket etc","content":"213P Use of false or damaged parking ticket etc\n(1) This section applies in relation to a vehicle that is parked in a ticket\nparking space within a ticket parking area.\n(2) A person must not display in or on the vehicle—\n(a) anything resembling a parking ticket that falsely suggests that\nthe relevant parking fee for parking in the space has been paid;\nor\n(b) a parking ticket that has been changed, damaged or defaced.\n(3) Subsection (2) does not apply if the parking ticket was not changed,\ndamaged or defaced in a material particular.\n\n","sortOrder":251},{"sectionNumber":"213Q","sectionType":"section","heading":"Misuse of parking ticket machine","content":"213Q Misuse of parking ticket machine\n(a) insert in a parking ticket machine anything other than coins, or\nanother means of payment, appropriate for the machine; or\n(b) attach anything (for example, advertising material) to a parking\nticket machine.\n","sortOrder":252},{"sectionNumber":"213R","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with parking ticket machine etc","content":"213R Interfering with parking ticket machine etc\n(a) do anything that interferes with (or is likely to interfere with) the\nproper working of a parking ticket machine; or\n(b) fraudulently operate a parking ticket machine.\n","sortOrder":253},{"sectionNumber":"213S","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with parking ticket","content":"213S Interfering with parking ticket\nA person commits an offence if—\n(a) the person removes, changes, damages, defaces or otherwise\ninterferes with a parking ticket that is in or on a vehicle; and\n(b) the vehicle is parked in a ticket parking area; and\n(c) the person is not—\n(i) the driver of the vehicle; or\n(ii) the responsible person for the vehicle.\n\nDivision 12.12A Signs attached to vehicles parked in designated place\nDivision 12.12A Signs attached to vehicles parked in\ndesignated place\n213SA Vehicle parked in designated place must not have sign\nattached\n(1) A driver must not park a vehicle in a designated place if a sign\ndisplaying advertising or electoral matter is attached to the vehicle.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a vehicle being used by or for the\nTerritory.\n(3) The Minister may, for subsection (1), declare—\n(a) a road or public unleased land to be a designated place if\nsatisfied that making the declaration is in the interests of road\nsafety; and\n(b) matter that is or is not advertising.\n(4) A declaration is—\n(a) for subsection (3) (a)—a notifiable instrument; and\n(b) for subsection (3) (b)—a disallowable instrument.\nadvertising—\n(a) means any matter declared to be advertising under\nsubsection (3) (b); but\n(i) any matter declared not to be advertising under\nsubsection (3) (b); or\n(ii) a bumper sticker displayed in or on the vehicle; or\n(iii) advertising indicating that the vehicle is for sale.\n\nOther road rules about stopping and parking Division 12.13\ndesignated place means a place declared under subsection (3) (a).\nelectoral matter—\n(a) means any matter that is intended, or is likely, to affect voting\nin an ACT, Commonwealth or State election or referendum; and\n(b) includes any matter that contains an express or implied reference\nto—\n(i) an ACT, Commonwealth or State election or referendum;\nor\n(ii) any matter on which electors are required to vote in an\nACT, Commonwealth or State election or referendum; but\nNote State includes the Northern Territory (see Legislation Act, dict,\npt 1).\n(c) does not include electoral matter on a bumper sticker displayed\nin or on a vehicle.\npublic unleased land—see the Public Unleased Land Act 2013,\nsection 8.\nsign means a board, device, plate or screen.\nDivision 12.13 Other road rules about stopping and\nparking\n","sortOrder":254},{"sectionNumber":"213T","sectionType":"section","heading":"Unauthorised use of parking permit and mobility parking","content":"213T Unauthorised use of parking permit and mobility parking\nscheme authority\n(1) A driver must not display a parking permit in or on the driver’s\nvehicle if the driver is not entitled to do so under the conditions of the\n\nDivision 12.13 Other road rules about stopping and parking\n(2) A driver must not display a mobility parking scheme authority in or\non the driver’s vehicle if the driver is not entitled to do so under the\nconditions of the authority.\n","sortOrder":255},{"sectionNumber":"213U","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with parking permit and mobility parking","content":"213U Interfering with parking permit and mobility parking\nscheme authority\n(1) A person commits an offence if—\n(a) the person removes or otherwise interferes with a parking permit\nor mobility parking scheme authority that is in or on a vehicle;\nand\n(b) the person is not—\n(i) the driver of the vehicle; or\n(ii) the responsible person for the vehicle; or\n(iii) the person to whom the permit or authority was issued.\n(2) A person commits an offence if the person displays in or on a\n(a) a copy of a parking permit or mobility parking scheme authority;\nor\n(b) a parking permit or mobility parking scheme authority that has\nbeen changed, damaged or defaced.\n","sortOrder":256},{"sectionNumber":"213V","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping in emergency etc or to comply with another law","content":"213V Stopping in emergency etc or to comply with another law\n(1) This section applies to each of the following (a stopping or parking\nprovision of this part):\n(a) section 183A (Stopping public bus in bus zone);\n\nOther road rules about stopping and parking Division 12.13\n(b) section 195A (Stopping public bus at bus stop);\n(c) division 12.11 (Metered parking);\n(d) division 12.12 (Ticket parking);\n(e) this division.\n(2) A stopping or parking provision of this part does not apply to a driver\nif—\n(a) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\navoid a collision, and the driver stops for no longer than is\nnecessary to avoid the collision; or\n(b) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the driver’s vehicle is disabled, and the driver stops for\nno longer than is necessary for the vehicle to be moved safely to\na place where the driver is permitted to park the vehicle under\nthis regulation and a stopping or parking provision of this part;\nor\n(c) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ndeal with a medical or other emergency, and the driver stops for\nno longer than is necessary in the circumstances; or\n(d) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,\nbecause the condition of the driver, a passenger, or the driver’s\nvehicle makes it necessary for the driver to stop in the interests\nof safety, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in\n(e) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to\ncomply with a provision of this regulation or a provision of\nanother law, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary\nto comply with the provision.\n\n","sortOrder":257},{"sectionNumber":"Div 13","sectionType":"division","heading":"1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles,","content":"Division 13.1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles,\nanimals and animal-drawn vehicles)\n","sortOrder":258},{"sectionNumber":"214","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 13.1—rider of bicycle, animal and","content":"214 Application—div 13.1—rider of bicycle, animal and\nanimal-drawn vehicle\nThis division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, animal or\nanimal-drawn vehicle.\n","sortOrder":259},{"sectionNumber":"215","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous","content":"215 Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous\nweather conditions\n(1) A driver must not drive at night, or in hazardous weather conditions\ncausing reduced visibility, unless—\n(a) the headlights, tail lights and numberplate light fitted to the\ndriver’s vehicle are operating effectively and are clearly visible;\nand\n(b) if the vehicle is fitted with clearance lights or side marker\nlights—those lights are operating effectively and are clearly\nvisible.\n(2) However, this section does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle\nis stopped or parked at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to\nwhich a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to\nstop or park at that place under this regulation.\n(3) Also, a driver driving during the day in fog, or other hazardous\nweather conditions causing reduced visibility, may drive without the\nheadlights of the driver’s vehicle operating if the vehicle is fitted with\nfront fog lights and those lights are operating effectively and are\nclearly visible.\n\n(4) In subsection (1), a reference to a kind of light fitted to a vehicle is a\nreference to a light of that kind required to be fitted to the vehicle\nunder the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2000,\nschedule 1 (Light vehicle standards).\nfront fog light—see section 217 (2).\n","sortOrder":260},{"sectionNumber":"216","sectionType":"section","heading":"Towing vehicle at night or in hazardous weather","content":"216 Towing vehicle at night or in hazardous weather\nconditions\n(1) A driver must not tow a vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather\nconditions causing reduced visibility, unless—\n(a) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the front of the\n(i) the tail lights of the vehicle are operating effectively and\nare clearly visible; or\n(ii) the vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating; or\n(b) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the rear of the vehicle—\nthe vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating.\n(2) However, this section does not apply to the driver of a tow truck if—\n(a) the driver is towing a disabled vehicle carrying a placard load of\ndangerous goods to a place that is safely off the road; and\n(b) a vehicle carrying a warning to other traffic is following\nimmediately behind the disabled vehicle.\ndangerous goods—see the Dangerous Goods (Road Transport)\nAct 2009, dictionary.\n\nplacard load—see the Dangerous Goods (Road Transport) Act 2009,\ndictionary.\nportable rear lights means—\n(a) for a vehicle being towed from the front of the vehicle—a pair\nof lights attached to the rear of the vehicle that, when operating,\nshow a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200m from the\nrear of the vehicle; and\n(b) for a vehicle being towed from the rear of the vehicle—a pair of\nlights attached to the front of the vehicle that, when operating,\nshow a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200m from the\nfront of the vehicle.\n","sortOrder":261},{"sectionNumber":"217","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using fog lights","content":"217 Using fog lights\n(1) The driver of a vehicle fitted with front fog lights or rear fog lights\nmust not operate the fog light unless the driver is driving in fog or\nother hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.\nfront fog light means a light (other than a headlight) fitted to the front\nof a vehicle to improve illumination of the road in fog, snowfall,\nheavy rain or dust clouds.\nrear fog light means a light (other than a brake light, a tail light, a\nnumberplate light or a reversing light) fitted to the rear of a vehicle to\nmake the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in fog, snowfall,\nheavy rain or dust clouds.\n\n","sortOrder":262},{"sectionNumber":"218","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using headlights on high-beam","content":"218 Using headlights on high-beam\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not use the vehicle’s headlights on\nhigh-beam, or allow the vehicle’s headlights to be used on high-beam,\nif the driver is driving—\n(a) less than 200m behind a vehicle travelling in the same direction\nas the driver; or\n(b) less than 200m from an oncoming vehicle.\n(2) However, if the driver is overtaking a vehicle, the driver may briefly\nswitch the headlights from low-beam to high-beam immediately\nbefore the driver begins to overtake the vehicle.\nUsing headlights on low-beam when travelling less than 200m behind another\nvehicle travelling in the same direction\nUsing headlights on low-beam when travelling within 200m of an oncoming\nvehicle\n","sortOrder":263},{"sectionNumber":"219","sectionType":"section","heading":"Lights not to be used to dazzle other road user","content":"219 Lights not to be used to dazzle other road user\nA driver must not use, or allow to be used, any light fitted to or in the\ndriver’s vehicle to dazzle, or in a way that is likely to dazzle, another\nroad user.\n\n","sortOrder":264},{"sectionNumber":"220","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights on vehicle that is stopped","content":"220 Using lights on vehicle that is stopped\n(1) A driver must not stop on a road at night unless—\n(a) if the driver’s vehicle is 2.2m wide, or wider—the clearance and\nside marker lights fitted to the vehicle are operating effectively\nand are clearly visible; or\n(b) in any other case—the parking lights fitted to the driver’s\nvehicle are operating effectively and are clearly visible.\n(2) This section does not apply to a driver if the driver stops on a length\nof road, or in an area, with street lighting and the driver’s vehicle is\nvisible for at least 200m in all directions from the vehicle.\n(3) In subsection (1), a reference to a kind of light fitted to a vehicle is a\nreference to a light of that kind required to be fitted to the vehicle\nunder the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2000,\nschedule 1 (Light vehicle standards).\n","sortOrder":265},{"sectionNumber":"221","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using hazard warning lights","content":"221 Using hazard warning lights\n(1) The driver of a vehicle fitted with hazard warning lights must not use\nthe hazard warning lights, or allow them to be used, unless—\n(a) the vehicle is stopped and is obstructing, or is likely to obstruct,\nthe path of other vehicles or pedestrians; or\n(b) the vehicle is a slow-moving vehicle and is obstructing, or is\nlikely to obstruct, the path of other vehicles or pedestrians; or\n(c) the vehicle is stopped in an emergency stopping lane; or\n(d) the driver stops the vehicle to sell a product (for example, ice\ncreams) that may attract children onto the road; or\n\n(e) the driver is driving in hazardous weather conditions (for\nexample, fog or smoke); or\n(f) the vehicle is a bus that—\n(i) is not fitted with any other warning lights in accordance\nwith the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nRegulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle standards); and\n(ii) is carrying children, and the driver stops the vehicle to drop\noff or pick up a child; or\n(g) the hazard warning lights are operating as part of an anti-theft\ndevice, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the vehicle.\nalcohol interlock device means a device in a vehicle that is designed\nto prevent the vehicle from being started or driven unless the device\nis supplied with a breath sample that contains either no alcohol, or\nless than a certain concentration of alcohol.\n","sortOrder":266},{"sectionNumber":"222","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using warning lights on bus carrying children","content":"222 Using warning lights on bus carrying children\n(1) This section applies to the driver of a bus carrying children if the bus\nis required to be fitted with warning lights under the Road Transport\n(Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle\nstandards), other than hazard warning lights.\n(2) The driver must not stop the bus to drop off or pick up a child unless\nthe warning lights are activated by the driver.\n\n","sortOrder":267},{"sectionNumber":"222A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Lights on motor vehicle generally","content":"222A Lights on motor vehicle generally\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle fitted with a spotlight or searchlight\nmust not operate the light, or allow it to be operated, on a road\n(a) the vehicle is stationary, the light is operated only for examining\nor making adjustments or repairs to a vehicle, and light from it\nis not projected further than 6m; or\n(b) the light is operated for the temporary purpose of reading or\nlooking for a notice, sign, house number or something similar;\nor\n(c) the vehicle is a police vehicle; or\n(d) the vehicle is being used by the Territory, the Commonwealth\nor any public authority.\n(2) The driver of a motor vehicle fitted with an additional headlight\npermitted to be fitted under the Road Transport (Vehicle\nRegistration) Regulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle standards)\nmust not operate the headlight, or allow it to be operated, if—\n(a) the vehicle is being driven on a length of road in a built-up area;\nor\n(b) the driver is driving less than—\n(i) 200m behind a vehicle travelling in the same direction as\nthe driver; or\n(ii) 200m from an oncoming vehicle.\n\nLights on animal-drawn vehicles Division 13.2\n","sortOrder":268},{"sectionNumber":"222B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Use of do not overtake turning vehicle sign","content":"222B Use of do not overtake turning vehicle sign\nA person must not drive a motor vehicle or combination displaying a\ndo not overtake turning vehicle sign unless the motor vehicle or\ncombination, together with any load or projection, is at least 7.5m\nlong.\nDivision 13.2 Lights on animal-drawn vehicles\n","sortOrder":269},{"sectionNumber":"223","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using lights when riding animal-drawn vehicle at night or","content":"223 Using lights when riding animal-drawn vehicle at night or\nin hazardous weather conditions\nA person must not ride an animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in\nhazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the\nvehicle is fitted with, and displays—\n(a) a white light fitted at or towards the front of each side of the\nvehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200m from the front of\nthe vehicle; and\n(b) a red light fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the vehicle\nthat is clearly visible for at least 200m from the rear of the\nvehicle; and\n(c) a red reflector fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the\nvehicle that is—\n(i) not over 1.5m above ground level; and\n(ii) clearly visible for at least 50m from the rear of the vehicle\nwhen light is projected onto it by another vehicle’s\nheadlight on low-beam.\n\n","sortOrder":270},{"sectionNumber":"224","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using horn or similar warning device","content":"224 Using horn or similar warning device\nA driver must not use, or allow to be used, a horn, or similar warning\ndevice, fitted to or in the driver’s vehicle unless—\n(a) it is necessary to use the horn, or warning device, to warn other\nroad users or animals of the approach or position of the vehicle;\nor\n(b) the horn, or warning device, is being used as part of an anti-theft\ndevice, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the vehicle.\nDivision 13.4 Portable warning triangles for heavy\n","sortOrder":271},{"sectionNumber":"226","sectionType":"section","heading":"Heavy vehicle to be equipped with portable warning","content":"226 Heavy vehicle to be equipped with portable warning\ntriangles\n(1) A person must not drive a vehicle with a GVM over 12t unless the\nvehicle is equipped with at least 3 portable warning triangles.\n(2) The person must produce the portable warning triangles for\ninspection if the person is directed to do so by a police officer or an\nauthorised person.\n","sortOrder":272},{"sectionNumber":"227","sectionType":"section","heading":"Using portable warning triangles","content":"227 Using portable warning triangles\n(1) This section applies to a driver if the GVM of the driver’s vehicle is\nover 12t.\n\nPortable warning triangles for heavy vehicles Division 13.4\n(2) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being carried\nby the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is\n80km/h or more and the vehicle is not visible at any time for at least\n300m in all directions from that place, the driver must use at least\n3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with\nsubsection (4), to warn other road users of the vehicle or load.\n(3) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being carried\nby the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is\nless than 80km/h and the vehicle is not visible at any time for at least\n200m in all directions from that place, the driver must use at least\n3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with\nsubsection (5), to warn other road users of the vehicle or load.\n(4) For subsection (2), the driver must—\n(a) place 1 triangle at least 200m, but not over 250m, behind the\n(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a)\nand the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle at least 200m, but not over 250m, in front of the\n(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a\nposition that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the\nposition of the vehicle or fallen load.\n(5) For subsection (3), the driver must—\n(a) place 1 triangle at least 50m, but not over 150m, behind the\n\nDivision 13.4 Portable warning triangles for heavy vehicles\n(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a)\nand the vehicle or fallen load; and\n(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road,\nplace 1 triangle at least 50m, but not over 150m, in front of the\n(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a\nposition that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the\nposition of the vehicle or fallen load.\ndivided road means any length of a two-way road that has a median\nstrip that is a structure.\n\n","sortOrder":273},{"sectionNumber":"228","sectionType":"section","heading":"No pedestrians sign","content":"228 No pedestrians sign\nA pedestrian must not travel past a no pedestrians sign.\n","sortOrder":274},{"sectionNumber":"229","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrian on road with road access sign","content":"229 Pedestrian on road with road access sign\nA pedestrian must not be on a length of road to which a road access\nsign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that\npedestrians are not permitted beyond the sign.\n","sortOrder":275},{"sectionNumber":"230","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing road—general","content":"230 Crossing road—general\n(1) A pedestrian crossing a road—\n(a) must cross by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) must not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road\n(2) However, if the pedestrian is crossing the road at an intersection with\ntraffic lights and a pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, the\npedestrian may cross the road diagonally at the intersection.\n\n","sortOrder":276},{"sectionNumber":"231","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing road at pedestrian lights","content":"231 Crossing road at pedestrian lights\n(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on a\nroad, with pedestrian lights and traffic lights must comply with this\n(2) If the pedestrian lights show a red pedestrian light and the pedestrian\nhas not already started crossing the intersection or road, the pedestrian\nmust not start to cross until the pedestrian lights change to green.\n(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the pedestrian lights\nchange to flashing red or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road\nfor longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction\nof travel of the pedestrian) of the following:\narea set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the\nintersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the nearest side of the road.\n(4) If, under subsection (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the\npedestrian must remain in the safety area until the pedestrian lights\nchange to green.\n(5) However, if the pedestrian cannot operate the pedestrian lights from\nthe safety area, the pedestrian may cross to the far side of the road\nwhen—\n(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is\nno red traffic light showing; and\n(b) it is safe to do so.\n\n","sortOrder":277},{"sectionNumber":"232","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing road at traffic lights","content":"232 Crossing road at traffic lights\n(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place on a\nroad, with traffic lights, but without pedestrian lights, must comply\n(2) If the traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light and the pedestrian\nhas not already started crossing the intersection or road, the pedestrian\nmust not start to cross until the traffic lights change to green or\nflashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.\n(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the traffic lights change\nto yellow or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longer\nthan necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of travel\nof the pedestrian) of the following:\narea set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the\nintersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the far side of the road.\n(3A) Despite subsection (3), in the circumstances set out in that subsection\nthe pedestrian may instead return to the side of the road, or to the\nsafety area, that the pedestrian has just left, but only if—\n(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer to\nthe pedestrian than the side or safety area (whichever is the\ncloser) that the pedestrian was heading for at that time; and\n(b) the pedestrian does not stay on the road for longer than is\nnecessary to return to that side or safety area.\n(4) If, under subsection (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area, the\npedestrian must remain in the safety area until the traffic lights change\nto green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.\n\n","sortOrder":278},{"sectionNumber":"233","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing road to or from tram","content":"233 Crossing road to or from tram\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road to get on a tram at a tram stop until\nthe tram has stopped at the tram stop.\n(2) A pedestrian crossing a road after getting off a tram—\n(a) must cross to the nearest footpath by the shortest safe route or,\nif there is no footpath, cross the road by the shortest safe route;\nand\n(b) must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross the\nroad safely.\n(3) This section does not apply to a pedestrian—\n(a) on a safety zone; or\n(b) crossing a road to or from a safety zone.\n(4) Subsection (2) does not apply to—\n(a) a pedestrian in a shared zone; or\n(b) an employee of a public transport operator who is in uniform\nand engaged in carrying out the employee’s duties.\n\n","sortOrder":279},{"sectionNumber":"234","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing road on or near crossing for pedestrians","content":"234 Crossing road on or near crossing for pedestrians\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road, or part of a road, within 20m of a\ncrossing on the road, except at the crossing or another crossing, unless\nthe pedestrian is—\n(a) crossing, or helping another pedestrian to cross, an area of the\nroad between tram tracks and the far left side of the road to get\non, or after getting off, a tram or public bus; or\n(b) crossing to or from a safety zone; or\n(c) crossing at an intersection with traffic lights and a pedestrians\nmay cross diagonally sign; or\n(d) crossing in a shared zone; or\n(e) crossing a road, or a part of a road, from which vehicles are\nexcluded, either permanently or temporarily.\n(2) A pedestrian must not stay on a crossing on a road for longer than\nnecessary to cross the road safely.\ncrossing means a children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or\npedestrian crossing.\n","sortOrder":280},{"sectionNumber":"235","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing level crossing","content":"235 Crossing level crossing\n(1) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level\ncrossing unless—\n(a) there is a pedestrian facility at the crossing and the pedestrian\nuses the facility; or\n(b) there is no pedestrian facility at, or within 20m of, the crossing.\n\n(2) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level\ncrossing if—\n(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red\nlights) are flashing or warning bells are ringing; or\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or\nclosing; or\n(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing; or\n(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the\ncrossing or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger\nof the pedestrian being struck by the train or tram if the\npedestrian entered the crossing; or\n(e) the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.\nExample—s (2) (e)\npedestrian, or by stock on the road.\n(2A) If any of the following events occurs after a pedestrian has started to\ncross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing, the pedestrian\nmust finish crossing the line or tracks without delay:\n(a) warning lights start flashing, or warning bells start ringing;\n(b) a gate, boom or barrier starts to close;\n(c) a train or tram approaches the crossing.\npedestrian facility means a footpath, bridge or other structure\ndesigned for the use of pedestrians.\n\n","sortOrder":281},{"sectionNumber":"235A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Crossing pedestrian level crossing that has red","content":"235A Crossing pedestrian level crossing that has red\npedestrian light\npedestrian level crossing means an area where a footpath or shared\npath crosses a railway line or tram tracks at substantially the same\nlevel.\n(2) If a pedestrian approaches a pedestrian level crossing that has a red\npedestrian light, the pedestrian must not start to cross the crossing\nwhile the light is red.\n(3) If a red pedestrian light at a pedestrian level crossing appears after a\npedestrian has started to cross the crossing, the pedestrian must finish\ncrossing the crossing without delay.\n","sortOrder":282},{"sectionNumber":"236","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrian not to cause traffic hazard or obstruction","content":"236 Pedestrian not to cause traffic hazard or obstruction\n(1) A pedestrian must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into the path\nof a driver.\n(2) A pedestrian must not unreasonably obstruct the path of any driver or\nanother pedestrian.\n(3) For subsection (2), a pedestrian does not unreasonably obstruct the\npath of another pedestrian only by travelling more slowly than other\n\n(4) A pedestrian (other than a person travelling in or on a personal\nmobility device, wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy) may\nstand on, or move onto, a road (other than a designated intersection)\nto—\n(a) solicit contributions, employment or business from a person in\na vehicle; or\n(b) hitchhike; or\n(c) display an advertisement; or\n(d) sell or offer articles for sale; or\n(e) wash or clean, or offer to clean, the windscreen of a vehicle.\n(4A) A pedestrian commits an offence if the pedestrian—\n(a) stands on, or moves onto, a designated intersection; and\n(b) engages in any of the following activities:\n(i) solicits contributions, employment or business from a\nperson in a vehicle;\n(ii) hitchhikes;\n(iii) displays an advertisement;\n(iv) sells or offers articles for sale;\n(v) washes or cleans, or offers to clean, the windscreen of a\nMaximum penalty: 10 penalty units.\n(5) A person in a vehicle may buy, or offer to buy, an article or service\nfrom a person standing on a road (other than a designated\nintersection).\n\ndesignated intersection means a road and a road related area at, or\nwithin 50m of, any of the following intersections:\n(a) Northbourne Avenue with Barry Drive and Cooyong Street;\n(b) Northbourne Avenue with MacArthur Avenue and Wakefield\nAvenue;\n(c) Northbourne Avenue with Mouat Street and Antill Street;\n(d) Northbourne Avenue with Barton Highway and Federal\nHighway;\n(e) Federal Highway with Flemington Road.\nroad includes any shoulder of the road, and any median strip, painted\nisland or traffic island, but does not include any other road related\n","sortOrder":283},{"sectionNumber":"237","sectionType":"section","heading":"Getting on or into moving vehicle","content":"237 Getting on or into moving vehicle\n(1) A person must not get on, or into, a moving vehicle unless—\n(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection\nof goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required\nto get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent\nintervals; and\n(b) the vehicle is not travelling at a speed over 5km/h.\n(2) This section does not apply to a person who is getting on or off a\nbicycle or animal.\n\n","sortOrder":284},{"sectionNumber":"238","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrian travelling along road (except in or on wheeled","content":"238 Pedestrian travelling along road (except in or on wheeled\nrecreational device, wheeled toy or personal mobility\ndevice)\n(1) A pedestrian must not travel along a road if there is a footpath or\nnature strip adjacent to the road, unless it is impracticable to travel on\nthe footpath or nature strip.\n(2) A pedestrian travelling along a road—\n(a) must keep as far to the left or right side of the road as practicable;\nand\n(ab) must, when moving forward, face approaching traffic that is\nmoving in the direction opposite to which the pedestrian is\ntravelling, unless it is impracticable to do so; and\n(b) must not travel on the road alongside more than 1 other\npedestrian or vehicle travelling on the road in the same direction\nas the pedestrian, unless the pedestrian is overtaking other\n(2A) This section does not apply to a pedestrian in a shared zone.\npedestrian does not include—\n(a) a person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy; or\n(b) a person travelling in or on a personal mobility device.\nNote People travelling along roads in or on wheeled recreational devices or\nwheeled toys are dealt with in s 241. People travelling along roads in or\non personal mobility devices are dealt with in s 244E.\n\n","sortOrder":285},{"sectionNumber":"239","sectionType":"section","heading":"Pedestrian on bicycle path or separated footpath","content":"239 Pedestrian on bicycle path or separated footpath\n(1) A pedestrian must not be on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated\nfootpath designated for the use of bicycles, unless the pedestrian—\n(a) is crossing the bicycle path or separated footpath by the shortest\nsafe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the bicycle path or separated footpath for longer\nthan necessary to cross the bicycle path or separated footpath\n(2) However, a pedestrian may be on a bicycle path, or a part of a\nseparated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, if—\n(a) the pedestrian is—\n(i) in or pushing a wheelchair; or\n(ii) on rollerblades, rollerskates or a similar wheeled\nrecreational device; or\n(iii) travelling in or on a personal mobility device; and\n(b) there is no traffic control device, or information on or with a\ntraffic control device, applying to the bicycle path or separated\nfootpath that indicates that the pedestrian is not permitted to be\non the bicycle path or the part of the separated footpath\ndesignated for the use of bicycles.\n(3) A pedestrian who is crossing a bicycle path, or a part of a separated\nfootpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path\nof any bicycle, or any pedestrian who is permitted under\nsubsection (2) to be on the bicycle path, or the part of the separated\nfootpath designated for the use of bicycles.\n\n(4) In this regulation:\nbicycle path means a length of path beginning at a bicycle path sign\nor bicycle path road marking, and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) an end bicycle path sign or end bicycle path road marking;\n(b) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking;\n(c) a road (except a road related area);\n(d) the end of the path.\nbicycle path road marking means a road marking on a path,\nconsisting of a bicycle symbol, the words ‘bicycles only’, or both the\nbicycle symbol and the word ‘only’.\nseparated footpath means a length of footpath beginning at a\nseparated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking, and\nending at the nearest of the following:\n(a) an end separated footpath sign or end separated footpath road\nmarking;\n(b) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n(c) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking;\n(d) a road (except a road related area);\n(e) the end of the footpath.\nseparated footpath road marking means a road marking on a\nfootpath consisting of a pedestrian symbol and a bicycle symbol side\nby side, with or without the word ‘only’.\n\nend bicycle path road marking means a bicycle path road marking\nwith the word ‘end’.\nend separated footpath road marking means a separated footpath\nroad marking with the word ‘end’.\n","sortOrder":286},{"sectionNumber":"Div 14","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 Additional rules for people travelling","content":"Division 14.2 Additional rules for people travelling\nin or on wheeled recreational devices\nand wheeled toys\n","sortOrder":287},{"sectionNumber":"240A","sectionType":"section","heading":"No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign","content":"240A No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign\nA person on a road who is travelling in or on a wheeled recreational\ndevice or wheeled toy must not travel past a no wheeled recreational\ndevices or toys sign.\n","sortOrder":288},{"sectionNumber":"240","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wheeled recreational device or toy not to be used on","content":"240 Wheeled recreational device or toy not to be used on\ncertain roads\nwheeled toy on—\n(a) a road with a dividing line or median strip; or\n(b) a road on which the speed limit is greater than 50km/h; or\n(c) a one-way road with more than 1 marked lane.\n(2) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device on a\nroad at night.\n\nDivision 14.2 Additional rules for people travelling in or on wheeled recreational\n(3A) Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a person who is crossing a\nroad in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy, if the\nperson—\n(a) crosses the road by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road\n(4) In subsections (1) and (2), road does not include road related area,\nbut includes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":289},{"sectionNumber":"241","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on wheeled recreational device or toy on","content":"241 Travelling in or on wheeled recreational device or toy on\nroad\n(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy on a road—\n(a) must keep as far to the left side of the road as is practicable; and\n(b) must not travel alongside more than 1 other pedestrian or vehicle\ntravelling on the road in the same direction as the person, unless\nthe person is overtaking other pedestrians.\nroad does not include a road related area but, in subsection (1) (b),\nincludes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":290},{"sectionNumber":"241A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Use of wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy on","content":"241A Use of wheeled recreational device and wheeled toy on\nroad\nwheeled toy on a road while it is attached to another vehicle.\n\n(2) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy on a road must not permit it to be drawn by another vehicle.\n(3) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or\nwheeled toy on a road if anyone travelling in or on it is completely or\npartly assisted in propelling it by means other than human power or\ngravity.\n","sortOrder":291},{"sectionNumber":"242","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on wheeled recreational device or toy on","content":"242 Travelling in or on wheeled recreational device or toy on\nfootpath or shared path\n(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy on a footpath or shared path must—\n(b) give way to any pedestrian (except a person travelling in or on a\nwheeled recreational device or wheeled toy) who is on the\nfootpath or shared path.\nshared path means an area open to the public (except a separated\nfootpath) that is designated for, or has as 1 of its main uses, use by\nboth the riders of bicycles and pedestrians, and includes a length of\npath for use by both bicycles and pedestrians beginning at a shared\npath sign or shared path road marking and ending at the nearest of the\n(a) an end shared path sign or end shared path road marking;\n(b) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road marking;\n(c) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n\nDivision 14.2 Additional rules for people travelling in or on wheeled recreational\n(d) a road (except a road related area);\n(e) the end of the path.\nend shared path road marking means a shared path road marking\nwith the word ‘end’.\nshared path road marking means a road marking consisting of a\npedestrian symbol above a bicycle symbol.\n","sortOrder":292},{"sectionNumber":"243","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling on rollerblades etc on bicycle path or","content":"243 Travelling on rollerblades etc on bicycle path or\nseparated footpath\n(1) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar wheeled\nrecreational device, must not be on a part of a separated footpath\ndesignated for the use of pedestrians unless the person—\n(a) is crossing the separated footpath by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the separated footpath for longer than necessary\nto cross the separated footpath safely.\n(2) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar wheeled\nrecreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated footpath\ndesignated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path of any\nbicycle.\n","sortOrder":293},{"sectionNumber":"244","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy being towed","content":"244 Wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy being towed\netc\nwheeled toy that is being towed by a vehicle.\n\n(2) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy must not hold onto a vehicle while the vehicle is moving.\n(3) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled\ntoy must not travel within 2m of the rear of a moving motor vehicle\ncontinuously for more than 200m\n\nDivision 14.3 Additional rules for people travelling\nin or on personal mobility devices\n","sortOrder":294},{"sectionNumber":"244D","sectionType":"section","heading":"Personal mobility device not to be used on road if","content":"244D Personal mobility device not to be used on road if\nfootpath etc available\n(1) A person must not travel in or on a personal mobility device on a\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if—\n(a) there is no footpath, nature strip or shared path adjacent to the\nroad (an adjacent area); or\n(b) it is impracticable to travel on an adjacent area.\n(3) Subsection (1) does not apply to a person who is crossing a road in or\non a personal mobility device if the person—\n(a) crosses the road by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road\n(4) In subsections (1) and (2), road does not include road related area,\nbut includes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":295},{"sectionNumber":"244E","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on personal mobility device on road","content":"244E Travelling in or on personal mobility device on road\n(1) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device on a road—\n(a) must keep as far to the left side of the road as is practicable; and\n(b) must not, when moving forward, face approaching traffic that is\nmoving in the direction opposite to which the person is\ntravelling; and\n\n(c) must not travel alongside more than 1 other pedestrian or vehicle\ntravelling on the road in the same direction as the person, unless\nthe person is overtaking other pedestrians.\n(2) This section does not apply to a person in a shared zone.\nroad does not include a road related area but, in subsection (1) (c),\nincludes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":296},{"sectionNumber":"244F","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on personal mobility device on footpath","content":"244F Travelling in or on personal mobility device on footpath\nor shared path\nA person travelling in or on a personal mobility device on a footpath\nor shared path must—\n(b) give way to any pedestrian (except a person travelling in or on a\npersonal mobility device) who is on the footpath or shared path.\n244FA Travelling in or on personal mobility device on bicycle\npath or separated footpath\n(1) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device must not be\non a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of pedestrians\nunless the person—\n(a) is crossing the separated footpath by the shortest safe route; and\n(b) does not stay on the separated footpath for longer than necessary\nto cross the separated footpath safely.\n\n(2) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device on a bicycle\npath, or a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of\nbicycles, must keep out of the path of any bicycle.\n244FB Speed limit travelling in or on personal mobility device\nA person travelling in or on a personal mobility device commits an\noffence if the person travels faster than—\n(a) if the person is travelling on a footpath—15km/h; or\n(b) in any other case—25km/h.\n244G Travelling in or on personal mobility device across road\non crossing\n(1) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device commits an\noffence if, when approaching a crossing, the person—\n(b) fails to look for approaching traffic and prepare to stop.\n(2) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device commits an\noffence if, when riding on a crossing, the person—\n(b) fails to give way to another pedestrian on the crossing; or\n(c) fails to keep to the left of an oncoming bicycle or pedestrian.\n\ncrossing means any of the following:\n(a) a children’s crossing;\n(b) a marked foot crossing;\n(c) a pedestrian crossing.\n244GA Use of mobile device in or on personal mobility device\n(1) A person commits an offence if the person uses a mobile device while\ntravelling in or on a personal mobility device.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply if—\n(a) the mobile device is being used as a driver’s aid and, while being\nused for that purpose, both of the following apply:\n(i) the body of the mobile device is secured in a mounting\naffixed to the personal mobility device;\n(ii) the use of the device does not require the person to press\nanything on the body of the mobile device or otherwise\nmanipulate any part of the body of the mobile device;\n(b) the mobile device is being used to stream or play music or audio\nfiles and, while being used for that purpose, both of the\nfollowing apply:\n(i) the body of the mobile device is not being held by the\nperson;\n\n(ii) the use of the mobile device does not require the person to\npress anything on the body of the mobile device or\notherwise manipulate any part of the body of the mobile\n(3) For this section, a person does not use a mobile device to receive a\ntext message, video message, email or similar communication if—\n(a) the communication is received automatically by the mobile\ndevice; and\n(b) on and after receipt, the communication itself (rather than any\nindication that the communication has been received) does not\nbecome automatically visible on the screen of the mobile device.\nbody, in relation to a mobile device—see section 300 (8).\nheld, by a person—\n(a) includes rested on, or kept in place by—\n(i) a part of the person’s body; or\n(ii) clothing worn by the person; or\n(iii) something else on the person’s lap; but\n(i) kept in a pocket of the person’s clothing or in a pouch worn\nby the person; or\n(ii) for a mobile device that is a wearable device—worn by the\nperson in the manner intended by the manufacturer.\n\nuse, in relation to a mobile device, includes any of the following\nactions by a person:\n(a) holding the body of the device (whether or not engaged in a\nphone call);\n(b) entering or placing, other than by the use of voice, anything into\nthe device, or sending or looking at anything that is in the device;\n(c) turning the device on or off;\n(d) operating any other function of the device.\n244H Person travelling in or on personal mobility device must\nwear bicycle helmet\n(1) A person travelling in or on a personal mobility device must wear an\napproved bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the person’s\nhead.\n(2) This section does not apply if—\n(a) the person is a member of a religious group; and\n\n244HA Carrying passenger in or on personal mobility device\nA person commits an offence if the person—\n(a) travels in or on a personal mobility device; and\n(b) another person is in or on the device.\n244HB Child using personal mobility device\nA child under 12 years old may only use a personal mobility device\nwith adult supervision.\n","sortOrder":297},{"sectionNumber":"244I","sectionType":"section","heading":"Warning device—personal mobility device","content":"244I Warning device—personal mobility device\nA person travelling in or on a personal mobility device commits an\noffence if—\n(a) a bell, horn or similar warning device in working order is not\nfitted to the personal mobility device; or\n(b) if it is not reasonably practicable for a bell, horn or similar\nwarning device to be fitted to the personal mobility device—the\nperson does not have ready access to a bell, horn or similar\nwarning device in working order.\n","sortOrder":298},{"sectionNumber":"244J","sectionType":"section","heading":"Personal mobility device use at night or hazardous","content":"244J Personal mobility device use at night or hazardous\nweather conditions\n(1) A person commits an offence if—\n(a) the person travels in or on a personal mobility device—\n(i) at night; or\n(ii) in hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.\n\n(b) fails to comply with a requirement under subsection (2).\n(2) The person must display, on themself or the personal mobility\ndevice—\n(a) a flashing or steady white light that is clearly visible for at least\n200m from the front of the personal mobility device; and\n(b) a flashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for at least\n200m from the rear of the personal mobility device; and\n(c) a red reflector that is clearly visible for at least 50m from the\nrear of the personal mobility device when light is projected onto\nit by a vehicle’s headlight on low-beam.\n","sortOrder":299},{"sectionNumber":"244K","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on personal mobility device—maintaining","content":"244K Travelling in or on personal mobility device—maintaining\nproper control\nA person must not travel in or on a personal mobility device unless\nthe person has proper control of the personal mobility device.\n","sortOrder":300},{"sectionNumber":"244L","sectionType":"section","heading":"Travelling in or on personal mobility device without due","content":"244L Travelling in or on personal mobility device without due\ncare etc\nA person must not travel in or on a personal mobility device\nwithout—\n(a) due care and attention; or\n(b) reasonable consideration for other road users.\n\n","sortOrder":301},{"sectionNumber":"245","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding bicycle","content":"245 Riding bicycle\nThe rider of a bicycle must—\n(a) be astride the rider’s seat facing forwards (except if the bicycle\nis not built to be ridden astride); and\n(b) ride with at least 1 hand on the handlebars; and\n(c) if the bicycle is equipped with a seat—not ride the bicycle seated\nin any other position on the bicycle.\n","sortOrder":302},{"sectionNumber":"246","sectionType":"section","heading":"Carrying people on bicycle","content":"246 Carrying people on bicycle\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not carry more people on the bicycle than\nthe bicycle is designed to carry.\nA single-seat bicycle with a child’s seat attached is designed to carry 2 people, 1 on\nthe bicycle seat and 1 on the attached child’s seat.\n(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must sit in the seat designed for the passenger.\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger unless the\npassenger complies with subsection (2).\n\n","sortOrder":303},{"sectionNumber":"247","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding in bicycle lane on road","content":"247 Riding in bicycle lane on road\n(1) The rider of a bicycle riding on a length of road with a bicycle lane\ndesigned for bicycles travelling in the same direction as the rider must\nride in the bicycle lane unless it is impracticable to do so.\n","sortOrder":304},{"sectionNumber":"247A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Entering bicycle storage area","content":"247A Entering bicycle storage area\nThe rider of a bicycle approaching a bicycle storage area at an\nintersection that has traffic lights or traffic arrows showing a red\ntraffic light or red arrow must not enter the bicycle storage area other\nthan from a bicycle lane, unless the rider is not required to ride in the\nbicycle lane under this regulation.\n","sortOrder":305},{"sectionNumber":"247B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Giving way while entering or in bicycle storage area","content":"247B Giving way while entering or in bicycle storage area\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must, when entering a bicycle storage area, give\nway to—\n(a) any vehicle that is in the area; and\n(b) if the area is before any green or yellow traffic lights, any motor\nvehicle that is entering or about to enter the area, unless the\nmotor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a red\ntraffic arrow; and\n(c) if the area forms part of a lane to which traffic arrows apply, any\nmotor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area at a time\nwhen those arrows are green or yellow.\n\n(2) The rider of a bicycle that is in a bicycle storage area that extends\nacross more than 1 lane of a multi-lane road must, if the area is before\nany green or yellow traffic lights, give way to a motor vehicle that is\nin any lane other than the lane that the bicycle is directly in front of,\nunless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a\nred traffic arrow.\n","sortOrder":306},{"sectionNumber":"248A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding across road on crossing","content":"248A Riding across road on crossing\n(1) A bicycle rider commits an offence if, when approaching a crossing,\nthe rider—\n(b) fails to look for approaching traffic and prepare to stop.\n(2) A bicycle rider commits an offence if the rider starts to cross a marked\nfoot crossing—\n(a) if the crossing has bicycle crossing lights—when the bicycle\ncrossing lights are not showing a green bicycle crossing light; or\n(b) if the crossing does not have bicycle crossing lights—when the\npedestrian lights at the crossing are not showing a green\npedestrian light.\n(3) A bicycle rider commits an offence if, when riding on a crossing, the\nrider—\n(b) fails to give way to a pedestrian on the crossing; or\n(c) fails to keep to the left of an oncoming bicycle or pedestrian.\n\ncrossing means any of the following:\n(a) a children’s crossing;\n(b) a marked foot crossing;\n(c) a pedestrian crossing.\n","sortOrder":307},{"sectionNumber":"249","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding on separated footpath","content":"249 Riding on separated footpath\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride on a part of a separated footpath\ndesignated for the use of pedestrians.\n","sortOrder":308},{"sectionNumber":"250","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding on footpath or shared path","content":"250 Riding on footpath or shared path\n(1) The rider of a bicycle riding on a footpath or shared path must—\n(b) give way to any pedestrian on the footpath or shared path.\nfootpath does not include a separated footpath.\n","sortOrder":309},{"sectionNumber":"251","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding to left of oncoming bicycle rider on path","content":"251 Riding to left of oncoming bicycle rider on path\nThe rider of a bicycle riding on a bicycle path, footpath, separated\nfootpath or shared path must keep to the left of any oncoming bicycle\nrider on the path.\n\n","sortOrder":310},{"sectionNumber":"252","sectionType":"section","heading":"No bicycles sign and marking","content":"252 No bicycles sign and marking\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a length of road or footpath to\nwhich a no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies.\n(2) A no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies to a length\nof road or footpath beginning at the sign or marking and ending at the\nnearest of the following:\n(a) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road marking;\n(b) a bicycle lane sign;\n(c) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road marking;\n(d) a shared path sign;\n(e) an end no bicycles sign;\n(f) the next intersection.\n","sortOrder":311},{"sectionNumber":"253","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle rider not to cause traffic hazard","content":"253 Bicycle rider not to cause traffic hazard\nThe rider of a bicycle must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into\nthe path of a driver or pedestrian.\n","sortOrder":312},{"sectionNumber":"254","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle being towed etc","content":"254 Bicycle being towed etc\n(1) A person must not ride on a bicycle that is being towed by another\n(2) The rider of a bicycle must not hold onto another vehicle while the\nvehicle is moving.\n\n","sortOrder":313},{"sectionNumber":"255","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding too close to rear of motor vehicle","content":"255 Riding too close to rear of motor vehicle\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride within 2m of the rear of a moving\nmotor vehicle continuously for more than 200m.\n","sortOrder":314},{"sectionNumber":"256","sectionType":"section","heading":"Bicycle helmet","content":"256 Bicycle helmet\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely\nfitted and fastened on the rider’s head.\n(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and\nfastened on the passenger’s head, unless the passenger is a paying\npassenger on a three-wheeled or four-wheeled bicycle.\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger on the bicycle\nunless the passenger complies with subsection (2).\n(4) This section does not apply if—\n(a) the person required to wear the helmet is a member of a religious\ngroup; and\nmentioned in s (4) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n\n","sortOrder":315},{"sectionNumber":"257","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding with person on bicycle trailer","content":"257 Riding with person on bicycle trailer\n(1) The rider of a bicycle must not tow a bicycle trailer with a person in\nor on the bicycle trailer, unless—\n(a) the rider is 16 years old, or older; and\n(b) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is under 10 years old; and\n(c) the bicycle trailer can safely carry the person; and\n(d) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is wearing an approved\nbicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the person’s head.\n(1A) Subsection (1) (d) does not apply if—\n(a) the person is a member of a religious group; and\nmentioned in s (1A) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\nbicycle trailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed, or is towed,\nby a bicycle.\n","sortOrder":316},{"sectionNumber":"258","sectionType":"section","heading":"Equipment on bicycle","content":"258 Equipment on bicycle\nA person must not ride a bicycle that does not have—\n(a) at least 1 effective brake; and\n(b) a bell, horn, or similar warning device, in working order.\n\n","sortOrder":317},{"sectionNumber":"259","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding at night","content":"259 Riding at night\nThe rider of a bicycle must not ride at night, or in hazardous weather\nconditions causing reduced visibility, unless the bicycle, or the rider,\ndisplays—\n(a) a flashing or steady white light that is clearly visible for at least\n200m from the front of the bicycle; and\n(b) a flashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for at least\n200m from the rear of the bicycle; and\n(c) a red reflector that is clearly visible for at least 50m from the\nrear of the bicycle when light is projected onto it by a vehicle’s\nheadlight on low-beam.\n","sortOrder":318},{"sectionNumber":"260","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for red bicycle crossing light","content":"260 Stopping for red bicycle crossing light\n(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching or at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road or road related area, with bicycle crossing lights must\ncomply with this section.\n(2) If the bicycle crossing lights show a red bicycle crossing light and the\nrider has not already started crossing the intersection or place, the\nrider must not start to cross until—\n(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green; or\n(b) there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light showing.\nroad includes any shoulder of the road.\n\n","sortOrder":319},{"sectionNumber":"261","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for yellow bicycle crossing light","content":"261 Stopping for yellow bicycle crossing light\n(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching or at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road or road related area, with bicycle crossing lights must\ncomply with this section.\n(2) If the bicycle crossing lights show a yellow bicycle crossing light and\nthe rider has not already started crossing the intersection or place, the\nrider must not start to cross until—\n(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green; or\n(b) there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light showing.\nroad includes any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":320},{"sectionNumber":"262","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or","content":"262 Proceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or\nanother place on a road\n(1) The rider of a bicycle who is crossing at an intersection, or another\nplace on a road, with pedestrian crossing lights or bicycle crossing\nlights (crossing lights) and traffic lights must comply with this\n(2) If the crossing lights change from green to yellow, flashing yellow,\nred or flashing red while the rider is crossing the road, the rider must\nnot stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross safely to the\nnearer (in the direction of travel of the rider) of the following:\narea set aside or used by riders of bicycles to cross the road at\nthe intersection or place (the safety area);\n(b) the far side of the road.\n\n(2A) Despite subsection (2), in the circumstances set out in that subsection\nthe rider may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety\narea, that the rider has just left, but only if—\n(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer to\nthe rider than the side or safety area (whichever is the closer)\nthat the rider was heading for at that time; and\n(b) the rider does not stay on the road for longer than is necessary\nto return to that side or safety area.\n(3) If, under subsection (2), the rider crosses to the safety area, the rider\nmust remain in the safety area until the crossing lights change to\ngreen.\n(4) However, if the rider cannot operate the crossing lights from the\nsafety area, the rider may cross to the far side of the road when—\n(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is\nno red traffic light showing; and\n(b) it is safe to do so.\n(4A) If the bicycle crossing lights show a green bicycle crossing light, the\nrider may cross at the intersection, or another place on the road, even\nthough the traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light.\n\n","sortOrder":321},{"sectionNumber":"Part 16","sectionType":"part","heading":"Rules for people travelling in or","content":"Part 16 Rules for people travelling in or\non vehicles\n","sortOrder":322},{"sectionNumber":"263","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—pt 16—people in or on tram","content":"263 Application—pt 16—people in or on tram\nThis part, except section 269 (1) (Opening door and getting out of\nvehicle etc), does not apply to a person in or on a tram.\n","sortOrder":323},{"sectionNumber":"Div 16","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 Wearing seatbelts and seating","content":"Division 16.2 Wearing seatbelts and seating\npositions—drivers and passengers\n","sortOrder":324},{"sectionNumber":"264","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing seatbelt and seating position—driver","content":"264 Wearing seatbelt and seating position—driver\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked—\n(a) must occupy a driver’s seating position that is fitted with an\napproved seatbelt; and\n(b) must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger\n(whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt under section 267); and\n(c) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.\nExamples—seatbelts properly adjusted and fastened\n1 A lap and sash seatbelt is properly adjusted and fastened for a driver if—\n(a) the seatbelt is secured in the buckle with the lap portion of the belt sitting\nlow and firmly over the driver’s hips; and\n(b) the sash portion of the belt is positioned firmly over the driver’s shoulder\nand not under the driver’s arm furthest from the secured buckle or\nbehind the driver’s back.\n2 A lap belt is properly adjusted and fastened for a driver if the seatbelt is secured\nin the buckle with the belt sitting low and firmly over the driver’s hips.\n\nWearing seatbelts and seating positions—drivers and passengers Division 16.2\n(2) Subsection (1) (c) does not apply if the driver is—\n(a) reversing the vehicle; or\n(b) exempt from wearing a seatbelt under section 267.\n","sortOrder":325},{"sectionNumber":"265","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing seatbelt and seating position—passenger","content":"265 Wearing seatbelt and seating position—passenger\n16 years old or older\n(1) A passenger in or on a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary\nbut not parked, must comply with subsection (2) if the passenger is\n16 years old or older.\n(2) The passenger—\n(a) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with an approved\nseatbelt; and\n(b) must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger\n(whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt under section 267); and\n(c) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.\nExamples—seatbelts properly adjusted and fastened\n1 A lap and sash seatbelt is properly adjusted and fastened for a passenger if—\n(a) the seatbelt is secured in the buckle with the lap portion of the belt sitting\nlow and firmly over their hips; and\n(b) the sash portion of the belt is positioned firmly over their shoulder and\nnot under their arm furthest from the secured buckle or behind their\nback.\n2 A lap belt is properly adjusted and fastened for a passenger if the seatbelt is\nsecured in the buckle with the belt sitting low and firmly over their hips.\n(3) Subsection (2) (a) and (c) do not apply if the passenger is exempt from\nwearing a seatbelt under section 267.\n\nDivision 16.2 Wearing seatbelts and seating positions—drivers and passengers\n(4) Subsection (2) (b) does not apply to a passenger in a bus, public\nminibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck who has a child who is under\n1 year old seated on their lap if—\n(a) no suitable approved child restraint is fitted and available for\nuse; and\n(b) if the bus, minibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck has 2 or more rows\nof seats—the passenger is not in the front row of seats.\nmentioned in s (3) and s (4) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n","sortOrder":326},{"sectionNumber":"265A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driver to ensure passengers comply with seatbelt and","content":"265A Driver to ensure passengers comply with seatbelt and\nseating position requirements\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must ensure that a passenger in or on the vehicle complies\nwith the requirements that apply to the passenger under section 265\nor division 16.3.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to—\n(a) the driver of a bus, taxi or hire car if the passenger is 16 years\nold or older; or\nNote Section 266K also provides exceptions for passengers under\n16 years old in a public minibus, taxi or hire car.\n(b) the driver of a corrections vehicle, youth detention vehicle or\nsheriff’s vehicle if the passenger fails or refuses to wear a\nseatbelt or other restraint required under section 265 or\ndivision 16.3.\n\nDivision 16.3 Requirements for seatbelts and\nseating positions—passengers under\n16 years old\n","sortOrder":327},{"sectionNumber":"266","sectionType":"section","heading":"Definitions—div 16.3","content":"266 Definitions—div 16.3\n(1) For this division—\n(a) an approved child restraint is available in a motor vehicle for a\npassenger if it is fitted in the vehicle and is not occupied by\nsomeone else; and\n(b) an approved child restraint or approved seatbelt is suitable for a\npassenger if it is suitable for restraining, or to be worn by, the\npassenger.\n(2) Also, for this division, a child restraint that is properly fastened and\nadjusted is—\n(a) forward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, their head is\ncloser to the rear of the vehicle than their feet; and\n(b) rearward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, their feet are\ncloser to the rear of the vehicle than their head.\n","sortOrder":328},{"sectionNumber":"266C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing seatbelts—passengers under 6 months old","content":"266C Wearing seatbelts—passengers under 6 months old\n(1) If a passenger is under 6 months old, the passenger must be restrained\nin a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted rearward facing\napproved child restraint.\nbe restrained as if section 266D (1) applied to them.\n(3) Also, if the passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubsection (2) because of their height or weight, the passenger must\nbe restrained as if section 266E (1) applied to them.\n\n(4) Further, if the passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubsection (3) because of their height or weight, the passenger must\nbe restrained as if section 266I applied to them.\n(5) This section does not apply if the passenger is exempt from wearing\nmentioned in s (5) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n(6) This section applies subject to section 266F and section 266K.\n","sortOrder":329},{"sectionNumber":"266D","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing seatbelts—passengers 6 months old or older but","content":"266D Wearing seatbelts—passengers 6 months old or older but\nunder 4 years old\n(1) If a passenger is 6 months old or older, but under 4 years old, the\npassenger must be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and\nadjusted—\n(a) rearward facing approved child restraint; or\n(b) forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt\nharness.\nbe restrained as if section 266E (1) applied to the passenger.\n(3) Also, if the passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by\nsubsection (2) because of their height or weight, the passenger must\nbe restrained as if section 266I applied to the passenger.\n(4) This section does not apply if the passenger is exempt from wearing\nmentioned in s (4) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n(5) This section applies subject to section 266F and section 266K.\n\n","sortOrder":330},{"sectionNumber":"266E","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing seatbelts—passengers 4 years old or older but","content":"266E Wearing seatbelts—passengers 4 years old or older but\nunder 7 years old\n(1) If a passenger is 4 years old or older, but under 7 years old, the\npassenger must—\n(a) be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted\nforward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt\nharness; or\n(b) be placed on a properly positioned approved booster seat and be\nrestrained by either a suitable lap and sash type approved\nseatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened, or by a suitable\napproved child safety harness that is properly adjusted and\nfastened; or\n(c) if the passenger is seated in a seating position in a part of the\nvehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods—\n(i) be restrained by a suitable lap and sash type seatbelt that is\nproperly adjusted and fastened; or\n(ii) have the midsection of the passenger’s body restrained by\na suitable lap type seatbelt that is properly adjusted and\nfastened, and have the passenger’s upper body restrained\nby an approved child safety harness that is properly\nadjusted and fastened.\nbe restrained as if section 266I applied to them.\n(3) This section does not apply if the passenger is exempt from wearing\nmentioned in s (3) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n(4) This section applies subject to section 266F and section 266K.\n\napproved booster seat means a booster seat approved by the road\ntransport authority under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nManagement) Regulation 2017, section 73 (1) (b).\n","sortOrder":331},{"sectionNumber":"266F","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption for driver—passenger’s medical condition etc","content":"266F Exemption for driver—passenger’s medical condition etc\n(1) The driver does not have to ensure that section 266C, section 266D\nor section 266E is complied with for a passenger if—\nmedical practitioner believes the passenger should not be\nrestrained in any of the ways described in those sections because\nof a medical condition or disability that the passenger has; and\n(b) the passenger is properly restrained in a child restraint that has\nbeen designed for, and is suitable for use by, the passenger or a\nperson with the same medical condition or disability as the\npassenger; and\n(c) the driver is complying with any conditions stated in the medical\n(2) However, the driver is exempt under subsection (1) only if—\nor\n\n","sortOrder":332},{"sectionNumber":"266G","sectionType":"section","heading":"Seating position—passenger under 4 years old","content":"266G Seating position—passenger under 4 years old\n(1) If a passenger is under 4 years old, and the motor vehicle has 2 or\nmore rows of seats, the passenger must not be in the front row of seats.\n(2) The driver does not have to comply with subsection (1) if—\nmedical practitioner believes the passenger should be in the\nfront row of the vehicle because of a medical condition or\ndisability that the passenger has; and\n(b) the driver is complying with any conditions stated in the medical\n(3) However, the driver is exempt under subsection (2) only if—\nor\n","sortOrder":333},{"sectionNumber":"266H","sectionType":"section","heading":"Seating position—passenger 4 years old or older but","content":"266H Seating position—passenger 4 years old or older but\nunder 7 years old\n(1) A passenger who is 4 years old or older, but is under 7 years old, must\nnot be in the front row of a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of\nseats unless in the row or rows behind the front row—\n(a) all of the other seats are occupied by passengers who are also\nunder 7 years old; or\n\n(b) there is no empty seating position in which the passenger can sit\nin accordance with this section.\nThis subsection would permit a 6 year old to sit in the front row of a vehicle that\nhas 2 rows of seats if 2 occupied approved child restraints in the back row\nencroached on an empty seating position between them in a way that made it\nimpossible for another approved child restraint or booster seat to be placed in that\nposition.\n(2) The driver does not have to comply with subsection (1) if—\nmedical practitioner believes the passenger should be in the\nfront row of the vehicle because of a medical condition or\ndisability that the passenger has; and\n(b) the driver is complying with any conditions stated in the medical\n(3) However, the driver is exempt under subsection (2) only if—\nor\n\n","sortOrder":334},{"sectionNumber":"266I","sectionType":"section","heading":"Seating position—passenger 7 years old or older but","content":"266I Seating position—passenger 7 years old or older but\nunder 16 years old\n(1) If a passenger is 7 years old or older, but is under 16 years old—\n(a) the passenger must be restrained in a suitable approved child\nrestraint that is properly adjusted and fastened; or\n(b) the passenger—\n(i) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with a suitable\napproved seatbelt; and\n(ii) must not occupy the same seating position as another\npassenger (whether or not the other passenger is exempt\nfrom wearing a seatbelt under section 267); and\n(iii) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened.\n(2) This section does not apply if the passenger is exempt from wearing\n","sortOrder":335},{"sectionNumber":"266J","sectionType":"section","heading":"Passenger sitting in seating position fitted with particular","content":"266J Passenger sitting in seating position fitted with particular\nseatbelt\n(1) This section applies in relation to a passenger sitting in a seating\nposition that is fitted with a lap and sash type seatbelt.\n(2) It is sufficient compliance with section 266E (1) (b) or\nsection 266I (b) (iii) if, instead of using the sash part of the seatbelt,\nan approved child safety harness that is properly adjusted and\nfastened is used to restrain the upper body of the passenger.\n\n","sortOrder":336},{"sectionNumber":"266K","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemptions for driver—public minibus, taxi, hire car or","content":"266K Exemptions for driver—public minibus, taxi, hire car or\ntow truck\n(1) The driver of a public minibus, taxi or hire car is exempt from\nsection 266C, section 266D and section 266E in relation to a\npassenger if—\n(a) there is no suitable approved child restraint available in the\nminibus, taxi or hire car for the passenger; and\n(b) if the minibus, taxi or hire car has 2 or more rows of seats—the\npassenger is not in the front row of seats.\n(2) If the exemption set out in subsection (1) applies to a driver in relation\nto a passenger who is 1 year old or older, but under 7 years old, and\nwho is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under section 267, the\npassenger must wear an approved seatbelt that is properly adjusted\nand fastened to the best extent that is possible given the height and\nweight of the passenger.\n(3) The driver of a public minibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck is exempt\nfrom section 266C and section 266D in relation to a passenger who is\nunder 1 year old if—\n(a) there is no suitable approved child restraint available in the\nminibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck for the passenger; and\n(b) the minibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck has 2 or more rows of\nseats; and\n(c) the passenger is not in the front row of seats; and\n(d) the passenger is seated on the lap of another passenger who is at\nleast 16 years old; and\n(e) in the case of a tow truck—the tow truck is towing another\nvehicle, which the passenger was travelling in, because the other\nvehicle broke down or was involved in a crash.\n\nExemptions from wearing seatbelts Division 16.4\n","sortOrder":337},{"sectionNumber":"267","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemptions—wearing seatbelt","content":"267 Exemptions—wearing seatbelt\n(1A) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt\nif—\n(a) the seating position that the person occupies is not fitted with a\nseatbelt; and\n(b) there is no requirement for that seating position to be fitted with\na seatbelt; and\n(c) all passengers in the vehicle who are exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt are complying with subsection (8).\n(1B) Subsection (1A) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years old.\n(1C) To avoid doubt, subsection (1A) does not authorise a passenger to\nwhom section 266G (1) or section 266H (1) applies to occupy a seat\nin the front row of seats in a vehicle that has 2 or more rows of seats.\n(2) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a seatbelt\nif—\n(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection\nof goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required\nto get in or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent\nintervals; and\n(b) the vehicle is not travelling over 25km/h.\n(2A) Subsection (2) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years old.\n(3A) A person who is in, or on, a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a\nseatbelt if—\n(a) a medical certificate is in force for the person stating that a\nmedical practitioner believes the person should not wear a\nseatbelt because of a medical condition or disability that the\nperson has; and\n\n(b) the person is complying with any conditions stated in the\nmedical certificate.\n(4) However, the person is exempt under subsection (3A) only if—\nperson detected by a seatbelt detection system—a copy of the\nor\n(b) the person immediately produces the medical certificate when\nan authorised person or police officer asks to see the certificate.\n(5) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if—\n(a) the person is a passenger in or on a police or emergency vehicle;\nand\n(b) either—\n(i) if the vehicle has 2 or more rows of seats—the person is\nnot in the front row of seats or there is not a seating position\navailable for the person in another row of seats; or\n(ii) if the vehicle is a police vehicle and has a caged, or other\nsecured, area designed for the carriage of passengers—the\nperson occupies a seating position in that area.\n(6) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if the person is providing\nor receiving medical treatment of an urgent and necessary nature\nwhile in or on a vehicle.\n\n(7) If a truck or bus has a sleeper compartment, a two-up driver of the\ntruck or bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt while the driver\noccupies the sleeper compartment for rest purposes.\n(8) If a vehicle does not have seatbelts or approved child restraints fitted\nto all its passenger seating positions, a passenger who is exempt from\nwearing a seatbelt under this section must not occupy a seating\nposition that is fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child restraint if\nthe result would be that a passenger who is not exempt from wearing\na seatbelt under this section would be required to occupy a seating\nposition that is not fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child restraint.\n(9) In this section:\ntwo-up driver means a person accompanying the driver of a truck or\nbus on a journey, or part of a journey, who has been, is or will be\nsharing the task of driving the truck or bus during the journey.\nmentioned in this section (see Criminal Code, s 58).\nDivision 16.5 Other rules for people travelling in or\non vehicles\n","sortOrder":338},{"sectionNumber":"268","sectionType":"section","heading":"How people must travel in or on motor vehicle","content":"268 How people must travel in or on motor vehicle\n(1) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is not\na part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or goods.\n(2) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that is a\npart designed primarily for the carriage of goods unless—\n(a) the part is enclosed; and\n(b) the person occupies a seating position that is suitable for the size\nand weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.\n\n(3) A person must not travel in or on a motor vehicle with any part of the\nperson’s body outside a window or door of the vehicle, unless the\nperson is the driver of the vehicle and is giving a hand signal—\n(a) for changing direction to the right in accordance with section 50\n(How to give right change of direction signal by giving hand\nsignal); or\n(b) for stopping or slowing in accordance with section 55 (How to\ngive stop signal by giving hand signal).\n(4) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus) must not drive with a\npassenger if any part of the passenger’s body is outside a window or\ndoor of the vehicle.\n(4A) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or\non a part of the vehicle that is not a part designed primarily for the\ncarriage of passengers or goods.\n(4B) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in or\non a part of the vehicle that is a part designed primarily for the\ncarriage of goods unless—\n(a) the part is enclosed; or\n(b) the person occupies a seating position that is suitable for the size\nand weight of the person and that is fitted with a seatbelt.\n(5) This section does not apply to a person who is—\n(a) in or on a police or emergency vehicle; or\n(b) on a motorbike; or\n\n(c) engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or\nin the collection of waste or garbage, in or on a motor vehicle\nthat is not travelling over 25km/h.\nenclosed, for a part of a vehicle, means enclosed by the structure of\n","sortOrder":339},{"sectionNumber":"269","sectionType":"section","heading":"Opening door and getting out of vehicle etc","content":"269 Opening door and getting out of vehicle etc\n(1) A person must not get off, or out of, a moving vehicle, unless the\nperson is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods,\nor in the collection of waste or garbage, and the vehicle is not\ntravelling over 5km/h.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to a person getting off a bicycle or\nanimal.\n(3) A person must not cause a hazard to any person or vehicle by opening\na door of a vehicle, leaving a door of a vehicle open, or getting off, or\nout of, a vehicle.\n(4) The driver of a bus must not drive the bus unless the doors of the bus\nare closed while the bus is moving.\n","sortOrder":340},{"sectionNumber":"270","sectionType":"section","heading":"Wearing motorbike helmet","content":"270 Wearing motorbike helmet\n(1) The rider of a motorbike that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must—\n(a) wear an approved motorbike helmet securely fitted and fastened\non the rider’s head; and\n\n(b) not ride with a passenger unless the passenger complies with\nsubsection (2).\n(1A) However, the rider of a motorbike that is moving, or is stationary but\nnot parked, is exempt from wearing an approved motorbike helmet\nif—\n(a) the motorbike’s engine is not on; and\n(b) the rider is pushing the motorbike; and\n(c) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider not to wear the\nhelmet.\n(2) A passenger on a motorbike that is moving, or is stationary but not\nparked, must wear an approved motorbike helmet securely fitted and\nfastened on the passenger’s head.\napproved motorbike helmet means a helmet—\n(a) made in compliance with a relevant standard for the helmet; and\n(b) that has an identifying mark certifying compliance with the\nstandard; and\n(c) that is in good repair and proper working order and condition.\nExamples—par (c)\n1 a helmet that is scratched or marked but the scratch or mark has not—\n• penetrated the helmet’s outer shell; or\n• damaged the helmet’s retention system; or\n• damaged the helmet’s inner lining\n2 a helmet that is damaged to a degree that might reasonably be expected from\nthe normal use of the helmet\n\ndisapplied provision, of a standard, means a provision (if any) of the\nstandard—\n(a) relating to external projections, but only to allow attachment of\ncommunication and recording equipment using frangible\nmountings; or\n(b) relating to flip down internal visors, but only for helmets with\nan external visor that meets the standard; or\n(c) requiring the user of a helmet to carry a brochure or label\ndetailing use and care instructions for the helmet.\npassenger, of a motorbike, includes a person on a passenger seat of\nthe motorbike (including the pillion seat), or in a sidecar.\nrelevant standard, for a helmet, means—\n(a) if the helmet is manufactured in Australia—either of the\nfollowing, whether in force at the time the helmet is\nmanufactured or at any later time:\n(i) AS 1698-1988;\n(ii) AS/NZS 1698; or\n(b) if the helmet is imported into Australia—either of the following,\nwhether in force at the time the helmet is imported or at any later\ntime:\n(i) AS 1698-1988;\n(ii) AS/NZS 1698; or\n(c) in any case—the United Nations Economic Commission for\nEurope standard 22.05 (or any later version of standard 22),\nwhether in force at the time the helmet is manufactured or at any\nlater time;\nbut does not include a disapplied provision of a standard mentioned\nin paragraph (a), (b) or (c).\n\n(4) The Legislation Act, section 47 (5) and (6) do not apply to a relevant\nstandard.\nNote A relevant standard does not need to be notified under the Legislation Act\nbecause s 47 (5) and (6) do not apply (see Legislation Act, s 47 (7)).\n","sortOrder":341},{"sectionNumber":"271","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding on motorbike","content":"271 Riding on motorbike\n(1) Unless subsection (1A) applies, the rider of a motorbike that is\nmoving (other than a rider who is walking beside and pushing a\nmotorbike), or the rider of a motorbike that is stationary but not\nparked, must—\n(a) sit astride the rider’s seat facing forwards; and\n(b) if the motorbike is moving—\n(i) keep at least 1 hand on the handlebars; and\n(ii) keep both feet on the footrests or footboard designed for\nthe rider’s use.\n(1A) The rider of a motorbike that is moving may—\n(a) stand on the motorbike’s footrests or footboard designed for the\nrider’s use if—\n(i) the rider has both feet on the footrests or footboard; and\n(ii) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider to do so; or\n(b) remove a foot from the footrest or footboard designed for the\nrider’s use if—\n(i) the rider is sitting on the rider’s seat; and\n(ii) at least 1 foot is on a footrest or footboard; and\n(iii) in the circumstances, it is safe for the rider to do so.\n\n(2) A passenger on a motorbike (except a passenger in a sidecar or on a\nseat designed for a passenger, other than a pillion seat) that is moving,\nor is stationary but not parked, must—\n(a) sit astride the pillion seat facing forwards; and\n(b) keep both feet on the footrests designed for use by a pillion\npassenger on the motorbike.\n(3) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with a passenger (except a\npassenger in a sidecar or other seat designed for a passenger) unless\nthe passenger complies with subsection (2).\n(4) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with more than 1 passenger\n(excluding any passenger in a sidecar or other seat designed for a\npassenger, other than a pillion seat).\n(5) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with more passengers in a\nsidecar, or on a seat designed for a passenger, than the sidecar, or seat,\nis designed to carry.\n(5A) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with a passenger who is under\n8 years old unless the passenger is in a sidecar.\n(5B) A passenger must not ride in a sidecar of a motorbike unless the\npassenger is seated safely.\n(5C) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with a passenger in a sidecar\nunless the passenger complies with subsection (5B).\n\n","sortOrder":342},{"sectionNumber":"272","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interfering with driver’s control of vehicle etc","content":"272 Interfering with driver’s control of vehicle etc\nA passenger in or on a vehicle must not—\n(a) interfere with the driver’s control of the vehicle; or\n(b) obstruct the driver’s view of the road or traffic.\n\nTrams Division 17.1\n","sortOrder":343},{"sectionNumber":"Part 17","sectionType":"part","heading":"Additional rules for drivers of","content":"Part 17 Additional rules for drivers of\ntrams, tram recovery vehicles\nand public buses\n","sortOrder":344},{"sectionNumber":"273","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 17.1—tram recovery vehicle or public","content":"273 Application—div 17.1—tram recovery vehicle or public\nbus travelling along tram tracks\n(1) This division applies to the driver of a tram recovery vehicle as if a\nreference in the division to a tram included a reference to a tram\nrecovery vehicle.\n(2) This division applies to the driver of a public bus travelling along\ntram tracks as if a reference in the division to a tram included a\nreference to a public bus travelling along tram tracks.\n","sortOrder":345},{"sectionNumber":"274","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for red T light","content":"274 Stopping for red T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a red T light\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the T lights—as near as\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the T lights—as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only T lights.\n\n","sortOrder":346},{"sectionNumber":"275","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for yellow T light","content":"275 Stopping for yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a yellow\nT light must stop—\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the T lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as practicable\nto, but before reaching, the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the T lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the T lights—as near as practicable\nto, but before reaching, the nearest or only T lights.\n","sortOrder":347},{"sectionNumber":"276","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exception to stopping for red or yellow T light","content":"276 Exception to stopping for red or yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram approaching or at T lights showing a red or\nyellow T light does not have to stop if a white traffic arrow is also\nshowing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the\narrow.\n","sortOrder":348},{"sectionNumber":"277","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow T light","content":"277 Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow T light\nThe driver of a tram who stops for T lights showing a red or yellow\nT light must not proceed until—\n(a) a white T light is showing; or\n(b) no T light is showing and traffic lights at or near the T lights are\nshowing a green traffic light.\n","sortOrder":349},{"sectionNumber":"278","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when red traffic light and white T light or","content":"278 Proceeding when red traffic light and white T light or\nwhite traffic arrow showing\n(1) The driver of a tram approaching or at a white T light at or near traffic\nlights showing a red traffic light may proceed straight ahead, or turn,\ndespite the red traffic light.\n\nTrams Division 17.1\n(2) The driver of a tram approaching or at a white traffic arrow at or near\ntraffic lights showing a red traffic light may turn in the direction\nindicated by the arrow, despite the red traffic light.\n","sortOrder":350},{"sectionNumber":"279","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when white T light or white traffic arrow no","content":"279 Proceeding when white T light or white traffic arrow no\nlonger showing\n(a) the driver of a tram at an intersection with T lights showing a\nwhite T light who has stopped after the stop line, or nearest or\nonly T lights, at the intersection; or\n(b) the driver of a tram at an intersection with traffic arrows showing\na white traffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by\nthe arrow and has stopped after the stop line, or nearest or only\ntraffic arrows, at the intersection.\nThe driver of a tram may stop after the stop line at an intersection with T lights\nshowing a white T light, and not proceed through the intersection, because the\nintersection, or a road beyond the intersection, is blocked by traffic.\n(2) If the T lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has not entered the\nintersection, the driver must not proceed until—\n(a) a white T light is showing; or\n(b) there is no T light showing, and traffic lights at or near the\nT lights are showing a green traffic light; or\n(c) if the driver is turning at the intersection—a white traffic arrow\nis showing that indicates the direction in which the driver is\nturning.\n\n(3) If the T lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has entered the intersection,\nthe driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do so\n","sortOrder":351},{"sectionNumber":"280","sectionType":"section","heading":"Application—div 17.2","content":"280 Application—div 17.2\n(1) This division applies to the driver of a public bus who is driving in a\nbus lane.\n(2) This division applies to the driver of a vehicle other than a public bus,\nin the same way as it applies to the driver of a public bus, if—\n(a) the vehicle is 1 of the following:\n(i) taxi;\n(ii) hire car;\n(iii) demand responsive service vehicle;\n(iv) motorbike; and\n(b) the driver is driving in a bus lane to which B lights apply; and\n(c) the driver is permitted to drive in the lane under this regulation.\n","sortOrder":352},{"sectionNumber":"281","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for red B light","content":"281 Stopping for red B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a red\nB light must stop—\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the B lights—as near as\n\nPublic buses Division 17.2\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the B lights—as near as\npracticable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only B lights.\n","sortOrder":353},{"sectionNumber":"282","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping for yellow B light","content":"282 Stopping for yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a yellow\nB light must stop—\n(a) if there is a stop line at or near the B lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as practicable\nto, but before reaching, the stop line; or\n(b) if there is no stop line at or near the B lights and the driver can\nstop safely before reaching the B lights—as near as practicable\nto, but before reaching, the nearest or only B lights.\n","sortOrder":354},{"sectionNumber":"283","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exception to stopping for red or yellow B light","content":"283 Exception to stopping for red or yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus approaching or at B lights showing a red\nor yellow B light does not have to stop if a white traffic arrow is also\nshowing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the\narrow.\n","sortOrder":355},{"sectionNumber":"284","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow B light","content":"284 Proceeding after stopping for red or yellow B light\nThe driver of a public bus who stops for B lights showing a red or\nyellow B light must not proceed until—\n(a) a white B light is showing; or\n(b) no B light is showing and traffic lights at or near the B lights are\nshowing a green traffic light.\n\n","sortOrder":356},{"sectionNumber":"285","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when red traffic light and white B light or","content":"285 Proceeding when red traffic light and white B light or\nwhite traffic arrow showing\n(1) The driver of a public bus approaching or at a white B light at or near\ntraffic lights showing a red traffic light may proceed straight ahead,\nor turn, despite the red traffic light.\n(2) The driver of a public bus approaching or at a white traffic arrow at\nor near traffic lights showing a red traffic light may turn in the\ndirection indicated by the arrow, despite the red traffic light.\n","sortOrder":357},{"sectionNumber":"286","sectionType":"section","heading":"Proceeding when white B light or white traffic arrow no","content":"286 Proceeding when white B light or white traffic arrow no\nlonger showing\n(a) the driver of a public bus at an intersection with B lights showing\na white B light who has stopped after the stop line, or nearest or\nonly B lights, at the intersection; or\n(b) the driver of a public bus at an intersection with traffic arrows\nshowing a white traffic arrow who is turning in the direction\nindicated by the arrow and has stopped after the stop line, or\nnearest or only traffic arrows, at the intersection.\nThe driver of a public bus may stop after the stop line at an intersection with B lights\nshowing a white B light, and not proceed through the intersection, because the\nintersection, or a road beyond the intersection, is blocked by traffic.\n(2) If the B lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has not entered the\nintersection, the driver must not proceed until—\n(a) a white B light is showing; or\n(b) there is no B light showing, and traffic lights at or near the\nB lights are showing a green traffic light; or\n\nPublic buses Division 17.2\n(c) if the driver is turning at the intersection—a white traffic arrow\nis showing that indicates the direction in which the driver is\nturning.\n(3) If the B lights or traffic arrows change to yellow or red, or turn off,\nwhile the driver is stopped and the driver has entered the intersection,\nthe driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver can do so\n\n","sortOrder":358},{"sectionNumber":"287","sectionType":"section","heading":"Duties of driver involved in crash","content":"287 Duties of driver involved in crash\n(1) A driver involved in a crash must comply with this section.\n(2) The driver must stop at the scene of the crash and give the driver’s\nrequired particulars, within the required time and, if practicable, at\nthe scene of the crash, to—\n(a) any other driver (or that driver’s representative) involved in the\ncrash; and\n(b) any other person involved in the crash who is injured, or the\nperson’s representative; and\n(c) the owner of any property (including any vehicle) damaged in\nthe crash (or the owner’s representative), unless, in the case of\ndamage to a vehicle, the particulars are given to the driver of the\nvehicle (or the driver’s representative).\n(3) The driver must also, within the required time—\n(a) give the driver’s required particulars to a police officer; or\n(b) supply the driver’s required particulars to the crash reporting\nwebsite, in accordance with any requirements of the website.\ncrash reporting website means the crash reporting website operated\nby the Territory for the purpose of receiving information about\ncrashes.\nNote The crash reporting website can be accessed through www.act.gov.au.\n\nrequired particulars, for a driver involved in a crash—\n(a) means—\n(i) the driver’s name and 1 or more of the following:\n(A) the driver’s address;\n(B) the driver’s phone number;\n(C) the driver’s email address; and\n(ii) if the driver is not the owner of the vehicle—the owner’s\nname and 1 or more of the following:\n(A) the owner’s address;\n(B) the owner’s phone number;\n(C) the owner’s email address; and\n(iii) the vehicle’s registration number (if any); and\n(iv) any other information necessary to identify the vehicle; and\n(b) for subsection (3)—includes an explanation of the\ncircumstances of the crash.\nrequired time, for a driver involved in a crash, means as soon as\npossible but, except in exceptional circumstances, within 24 hours\nafter the crash.\n","sortOrder":359},{"sectionNumber":"288","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on path","content":"288 Driving on path\n(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive on a path unless\nsubsection (2) or (3) applies to the driver.\n(2) A driver may drive on a path if the driver is—\n(a) driving on a part of the path indicated by information on or with\na traffic control device as a part where vehicles may drive; or\n\n(b) driving on the path to enter or leave, by the shortest practicable\nroute, a road related area or adjacent land and there is not a part\nof the path indicated by information on or with a traffic control\ndevice as a part where vehicles may drive.\n(3) A driver may drive a motorised wheelchair on a path if—\n(a) the unladen mass of the wheelchair is not over 150kg; and\n(b) the wheelchair is not travelling over 10km/h; and\n(c) because of the driver’s physical condition, the driver has a\nreasonable need to use a wheelchair.\n(4) A driver on a path (except the rider of a bicycle, or a driver driving\non the path to enter a road from a road related area or adjacent land,\nor to enter a road related area or adjacent land from a road) must give\nway to all other road users, and to animals, on the path.\n(5) This section does not apply to the rider of an animal riding the animal\non a footpath.\n(5A) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike (with or\nwithout a trailer attached) that is a postal vehicle if—\n(a) the rider gives way to pedestrians and other vehicles and takes\nreasonable precautions to avoid collision or danger or\nobstruction to any person or thing on or next to the path; and\n(b) the rider does not exceed 10km/h; and\n(c) the motorbike has an engine capacity not exceeding 125cc.\npath means a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\n\n","sortOrder":360},{"sectionNumber":"289","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on nature strip","content":"289 Driving on nature strip\n(1) A driver must not drive on a nature strip adjacent to a length of road\nin a built-up area, unless—\n(a) the driver is—\n(i) entering or leaving, by the shortest practicable route, an\narea on the nature strip indicated by information on or with\na traffic control device as an area where vehicles may\ndrive; or\n(ii) driving on a part of the nature strip indicated by\ninformation on or with a traffic control device as a part\nwhere vehicles may drive; or\n(iii) driving on the nature strip to enter or leave, by the shortest\npracticable route, a road related area or adjacent land and\nthere is not a part of the nature strip indicated by\ninformation on or with a traffic control device as a part\nwhere vehicles may drive; or\n(iv) riding a bicycle or animal; or\n(v) driving a ride-on lawnmower that is cutting grass on the\nnature strip; or\n(vi) driving a motorised wheelchair; or\n(b) the vehicle is—\n(i) a motor vehicle (other than a ride-on lawnmower) that is\nbuilt and used solely to cut grass or a purpose incidental to\ncutting grass; or\n(ii) a motor vehicle that is designed for cleaning footpaths, is\nbeing driven on the nature strip to clean a footpath and is\ndisplaying an amber flashing light; or\n(iii) being used to transport goods or materials in relation to the\nconstruction or maintenance of roads for the Territory; or\n\n(iv) is being used by a person in the course of the person’s\nduties as someone authorised under this regulation to use a\ntraffic offence detection device.\n(2) A driver driving on a nature strip (except the rider of an animal, or a\ndriver driving on the nature strip to enter a road from a road related\narea or adjacent land, or to enter a road related area or adjacent land\nfrom a road) must give way to all other road users, and to animals, on\nthe nature strip.\n(3) This section does not apply to the rider of a motorbike (with or\nwithout a trailer attached) that is a postal vehicle if—\n(a) the rider gives way to pedestrians and other vehicles and takes\nreasonable precautions to avoid collision or danger or\nobstruction to any person or thing on or next to the nature strip;\nand\n(b) the rider does not exceed 10km/h; and\n(c) the motorbike has an engine capacity not exceeding 125cc.\n","sortOrder":361},{"sectionNumber":"290","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on traffic island","content":"290 Driving on traffic island\nA driver must not drive on a traffic island (except the central traffic\nisland in a roundabout), unless the traffic island is designed to allow\nvehicles to be driven on it.\n\n","sortOrder":362},{"sectionNumber":"291","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making unnecessary noise or smoke","content":"291 Making unnecessary noise or smoke\nA person must not start a vehicle, or drive a vehicle, in a way that\nmakes unnecessary noise or smoke.\ncausing the wheels of the driver’s vehicle to lose traction and spin on the road\nsurface may make unnecessary noise or smoke\n","sortOrder":363},{"sectionNumber":"291A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Making unnecessary engine noise","content":"291A Making unnecessary engine noise\nThe driver of a motor vehicle on a road must not make unnecessary\nnoise by turning on, running or failing to turn off the vehicle’s engine.\n","sortOrder":364},{"sectionNumber":"292","sectionType":"section","heading":"Insecure or overhanging load","content":"292 Insecure or overhanging load\n(1) A driver must not drive or tow a vehicle if the vehicle is carrying a\nload that—\n(a) is not properly secured to the vehicle; or\n(b) is placed on the vehicle in a way that causes the vehicle to be\nunstable; or\n(c) projects from the vehicle in a way that is likely to injure a\nperson, obstruct the path of other drivers or pedestrians, or\ndamage a vehicle or anything else (for example, the road\nsurface).\n(2) This section is not limited by section 292A.\n\n","sortOrder":365},{"sectionNumber":"292A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Restricting movement of load","content":"292A Restricting movement of load\n(1) A driver must not drive or tow a vehicle carrying a load unless—\n(a) the load is restrained so that it cannot move relative to the\nvehicle other than as permitted under subsection (2); and\n(b) the load is restrained by a system that, at a minimum, prevents\nthe load from moving in the circumstances stated in\nsubsection (3).\n(2) A load may be permitted to move relative to the vehicle if—\n(a) the stability and weight distribution of the vehicle cannot be\nadversely affected by the movement; and\n(b) the load cannot become dislodged from the vehicle.\nExamples—loads permitted to move\n1 loads contained, held, protected or enclosed within the sides or enclosure of a\npart of the vehicle and restrained from moving horizontally\n2 loads consisting of very light objects, or loose bulk loads, that are contained,\nheld, protected or enclosed within the sides or enclosure of a part of the vehicle\n3 loads consisting of bulk liquids that are contained, held, protected or enclosed\nwithin the sides or enclosure of a part of the vehicle\n(3) For subsection (1) (b), the circumstances are that the vehicle is subject\nto—\n(a) each of the following separately:\n(i) 0.8g deceleration in a forwards direction;\n(ii) 0.5g deceleration in a backwards direction;\n(iii) 0.5g acceleration in a lateral direction; or\n(b) if friction is relied on to comply with paragraph (a)—0.2g\nacceleration in a vertical direction relative to the load.\n\ng means gravitational acceleration or 9.81m/s2.\n","sortOrder":366},{"sectionNumber":"293","sectionType":"section","heading":"Removing fallen etc thing from road","content":"293 Removing fallen etc thing from road\n(1) This section applies to a driver if—\n(a) something falls onto the road from the driver’s vehicle, or the\ndriver, or a passenger in or on the driver’s vehicle, puts\nsomething on the road; and\n(b) there is a possibility that the thing, if left on the road, may injure\na person, obstruct the path of other drivers or pedestrians, or\ndamage a vehicle or anything else (for example, the road\nsurface).\n(2) The driver must remove the thing, or take action to have the thing\nremoved, from the road as soon as the driver can do so safely.\nExamples—things\n• fallen loads\n• oil or grease\n• debris from an accident\n• wheel chocks\nput, something onto the road, includes—\n(a) throw, drop or propel the thing onto the road; and\n(b) otherwise cause the thing to be on the road.\n\n","sortOrder":367},{"sectionNumber":"294","sectionType":"section","heading":"Keeping control of vehicle being towed","content":"294 Keeping control of vehicle being towed\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle must not tow another motor vehicle\n(a) either—\n(i) the driver can control the movement of the towed vehicle;\nor\n(ii) the brakes and steering of the towed vehicle are in working\norder and a person who is licensed to drive the towed\nvehicle is sitting in the driver’s seat of the towed vehicle,\nand is in control of its brakes and steering; and\n(b) it is safe to tow the towed vehicle.\n(2) The driver of a motor vehicle must not tow a trailer unless—\n(a) the driver can control the movement of the trailer; and\n(b) it is safe to tow the trailer.\n","sortOrder":368},{"sectionNumber":"295","sectionType":"section","heading":"Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with towline","content":"295 Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with towline\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle towing another vehicle using a chain,\nrope, fabric, strap or wire (the towline) must comply with this section.\n(2) If neither of the vehicles is a motorbike, the driver must keep a\ndistance of not over 4m between the vehicles.\n(3) If at least 1 of the vehicles is a motorbike, the driver must keep a\ndistance of not over 2.5m between the vehicles.\n\n(4) If the towline is longer than 2m, the driver must attach a white or\nbrightly coloured flag, piece of cloth or other similar material\n(the warning material) to the towline in accordance with\nsubsection (5).\n(5) The warning material must—\n(a) be substantially square or rectangular with 2 adjacent sides at\nleast 300mm long; and\n(b) be attached midway along the towline; and\n(c) be visible for at least 100m from either side of the warning\nmaterial.\n","sortOrder":369},{"sectionNumber":"295A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Number of vehicles that may be drawn","content":"295A Number of vehicles that may be drawn\n(1) The driver of an articulated vehicle must not tow any other vehicle on\na road.\n(2) The driver of a motor vehicle must not tow more than 1 other vehicle\non a road.\n(3) The road transport authority may exempt a vehicle or person from\nsubsection (1) or (2).\n(4) Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to a tow truck that is towing\nan articulated vehicle (other than a B-double or road train) if—\n(a) the articulated vehicle has broken down on a road and it is\nnecessary for it to be towed away; or\n(b) the articulated vehicle has been involved in a crash on a road\nand it is necessary for it to be towed away.\nmentioned in s (4), (5) and (6) (see Criminal Code, s 58).\n\n(5) Subsection (2) does not apply to a motor vehicle that is towing\nanother vehicle using a lift and tow trailer if—\n(a) the other vehicle is partly supported by the lift and tow trailer;\nand\n(b) the vehicle is not towed at faster than 60km/h; and\n(c) the combined weight of the towed vehicle and the lift and tow\ntrailer is not more than the unladen weight of the towing vehicle.\n(6) Subsection (2) does not apply to—\n(a) a tractor-harvester-cutting head trailer combination; or\n(b) a tractor with multiple implements attached, if the implements\nare normally used as a single unit when performing agricultural\noperations; or\n(c) a tractor and implement combination towing a fuel trailer or\nlaser tower; or\n(d) an articulated low-loader consisting of a prime mover towing a\nconverter dolly and a semitrailer; or\n(e) a B-double, dog trailer or road train; or\n(f) a light rail vehicle.\narticulated vehicle means a motor vehicle, other than a light rail\nvehicle, with—\n(a) 2 rigid sections, each of which has wheels; and\n(b) the rear section pivoted on, and part of the rear section (other\nthan a pole, drawbar or similar device, or an accessory of the\nmotor vehicle) superimposed on, the front section.\n\nB-double—see the Heavy Vehicle National Law (ACT), section 5.\nconverter dolly—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\ndog trailer—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nimplement—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nlift and tow trailer means a trailer consisting of an axle group and a\ndrawbar designed to support 1 axle group of a vehicle under tow.\nprime mover—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\n","sortOrder":370},{"sectionNumber":"295B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Towing by vehicle under 4.5t","content":"295B Towing by vehicle under 4.5t\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle (the towing vehicle) must not tow\nanother vehicle (the towed vehicle) on a road if the laden weight of\nthe towed vehicle is more than—\n(a) the capacity of the towing attachment fitted to the towing\n(b) the maximum laden weight for the towed vehicle.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the driver if the towing vehicle has\na GVM over 4.5t.\n(3) The road transport authority may exempt a vehicle or person from\nsubsection (1).\n\nmaximum laden weight, for the towed vehicle, means—\n(a) the maximum laden weight for a towed vehicle specified by the\nmanufacturer of the towing vehicle in relation to the towing\n(b) if there is no such specification by the manufacturer, the\nmanufacturer of the vehicle cannot be identified or the\nspecification is not appropriate because the towing vehicle has\nbeen modified—\n(i) 1.5 times the unladen weight of the towing vehicle if the\ntowed vehicle is fitted with a braking system that is\nworking properly; or\n(ii) the unladen weight of the towing vehicle in any other case.\ntowing attachment means a device fitted to a vehicle to which the\ndrawbar of a trailer may be attached.\n","sortOrder":371},{"sectionNumber":"296","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving vehicle in reverse","content":"296 Driving vehicle in reverse\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not reverse the vehicle unless the driver\ncan do so safely.\n(2) The driver of a vehicle must not reverse the vehicle further than is\nreasonable in the circumstances.\n\n","sortOrder":372},{"sectionNumber":"296A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving without due care etc","content":"296A Driving without due care etc\nA driver must not drive a vehicle without—\n(a) due care and attention; or\n(b) reasonable consideration for other road users.\n","sortOrder":373},{"sectionNumber":"297","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driver to have proper control of vehicle etc","content":"297 Driver to have proper control of vehicle etc\n(1) A driver must not drive a vehicle unless the driver has proper control\nof the vehicle.\n(1A) A person must not drive a vehicle if a person or an animal is in the\ndriver’s lap.\n(2) A driver must not drive a motor vehicle unless the driver has a clear\nview of the road, and traffic, ahead, behind and to each side of the\ndriver.\n(3) The rider of a motorbike must not ride with an animal on the\nmotorbike between the rider and the handlebars, or in another position\nthat interferes with the rider’s ability to control the motorbike or to\nhave a clear view of the road.\n(4) Subsection (3) does not apply to the rider of a motorbike who rides\nwith an animal between the rider and the handle bars for a distance of\nnot more than 500m on a road for the purpose of a farming activity\nthat the rider is carrying out.\n\n","sortOrder":374},{"sectionNumber":"298","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving with person in trailer","content":"298 Driving with person in trailer\n(1) A driver must not drive a motor vehicle towing a trailer with a person\nin or on the trailer, unless—\n(a) the trailer is being towed by a police vehicle or an emergency\n(b) the carriage of passengers is permitted in part of the trailer and\nanyone in the trailer is in that part; or\n(c) anyone who is in the trailer is engaged in door-to-door delivery\nor collection of goods, or the collection of waste or garbage, and\nthe trailer is not travelling faster than 25km/h; or\n(d) in all the circumstances, there is no reasonable danger to anyone\nin the trailer falling from the trailer or being injured.\n(2) For subsection (1) (b), the carriage of passengers is permitted in part\nof a trailer if the trailer is designed for—\n(a) the carriage of passengers; or\n(b) the carriage of goods, but is enclosed.\nenclosed, for a part of a trailer, means enclosed by—\n(a) the structure of the trailer; or\n(b) a canopy, cage or other device fitted to the trailer that is of a kind\napproved by the road transport authority under the Road\nsection 73 (1) (f) (Approval etc by road transport authority).\nin includes on.\n\n","sortOrder":375},{"sectionNumber":"299","sectionType":"section","heading":"Television receiver or visual display unit in motor vehicle","content":"299 Television receiver or visual display unit in motor vehicle\n(1) A driver must not drive a vehicle that has a television receiver or\nvisual display unit in or on the vehicle operating while the vehicle is\nmoving, or is stationary but not parked, if any part of the image on\nthe screen—\n(a) is visible to the driver from the normal driving position; or\n(b) is likely to distract another driver.\n(2) This section does not apply to the driver if—\n(a) the driver is driving a bus and the visual display unit is, or\ndisplays, a destination sign or other bus sign; or\n(ba) the visual display unit is a mobile data terminal fitted to a police\nvehicle or an emergency vehicle; or\n(bb) the visual display unit is part of a mobile device that is being\nused as a driver’s aid as permitted by section 300 (2) (b) or (c);\nor\n(c) the visual display unit is, or is part of, a driver’s aid that is—\n(i) an integrated part of the vehicle design; or\n(ii) secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while being\nused.\nExample—par (bb)\nrideshare driver’s mobile device showing passenger information\nExample—par (c)\ntaxi driver’s visual display unit showing passenger information\n• closed-circuit television security cameras\n\n• ticket-issuing machines\n• vehicle monitoring devices\n(3) For subsection (2) (c) (ii), a visual display unit is secured in a\nmounting affixed to the vehicle only if—\n(a) the mounting is commercially designed and manufactured for\nthat purpose; and\n(b) the unit is secured in the mounting, and the mounting is affixed\nto the vehicle, in the manner intended by the manufacturer.\n","sortOrder":376},{"sectionNumber":"300","sectionType":"section","heading":"Use of mobile device","content":"300 Use of mobile device\n(1) The driver of a vehicle must not use a mobile device while the vehicle\nis moving, or is stationary but not parked.\n(2) Subsection (1) does not apply to the driver of a vehicle who is not the\nholder of a learner licence or provisional licence if—\n(a) the mobile device is being used to make or receive an audio call\nand—\n(i) the device is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle\nwhile being used; or\n(ii) the device—\n(A) is not being held by the driver; and\n(B) does not require the driver, at any time while using it,\nto press anything on the body of the device or to\notherwise manipulate any part of the body of the\ndevice; or\n(b) the mobile device—\n(i) is being used as a driver’s aid; and\n\n(ii) is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while being\nused; and\n(iii) does not require the driver, at any time while using it, to\npress anything on the body of the device or otherwise\n(c) the driver is driving a taxi, rideshare vehicle or hire car and the\nmobile device—\n(i) is being used as a driver’s aid in relation to the transport of\npassengers; and\n(ii) is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while the\ndevice is being used; or\n(d) the mobile device is being used to stream, play or listen to music\nor audio files and the device—\n(i) is not being held by the driver; and\n(ii) does not require the driver, at any time while using it, to\npress anything on the body of the device or otherwise\n(e) the vehicle is an emergency vehicle or a police vehicle.\n• closed-circuit television security cameras\n• ticket-issuing machines\n• vehicle monitoring devices\n\n(3) Subsection (1) does not apply to the driver of a vehicle who holds a\nlearner licence or provisional licence if—\n(a) the mobile device is being used as a driver’s aid and the\ndevice—\n(i) is secured in a mounting affixed to the vehicle while being\nused; and\n(ii) does not require the driver, at any time while using it, to—\n(A) press anything on the body of the device or otherwise\n(B) use the driver’s voice; or\n(b) the mobile device is being used to stream, play or listen to music\nor audio files and the device—\n(i) is not being held by the driver; and\n(ii) does not require the driver, at any time while using it, to—\n(A) press anything on the body of the device or otherwise\n(B) use the driver’s voice; or\n(c) the vehicle is an emergency vehicle or a police vehicle.\nExamples—use of driver’s voice\n1 wireless technology to make or receive a phone call\n2 virtual assistant\n(4) For this section, a mobile device is secured in a mounting affixed to\nthe vehicle only if—\n(a) the mounting is commercially designed and manufactured for\nthat purpose; and\n(b) the body of the mobile device is secured in the mounting, and\nthe mounting is affixed to the vehicle, in the manner intended by\nthe manufacturer.\n\n(5) For this section, a driver does not use a mobile device to receive a text\nmessage, video message, email or similar communication if—\n(a) the communication is received automatically by a mobile\ndevice; and\n(b) on and after receipt, the communication itself (rather than any\nindication that the communication has been received) does not\nbecome automatically visible on the screen of the device.\n(6) For this section, a vehicle may be parked even though—\n(a) the key for the vehicle is located in the vehicle’s ignition lock;\nor\n(b) the engine of the vehicle is running.\n(7) In this regulation:\naffixed to, in relation to a vehicle, includes forming part of the\n(8) In this section:\naudio call does not include an email, text message, video call, video\nmessage or other similar communication.\nbody, in relation to a mobile device, means the part of the device that\ncontains the majority of the device’s mechanisms.\nheld, by a driver—\n(a) includes rested on, or kept in place by—\n(i) a part of the driver’s body; or\n(ii) clothing worn by the driver; or\n(iii) something else on the driver’s lap; but\n(i) kept in a pocket of the driver’s clothing or in a pouch worn\nby the driver; or\n\n(ii) for a mobile device that is a wearable device—worn by the\ndriver in the manner intended by the manufacturer.\nuse, in relation to a mobile device, includes any of the following\nactions by a driver:\n(a) holding the body of the device (whether or not engaged in a\nphone call);\n(b) for a driver who holds a learner licence or provisional licence—\n(i) operating any function of the device by use of voice; or\n(ii) looking at anything that is in the device;\n(c) for a driver who holds a driver licence other than a learner\nlicence or provisional licence—entering or placing, other than\nby the use of voice, anything into the device, or sending or\nlooking at anything that is in the device;\n(d) turning the device on or off;\n(e) operating any other function of the device.\n","sortOrder":377},{"sectionNumber":"300A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Interrupting funeral procession etc","content":"300A Interrupting funeral procession etc\nA driver must not interfere with, or interrupt, the free passage of—\n(a) a funeral procession or any other lawful procession; or\n(b) any vehicle or person forming part of a procession mentioned in\nparagraph (a).\n","sortOrder":378},{"sectionNumber":"300B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Driving on road closed to traffic","content":"300B Driving on road closed to traffic\nA person must not drive a vehicle on a road that is closed to traffic\nunder the Act, section 30 (Road or road related area may be closed\ntemporarily to traffic).\n\n","sortOrder":379},{"sectionNumber":"300C","sectionType":"section","heading":"Approaching and passing stationary or slow moving","content":"300C Approaching and passing stationary or slow moving\nemergency vehicle etc\n(1) This section applies if a police vehicle or an emergency vehicle is—\n(a) on a road; and\n(b) stationary or moving slowly; and\n(c) displaying flashing red or blue lights (whether or not it is also\ndisplaying other lights or sounding an alarm).\n(2) A driver of a vehicle on the road must—\n(a) approach the police vehicle or emergency vehicle at a speed at\nwhich the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before reaching\nthe vehicle; and\n(b) give way to any police officer or emergency worker on foot near\nthe police vehicle or emergency vehicle; and\n(c) pass the police vehicle or emergency vehicle at a speed of not\nmore than—\n(i) 40km/h; or\n(ii) if the applicable speed limit at the point the driver passes\nthe police vehicle or emergency vehicle is less than\n40km/h—the speed limit; and\n(d) after passing the police vehicle or emergency vehicle, drive at a\nspeed at which the driver can, if necessary, stop safely, until the\ndriver is a sufficient distance past the vehicle that the increase in\nspeed does not risk the safety of any police officer or emergency\nworker on foot near the vehicle.\n(3) Subsection (2) does not apply if the driver is driving on a road that is\ndivided by a median strip and the police vehicle or emergency vehicle\nis on the other side of the road and beyond the median strip.\n\n","sortOrder":380},{"sectionNumber":"301","sectionType":"section","heading":"Leading animal while in or on vehicle","content":"301 Leading animal while in or on vehicle\n(1) The driver of a motor vehicle must not lead an animal, including by\ntethering the animal to the motor vehicle.\n(2) A person who is a passenger in, or on any part of, a motor vehicle\nmust not lead an animal while the motor vehicle is moving.\n(3) The rider of a bicycle must not lead an animal, including by tethering\nthe animal to the bicycle.\n","sortOrder":381},{"sectionNumber":"302","sectionType":"section","heading":"Rider of animal on footpath or nature strip to give way to","content":"302 Rider of animal on footpath or nature strip to give way to\npedestrian\nThe rider of an animal must give way to any pedestrian on a footpath\nor nature strip.\n","sortOrder":382},{"sectionNumber":"303","sectionType":"section","heading":"Riding animal alongside more than 1 other rider","content":"303 Riding animal alongside more than 1 other rider\n(1) The rider of an animal must not ride on a road that is not a multi-lane\nroad alongside more than 1 other rider, unless subsection (3) applies\nto the rider.\n\nMiscellaneous rules for other people Division 18.2A\n(2) The rider of an animal must not ride in a marked lane alongside more\nthan 1 other rider in the marked lane, unless subsection (3) applies to\nthe rider.\n(3) The rider of an animal may ride alongside more than 1 other rider if\nthe rider is overtaking the other riders or droving stock.\n(4) If the rider of an animal is riding on a road that is not a multi-lane\nroad alongside another rider, or in a marked lane alongside another\nrider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not over 1.5m from the\nother rider.\nroad does not include a road related area, but includes a bicycle path,\nshared path and any shoulder of the road.\n","sortOrder":383},{"sectionNumber":"Div 18","sectionType":"division","heading":"2A Miscellaneous rules for other people","content":"Division 18.2A Miscellaneous rules for other people\n","sortOrder":384},{"sectionNumber":"303A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Emission of waste oil or grease","content":"303A Emission of waste oil or grease\n(1) A person must not use a motor vehicle or trailer on a road unless\nadequate precautions have been taken to prevent waste oil or grease\nfrom the machinery or from any other part of the vehicle from\ndropping onto the roadway.\n(2) Without limiting the liability of anyone else, the responsible person\nfor a motor vehicle or trailer must take reasonable steps to prevent a\ncontravention of subsection (1) in relation to the vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":385},{"sectionNumber":"303B","sectionType":"section","heading":"Safety of person on trailer","content":"303B Safety of person on trailer\n(1) A person must not travel on a road in or on any part of a trailer that is\nnot a part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or goods.\n(2) A person must not travel on a road in or on any part of a trailer that is\na part designed primarily for the carriage of goods if the part is not\nenclosed.\n(3) This section does not apply to a person—\n(a) who is in or on a police vehicle or emergency vehicle; or\n(b) engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or\nin the collection of waste or garbage, in or on a trailer that is not\ntravelling faster than 25km/h; or\n(c) if, in all the circumstances, there is no reasonable danger of the\nperson falling or being thrown from the trailer, or being injured,\nbecause the person is travelling in a way prohibited by this\n","sortOrder":386},{"sectionNumber":"304","sectionType":"section","heading":"Direction by police officer or authorised person","content":"304 Direction by police officer or authorised person\n(1) A person must obey any reasonable direction for the safe and efficient\nregulation of traffic given to the person by a police officer or\nauthorised person, whether or not the person may contravene another\nprovision of this regulation by obeying the direction.\n(2) It is a defence to the prosecution of a person for an offence against a\nprovision of this regulation if, at the time of the offence, the person\nwas obeying a direction given to the person under subsection (1).\n\nObeying directions Division 18.3\n","sortOrder":387},{"sectionNumber":"304A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Direction by police officer to get off, or not get on, vehicle","content":"304A Direction by police officer to get off, or not get on, vehicle\nor animal\n(1) A police officer may direct a person to get off, or not get on, a vehicle\nor animal if the police officer suspects on reasonable grounds that the\nperson is under the influence of alcohol or a drug.\n(2) A person commits an offence if the person—\n(a) is given a direction under subsection (1); and\n(b) does not comply with the direction.\nanimal means a horse, cattle or sheep.\nvehicle means—\n(a) a bicycle; or\n(b) a personal mobility device; or\n(c) an animal-drawn vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":388},{"sectionNumber":"305","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—driver of police vehicle generally—Act, s 35","content":"305 Exemption—driver of police vehicle generally—Act, s 35\n(1) An exemption provision does not apply to the driver of a police\n(ii) it is reasonable that the provision should not apply having\nregard to the road and traffic conditions at the time; and\n(b) if the vehicle is a motor vehicle that is moving—the vehicle is\n(2) Subsection (1) (b) does not apply to the driver if, in the\ncircumstances, it is reasonable—\n(a) not to display the light or sound the alarm; or\n(b) for the vehicle not to be fitted or equipped with a blue or red\nflashing light or an alarm.\nexemption provision means—\n(a) the Act, section 5B (Improper use of motor vehicle); or\n(b) the Act, section 7 (Furious, reckless or dangerous driving), to\nthe extent the section relates to furious or dangerous driving; or\n(c) a provision of this regulation.\n\n","sortOrder":389},{"sectionNumber":"305A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—driver of police vehicle—training and","content":"305A Exemption—driver of police vehicle—training and\nassessment\n(1) An exemption provision does not apply to the driver of a police\n(a) the driver is doing police driver training or police driver\nassessment; and\n(b) in the circumstances—\n(ii) it is reasonable that the provision should not apply, having\nregard to the road and traffic conditions at the time; and\n(c) if the vehicle is a motor vehicle that is moving—the vehicle is\n(2) Subsection (1) (c) does not apply to the driver if, in the\ncircumstances, it is reasonable—\n(a) not to display the light or sound the alarm; or\n(a) for the vehicle not to be fitted or equipped with a blue or red\nflashing light or an alarm.\nAFP means the Australian Federal Police.\nexemption provision—see section 305 (3).\npolice driver assessment means an assessment conducted by an AFP\nemployee or contractor of a police officer’s ability to drive a police\nvehicle in the exercise of the police officer’s functions as a police\nofficer.\n\npolice driver training means training provided by the AFP, or an AFP\ncontractor, that teaches a police officer how to drive a police vehicle\nfor the purpose of the exercise of the police officer’s functions as a\npolice officer.\npolice officer includes a person who is training to become a police\nofficer.\n","sortOrder":390},{"sectionNumber":"306","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—driver of emergency vehicle","content":"306 Exemption—driver of emergency vehicle\nA provision of this regulation does not apply to the driver of an\nemergency vehicle if—\n(ii) it is reasonable that the provision should not apply; and\n(b) if the vehicle is a motor vehicle that is moving—the vehicle is\n","sortOrder":391},{"sectionNumber":"307","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and parking exemption—police or emergency","content":"307 Stopping and parking exemption—police or emergency\nvehicle or authorised person\n(1) A provision of part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking) does\nnot apply to the driver of a police vehicle or emergency vehicle if, in\nthe circumstances—\n(a) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n(2) A provision of part 12 does not apply to a driver who is an authorised\nperson driving a vehicle in the course of their duty as an authorised\nperson if, in the circumstances—\n(a) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n\n","sortOrder":392},{"sectionNumber":"307A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Stopping and parking exemption—mobile device","content":"307A Stopping and parking exemption—mobile device\ndetection system or seatbelt detection system\n(1) A provision mentioned in subsection (2) does not apply to the driver\nof a motor vehicle if—\n(ii) it is reasonable that the provision should not apply; and\n(b) the motor vehicle, or a trailer towed by the motor vehicle, is\nbeing used as part of, or in relation to, a mobile device detection\nsystem or seatbelt detection system.\nExample—par (b)\nThe driver of a motor vehicle tows a trailer carrying mobile device detection\nequipment across a dividing strip or nature strip to move the trailer on or off\nthe strip, or park or unhitch the trailer on the strip, as part of mobile device\ndetection operations.\n(a) section 137 (Keeping off dividing strip);\n(b) in relation to stopping on a dividing strip or nature strip—\nsection 197 (1) (Stopping on path, dividing strip, nature strip,\npainted island or traffic island);\n(c) section 205 (Parking for longer than indicated);\n(d) section 207 (Parking where fee payable);\n(e) section 213K (Ticket parking—display of ticket);\n(f) section 289 (1) (Driving on nature strip).\nmobile device detection system means a mobile device detection\nsystem approved under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nManagement) Regulation 2017, section 13 (1).\n\nseatbelt detection system means a seatbelt detection system approved\nunder the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)\nRegulation 2017, section 13 (1).\n","sortOrder":393},{"sectionNumber":"308","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—police officer and emergency worker on foot","content":"308 Exemption—police officer and emergency worker on foot\nA provision of part 14 (Rules for pedestrians) does not apply to a\npolice officer or emergency worker acting in the course of their duty\nif, in the circumstances—\n(a) the police officer or emergency worker is taking reasonable\ncare; and\n","sortOrder":394},{"sectionNumber":"309","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—driver of tram etc","content":"309 Exemption—driver of tram etc\nThe following provisions do not apply to the driver of a tram, the\ndriver of a tram recovery vehicle engaged in accessing or recovering\na disabled tram, or the driver of a public bus travelling along tram\ntracks:\n(a) division 4.1 (Left turns);\n(b) section 88 (Left turn sign);\n(c) section 89 (Right turn sign);\n(d) section 90 (No turns sign);\n(e) section 91 (No left turn and no right turn sign);\n(f) section 92 (Traffic lane arrows);\n(g) section 99 (Keep left and keep right sign);\n(h) section 100 (No entry sign);\n(i) part 9 (Roundabouts);\n(j) division 11.2 (Keeping to left);\n(k) division 11.3 (Overtaking);\n\n(l) division 11.7 (Passing trams and safety zones);\n(m) part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking).\n","sortOrder":395},{"sectionNumber":"309A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption from requirement about riding on motorbike","content":"309A Exemption from requirement about riding on motorbike\nThe road transport authority may, for the purpose of allowing a\nsporting or similar event to be filmed, exempt a person from\nsection 271 (2) (Riding on motorbike) to the extent that it requires the\nperson to face forward while being carried as a passenger on a\nmotorbike.\n","sortOrder":396},{"sectionNumber":"310","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—road worker etc","content":"310 Exemption—road worker etc\n(1) A provision mentioned in subsection (2) does not apply to a person at\nthe site of, and engaged in, roadworks if, in the circumstances—\n(a) it is not practicable for the person to comply with the provision;\nand\n(b) sufficient warning of the roadworks has been given to other road\nusers.\n(a) division 4.1 (Left turns);\n(ab) division 4.2 (Right turns);\n(b) part 7 (Giving way), except the following:\n(i) section 67 (Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop\nline at intersection without traffic lights);\n(ii) section 68 (Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop\nline at other places);\n(iii) section 69 (Giving way at give way sign or give way line\nat intersection (except roundabout));\n(iv) section 70 (Giving way at give way sign at bridge or length\nof narrow road);\n\n(v) section 71 (Giving way at give way sign or give way line\nat other places);\n(c) part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings), except the following:\n(i) section 102 (Clearance and low clearance sign);\n(ii) section 103 (Load limit sign);\n(d) part 11 (Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules);\n(e) part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking);\n(f) section 224 (Using horn or similar warning device);\n(g) part 14 (Rules for pedestrians), except section 236 (1)\n(Pedestrian not to cause traffic hazard or obstruction);\n(h) section 264 (Wearing seatbelt and seating position—driver);\n(i) section 265 (Wearing seatbelt and seating position—passenger\n16 years old or older);\n(j) section 268 (How people must travel in or on motor vehicle);\n(k) section 288 (Driving on path);\n(l) section 289 (Driving on nature strip);\n(m) section 290 (Driving on traffic island);\n(n) section 295 (Motor vehicle towing another vehicle with\ntowline);\n(o) section 296 (Driving vehicle in reverse);\n(p) section 297 (2) (Driver to have proper control of vehicle etc);\n(q) section 298 (Driving with person in trailer).\n(3) Section 20 (Obeying speed limit) does not apply to a driver—\n(a) driving a snow-clearing vehicle and engaged in snow-clearing;\nor\n\n(b) driving a motor vehicle and engaged in speed zoning tests\nauthorised by the road transport authority.\nroadworks means—\n(a) construction or maintenance of a road; or\n(b) road cleaning; or\n(c) installation or maintenance work authorised by the road\ntransport authority on, above or below a road; or\n(ca) installation or maintenance of a traffic control device authorised\nby the road transport authority; or\n(d) installation or maintenance of a traffic-related item or traffic\nmonitoring device authorised by the road transport authority; or\n(e) a traffic survey authorised by the road transport authority; or\n(f) a road surface survey test.\n","sortOrder":397},{"sectionNumber":"311","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—oversize vehicle","content":"311 Exemption—oversize vehicle\n(1) A provision mentioned in subsection (2) does not apply to the driver\nof an oversize vehicle, or the driver of a vehicle escorting or piloting\nan oversize vehicle, if—\n(a) it is not practicable for the driver to comply with the provision;\nand\n(b) the driver is taking reasonable care; and\n(c) the driver is complying with the Heavy Vehicle National Law\n(ACT) and any other relevant territory law relating to oversize\nvehicles, including the conditions of any permit or authority\nissued in relation to the oversize vehicle.\n\n(a) part 7 (Giving way), except the following:\n(i) section 67 (Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop\nline at intersection without traffic lights);\n(ii) section 68 (Stopping and giving way at stop sign or stop\nline at other places);\n(iii) section 69 (Giving way at give way sign or give way line\nat intersection (except roundabout));\n(iv) section 70 (Giving way at give way sign at bridge or length\nof narrow road);\n(v) section 71 (Giving way at give way sign or give way line\nat other places);\n(b) part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings), except the following:\n(i) section 102 (Clearance and low clearance sign);\n(ii) section 103 (Load limit sign);\n(c) section 111 (3) (Entering roundabout from multi-lane road or\nroad with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in same direction);\n(d) section 116 (Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or\nleaving roundabout);\n(e) part 11 (Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules);\n(f) part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking);\n(g) section 268 (How people must travel in or on motor vehicle);\n(h) section 288 (Driving on path);\n(i) section 289 (Driving on nature strip);\n(j) section 290 (Driving on traffic island);\n(k) section 296 (Driving vehicle in reverse);\n\n(l) section 297 (2) (Driver to have proper control of vehicle etc).\n","sortOrder":398},{"sectionNumber":"312","sectionType":"section","heading":"Exemption—tow truck driver","content":"312 Exemption—tow truck driver\n(1) It is a defence to the prosecution of the driver of a tow truck for an\noffence against a provision mentioned in subsection (2) if, at the time\nof the offence—\n(a) the driver is engaged in loading, or connecting to, a vehicle to\nwhich this section applies; and\n(b) the driver is unable to comply with the provision; and\n(c) the tow truck is displaying a flashing light; and\n(d) the driver is acting safely.\n(a) part 4 (Making turns);\n(b) part 6 (Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red lights);\n(c) division 7.1 (Giving way at stop sign, stop line, give way sign\nor give way line applying to driver);\n(d) part 8 (Traffic signs and road markings);\n(e) part 9 (Roundabouts);\n(f) part 11 (Keeping left, overtaking and other driving rules);\n(g) part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking);\n(h) section 288 (Driving on path);\n(i) section 289 (Driving on nature strip);\n(j) section 290 (Driving on traffic island).\n\nvehicle to which this section applies means the following vehicles:\n(a) a vehicle at the scene of a crash;\n(b) a disabled vehicle.\n\n","sortOrder":399},{"sectionNumber":"Part 20","sectionType":"part","heading":"Traffic control devices and","content":"Part 20 Traffic control devices and\ntraffic-related items\n","sortOrder":400},{"sectionNumber":"314","sectionType":"section","heading":"Diagram of traffic control device, traffic-related item or","content":"314 Diagram of traffic control device, traffic-related item or\nsymbol\n(1) A diagram in this regulation of a traffic control device, traffic-related\nitem, or symbol, represents a likeness of the device, item or symbol.\n(2) If there are 2 or more diagrams of a traffic sign in schedule 2\n(Standard or commonly used traffic signs) or schedule 3 (Other\npermitted traffic signs), or of a traffic-related item or symbol in\nschedule 4 (Symbols and traffic-related items), each diagram\nrepresents a likeness of a permitted version of the sign, item or\n(3) If a diagram of a traffic sign in schedule 2 or schedule 3, or of a\ntraffic-related item or symbol in schedule 4, is in black and white, the\npermitted version of the sign, item or symbol is in black and white\nonly.\n","sortOrder":401},{"sectionNumber":"315","sectionType":"section","heading":"Legal effect of traffic control device","content":"315 Legal effect of traffic control device\n(1) A traffic control device of a kind mentioned in this regulation has\neffect for this regulation if—\n(a) the device is on a road; and\n(b) the device complies substantially with this regulation.\n(2) A traffic control device is taken to comply substantially with this\nregulation unless the contrary is proved.\n\n","sortOrder":402},{"sectionNumber":"316","sectionType":"section","heading":"When traffic control device complies substantially with","content":"316 When traffic control device complies substantially with\nregulation\n(1) A traffic sign complies substantially with this regulation if—\n(a) it is a reasonable likeness of a diagram in schedule 2 (Standard\nor commonly used traffic signs) or schedule 3 (Other permitted\ntraffic signs) of that kind of traffic sign; or\n(b) for a traffic sign of a kind for which there is not a diagram in\nschedule 2 or schedule 3—it complies substantially with a\ndescription of that kind of traffic sign in this regulation and, if\nthe description includes a symbol for which there is a diagram\nin schedule 4, the symbol on the sign is a reasonable likeness of\nthe diagram.\n(2) A road marking complies substantially with this regulation if it\ncomplies substantially with a description of that kind of road marking\nin this regulation and, if the description includes a symbol for which\nthere is a diagram in schedule 4 (Symbols and traffic-related items),\nthe symbol in the road marking is a reasonable likeness of the\n(3) A traffic control device (except a traffic sign or a road marking)\ncomplies substantially with this regulation if the device complies\nsubstantially with a description of that kind of traffic control device\nin this regulation and, if the description includes a symbol for which\nthere is a diagram in schedule 4, the symbol on the device is a\nreasonable likeness of the diagram.\n1 A children’s crossing may have a red and white post missing temporarily. The\nmissing post does not prevent the crossing from meeting the description of\nsuch a crossing that is set out in s 80 (6).\n2 A freeway may have several freeway signs missing. The missing signs do not\nprevent the area from still being considered to be a freeway.\n\n(4) A traffic sign may be a reasonable likeness of a diagram of a kind of\ntraffic sign mentioned in this regulation even though 1 or more of the\nfollowing apply to the sign:\n(a) the dimensions of the sign, or of anything on the sign, are\ndifferent;\n(b) the sign has additional information on or with it;\n(c) the number on the sign is different;\n(d) the sign has a different number of panels;\n(e) the sign is combined on a single panel with 1 or more other\ntraffic signs;\n(f) for a parking control sign—words, figures, symbols, or anything\nelse, on the sign are differently arranged;\n(g) for a bus lane sign, emergency stopping lane only sign, one-way\nsign or parking control sign—the sign has an arrow pointing in\na different direction;\n(h) for a separated footpath sign or an end separated footpath sign—\nthe pedestrian and bicycle symbols are reversed;\n(i) for a road access sign—information on or with the sign indicates\n(whether by different wording or in another way) that it applies\nto different or additional vehicles or people;\n(j) there is a variation in shade or brightness between a colour on\nthe sign and the equivalent colour in the diagram.\nExample—par (b)\nA speed limit sign near a school may say that the sign has effect at certain times.\nThis additional information does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness\nof the diagram of a speed limit sign in sch 2.\n\nExample—par (c)\nThe diagram of the area speed limit sign in sch 2 has the number ‘60’. A particular\narea speed limit sign may have another number, for example, ‘50’. The different\nnumber on the sign does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness of the\nExamples—par (d)\n1 A school zone sign may have the indicated speed limit, the words ‘school\nzone’, and the times of operation, on a single panel or separate panels.\n2 An end bicycle path sign may have the word ‘end’ on a separate panel or on\nthe same panel as the rest of the sign.\nExample—par (e)\nA no parking sign that operates at certain times may be combined on a single panel\nwith a permissive parking sign allowing pay parking at other times.\nExample—par (f)\nA permissive parking sign limiting parking to 2 hours may have the time limit\nabove, or below, the word ‘parking’.\nExample—par (i)\nThe diagram of the road access sign in sch 2 says ‘no pedestrians bicycles animals\nbeyond this point’. The replacement of the word ‘bicycles’ by the word ‘tractors’\non a particular sign does not prevent the sign being a reasonable likeness of the\n(5) A variable illuminated message sign may also be a reasonable\nlikeness of a diagram of a kind of traffic sign in schedule 2 or\nschedule 3 even though the colour of the sign, or of anything else on\nthe sign, is different.\nExample 1—Speed limit sign (standard sign)\n\nExample 2—Speed limit sign (variable illuminated message sign)\n(6) A symbol on or in a traffic control device may be a reasonable\nlikeness of a diagram of a kind of symbol mentioned in this regulation\neven though the dimensions of the symbol, or of anything on the\nsymbol, are different.\npanel includes a board, plate and screen.\n","sortOrder":403},{"sectionNumber":"317","sectionType":"section","heading":"Information on or with traffic control device","content":"317 Information on or with traffic control device\n(1) A traffic control device may, by the use of words, figures, symbols or\nanything else, indicate any of the following:\n(a) the times, days or circumstances when it applies or does not\napply;\n(b) the lengths of road or areas where it applies or does not apply;\n(c) the people to whom it applies or does not apply;\n(d) the vehicles to which it applies or does not apply;\n(e) other information.\nExamples—circumstances\n1 A speed limit sign may indicate that it applies when the lights at a children’s\ncrossing are flashing.\n2 A speed limit sign may indicate that it applies when children are present.\n\ntraffic control device includes a board, device, plate, screen, word,\nfigure, symbol, or anything else, with a traffic control device that\nprovides information about the application of the traffic control\nExamples—information with a traffic control device\n1 A plate erected immediately below a no U-turn sign may indicate that the sign\napplies on Monday to Friday between 8 am and 6 pm.\n2 An illuminated board erected close to, but not next to, a no entry sign may\nindicate that commercial trucks are permitted to pass the sign when the words\non the board are illuminated.\n","sortOrder":404},{"sectionNumber":"318","sectionType":"section","heading":"Limited effect of certain traffic control devices","content":"318 Limited effect of certain traffic control devices\n(1) If information on a traffic control device indicates that the device\napplies during particular times, on particular days, in particular\ncircumstances, to a particular length of road or area, or to particular\npeople or vehicles, the device has effect only for the indicated times,\ndays, circumstances, length of road, area, people or vehicles.\nA shared zone sign on a road into an area may indicate that the sign applies on\nMonday to Friday between 7 am and 6 pm.\n(2) If information on a traffic control device indicates that the device does\nnot apply during particular times, on particular days, in particular\ncircumstances, to a particular length of road or area, or to particular\npeople or vehicles, the device does not have effect for the indicated\ntimes, days, circumstances, length of road, area, people or vehicles.\n1 A plate erected next to a pedestrian crossing sign at a place may indicate that\nthe sign does not apply on a particular day.\n2 A board erected close to a bus lane sign above a marked lane may indicate that\nthe sign does not apply when the words on the board are illuminated.\n\n(3) If information on a traffic control device that is at a place indicates\nthat it applies on a particular day of the week, the device does not\nhave effect on a day that is a public holiday for the place unless\ninformation on the device states otherwise.\nIf a loading zone sign indicates that it applies on Monday to Friday between 9 am\nand 4 pm and information on or with the sign does not indicate that it applies on\npublic holidays, the sign does not have effect on any public holiday falling on a\nMonday to Friday.\ntraffic control device includes a board, device, plate, screen, word,\nfigure, symbol, or anything else, with a traffic control device that\nprovides information about the application of the traffic control\n","sortOrder":405},{"sectionNumber":"319","sectionType":"section","heading":"Legal effect of traffic-related item","content":"319 Legal effect of traffic-related item\n(1) A traffic-related item of a kind mentioned in this regulation has effect\nfor this regulation if—\n(a) the item is on a road, or on a vehicle on a road; and\n(b) the item complies substantially with this regulation.\n(2) A traffic-related item is taken to comply with this regulation unless\nthe contrary is proved.\n","sortOrder":406},{"sectionNumber":"320","sectionType":"section","heading":"When traffic-related item complies substantially with","content":"320 When traffic-related item complies substantially with\nregulation\n(1) A traffic-related item complies substantially with this regulation if—\n(a) it is a reasonable likeness of a diagram in schedule 4 (Symbols\nand traffic-related items) of that kind of traffic-related item; or\n\n(b) for a traffic-related item of a kind for which there is not a\ndiagram in schedule 4—it complies substantially with a\ndescription of that kind of traffic-related item in this regulation\nand, if the description includes a symbol for which there is a\ndiagram in schedule 4, the symbol on the item is a reasonable\nlikeness of the diagram.\n(2) A traffic-related item may be a reasonable likeness of a diagram of a\nkind of traffic-related item mentioned in this regulation even though 1\nor both of the following apply to the item:\n(a) the dimensions of the item, or of anything on the item, are\ndifferent;\n(b) the item has additional information.\n(3) A symbol on a traffic-related item may be a reasonable likeness of a\ndiagram of a kind of symbol mentioned in this regulation even though\nthe dimensions of the symbol, or of anything on the symbol, are\ndifferent.\n","sortOrder":407},{"sectionNumber":"321","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of information on or with traffic control device","content":"321 Meaning of information on or with traffic control device\nand traffic-related item\nA word, figure, symbol or anything else used on or with a traffic\ncontrol device or traffic-related item has the same meaning as in this\n","sortOrder":408},{"sectionNumber":"322","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to traffic control device and traffic-related item","content":"322 Reference to traffic control device and traffic-related item\non road etc\n(1) A traffic control device or traffic-related item above or near a road is\ntaken to be on the road.\n1 A speed limit sign erected on a post at the side of a road is taken to be a speed\nlimit sign on the road.\n2 A traffic lane arrow on a structure immediately above the road is taken to be a\ntraffic lane arrow on the road.\n\n3 A do not overtake turning vehicle sign attached to a vehicle on a road is taken\nto be a do not overtake turning vehicle sign on the road.\n(2) However, the device or item is taken to be on the road only if it is\nclearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to apply.\nA shared zone sign erected on a post near the side of a road is a traffic sign on the\nroad only if it is clearly visible to drivers driving on the road during the day and in\nnormal weather conditions.\n(3) A traffic control device or traffic-related item above or near an area\nor place is taken to be in or at the area or place.\n1 Traffic lights erected outside the area of an intersection, but near that area, are\ntaken to be traffic lights at the intersection.\n2 A hook turn only sign fixed to a structure above a road that is close to, but\nbefore, an intersection is taken to be a hook turn only sign at the intersection.\n3 A parking control sign near the side of a road is taken to be at the side of the\n4 A parking control sign near the centre of a road is taken to be at the centre of\n(4) However, the device or item is taken to be in or at the area or place\nonly if it is clearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to\napply.\nA no right turn sign suspended from wires above a road close to, but before, an\nintersection is a traffic sign at the intersection only if it is clearly visible to drivers\napproaching the intersection during the day and in normal weather conditions.\n(5) Without limiting subsection (3), a traffic control device or\ntraffic-related item above or near a break in a dividing strip is taken\nto be at the break.\nA no U-turn sign erected in a dividing strip close to, but before, a break in the\ndividing strip is taken to be at the break.\n\n(6) However, the device or item is taken to be at the break only if it is\nclearly visible to road users to whom it is designed to apply.\n(7) A traffic control device or traffic-related item is taken to comply with\nsubsection (2), (4) or (6) unless the contrary is proved.\n(8) In this section:\nclearly visible means—\n(a) for a traffic signal—clearly visible during the day and night in\nnormal weather conditions; or\n(b) for another traffic control device or a traffic-related item—\nclearly visible during the day in normal weather conditions.\nday means the period between sunrise on a day and sunset on the same\nday.\nnormal weather conditions means weather conditions that are not\nhazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility.\n","sortOrder":409},{"sectionNumber":"323","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to light that is traffic signals","content":"323 Reference to light that is traffic signals\nA reference in this regulation to a light that is, or is part of, traffic\nsignals is a reference to a steady light, unless otherwise expressly\nstated.\n","sortOrder":410},{"sectionNumber":"323A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Audible line","content":"323A Audible line\n(1) An audible line is a line on a road that is made up of a series of closely\nspaced raised pieces of material designed to create a continuous noise\nor vibration if driven on by a motor vehicle.\n(2) A reference in this regulation to a line is to be taken to include a\nreference to an audible line, unless otherwise expressly stated.\n\n(3) For this regulation—\n(a) an audible line is to be taken to be continuous even if there is no\nphysical link between the pieces of material that make up the\nline;\n(b) if there is no physical link between those pieces, the colour of\nthe audible line is to be taken to be the visible colour of those\npieces.\n","sortOrder":411},{"sectionNumber":"Div 20","sectionType":"division","heading":"2 Application of traffic control devices","content":"Division 20.2 Application of traffic control devices\nto lengths of roads and areas\n","sortOrder":412},{"sectionNumber":"324","sectionType":"section","heading":"Purpose—div 20.2","content":"324 Purpose—div 20.2\n(1) This division contains sections explaining when traffic control\ndevices apply to lengths of road and areas.\n(2) Other relevant sections are found elsewhere in this regulation.\n","sortOrder":413},{"sectionNumber":"325","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to traffic control device—application to length","content":"325 Reference to traffic control device—application to length\nof road and area\nIn applying this regulation to a length of road or an area, unless the\ncontrary intention appears, a reference to a traffic control device is a\nreference to a traffic control device applying to the length of road or\n","sortOrder":414},{"sectionNumber":"326","sectionType":"section","heading":"When traffic control device applies to length of road or","content":"326 When traffic control device applies to length of road or\narea—basic rules\n(1) A traffic control device applies to a length of road or an area if—\n(a) the device applies to the length of road or area under 1 or more\nprovisions of this regulation; or\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the length of road\nor area.\n\n(2) A traffic control device does not apply to a length of road or an area\nif information on or with the device expressly indicates that it does\nnot apply to the length of road or area.\n(3) Subsection (2) applies despite any other provision of this division.\n","sortOrder":415},{"sectionNumber":"327","sectionType":"section","heading":"Length of road to which traffic sign (except parking","content":"327 Length of road to which traffic sign (except parking\ncontrol sign) applies\nThe length of road to which a traffic sign on a road (except a parking\ncontrol sign) applies is worked out in the direction driven by a driver,\nor travelled by a pedestrian, on the road who faces the sign before\npassing it.\nSection 21 (3) provides that a speed limit sign applies to the length of road\nbeginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of a different speed limit sign, an\nend speed limit sign, or speed derestriction sign, and the end of the road. Only the\nnearest of those things, in the direction driven by a driver, or travelled by a\npedestrian, who faces the sign before passing it, is relevant.\n","sortOrder":416},{"sectionNumber":"328","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to traffic control device applying to length of","content":"328 Reference to traffic control device applying to length of\nroad\nIf, under this regulation, a traffic control device on a road applies to\na length of road, the device applies only to a length of road on that\nroad, unless otherwise expressly stated.\nA speed limit sign on a road does not apply to roads leading off from the road.\n","sortOrder":417},{"sectionNumber":"329","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to marked lane","content":"329 Traffic control device applying to marked lane\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to a marked\nlane if—\n(a) it is above the marked lane; or\n\n(b) it is near the marked lane, and the device, the position of the\ndevice, or information on or with the device, indicates that it\napplies to the marked lane.\nAn emergency stopping lane only sign applies to the marked lane indicated by the\narrow on the sign.\n(2) A road marking applies to a marked lane if it is on the surface of the\n(3) However, a traffic control device does not apply to a marked lane if\ndoes not apply to the marked lane.\n","sortOrder":418},{"sectionNumber":"330","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to slip lane","content":"330 Traffic control device applying to slip lane\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to a slip lane\nif—\n(a) it is above the slip lane; or\n(b) it is near the slip lane and on the left side of the slip lane; or\n(c) it is near the slip lane, and the device, the position of the device,\nor information on or with the device, indicates that it applies to\nthe slip lane.\n(2) A road marking applies to a slip lane if it is on the surface of the slip\n(3) However, a traffic control device does not apply to a slip lane if\ndoes not apply to the slip lane.\n(4) In subsection (1) (c):\n\n","sortOrder":419},{"sectionNumber":"331","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to intersection","content":"331 Traffic control device applying to intersection\nA traffic control device applies to an intersection if it is at the\nintersection and does not apply to a slip lane at the intersection, unless\ndoes not apply to the intersection.\n","sortOrder":420},{"sectionNumber":"332","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking control sign applying to length of road","content":"332 Parking control sign applying to length of road\n(1) If a parking control sign displays an arrow and is at the side of a road,\nthen, unless information on or with the sign indicates otherwise, the\nsign applies to the length of road between the sign and the nearest (in\nthe direction indicated by the arrow) of the following:\n(a) a parking control sign at that side of the road that displays an\narrow indicating the opposite direction;\n(b) a yellow edge line on the road;\n(2) If a parking control sign displays an arrow and is at the centre of a\nroad or on a dividing strip, then, unless information on or with the\nsign indicates otherwise, the sign applies to the length of road\nbetween the sign and the nearest (in the direction indicated by the\narrow) of the following:\n(a) a parking control sign at the centre of the road or on the dividing\nstrip that displays an arrow indicating the opposite direction;\n(b) a yellow edge line on the road;\n\n","sortOrder":421},{"sectionNumber":"333","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking control sign applying to length of road in area to","content":"333 Parking control sign applying to length of road in area to\nwhich other parking control sign applies etc\n(1) If a parking control sign that applies to a length of road is in an area\nto which another parking control sign applies in accordance with\nsection 335 (Traffic control device applying to area), the first parking\ncontrol sign applies in the same way as it would apply if it were not\nin that area, and the second parking control sign does not apply to the\nParking control signs that establish a loading zone or taxi zone may operate on a\nlength of road in an area where parking is otherwise restricted to residents only by\nother parking control signs on each road into the area.\n(2) If the area indicated by any of the following road markings is in an\narea to which a parking control sign applies in accordance with\nsection 335, the road marking applies in the same way as it would\napply if it were not in that area, and the parking control sign does not\napply to the area indicated by the road marking:\n(a) people with disabilities road marking;\n(b) electric-powered vehicle road marking;\n(c) electric-powered vehicle charging road marking.\nelectric-powered vehicle charging road marking—see\nsection 203C (2), definition of parking area for charging of\nelectric-powered vehicles.\nelectric-powered vehicle road marking—see section 203B (2),\ndefinition of parking area for electric-powered vehicles.\n\n","sortOrder":422},{"sectionNumber":"334","sectionType":"section","heading":"How parking control sign applies to length of road","content":"334 How parking control sign applies to length of road\n(1) If a permissive parking sign, bicycle parking sign or motorbike\nparking sign, or a zone sign mentioned in division 12.5 (Stopping in\nzones for particular vehicles) applies to a length of road and there are\nparking bays on the length of road, the sign applies only to the parking\nbays, unless information on or with the sign indicates otherwise.\n(2) If a parking control sign applies to a length of road, the sign is at the\nside of the road, and there are no parking bays to which the sign\napplies, then, unless information on or with the sign indicates\notherwise, the sign applies to—\n(a) any shoulder of the road on that side of the road; and\n(b) the part of the road on the length of road that extends from the\nfar side of the road (excluding any road related area) on that side\nof the road for—\n(i) if the sign, or information on or with the sign, includes the\nwords ‘angle parking’ or ‘angle’—6m; or\n(ii) in any other case—3m.\nPart of a road to which a parking control sign indicating angle parking applies\n\nPart of a road to which a parking control sign (except a sign indicating angle\nparking) applies\n(3) If a parking control sign applies to a length of road, the sign is at the\ncentre of the road or on a dividing strip, and there are no parking bays\nto which the sign applies, then, unless information on or with the sign\nindicates otherwise, the sign applies to—\n(a) if the sign is at the centre of the road, but not on a dividing\nstrip—the part of the road on that length of road that extends 3m\nfrom the centre of the road on each side of the road; or\n(b) if the sign is on a dividing strip—the dividing strip on that length\nof road and the part of the road on that length of road that\nextends 3m from each edge of the dividing strip.\n","sortOrder":423},{"sectionNumber":"335","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to area","content":"335 Traffic control device applying to area\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking) applies to an area\nif—\n(a) it is in the area; and\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the area.\n\n(2) A traffic control device (except a road marking) also applies to an\narea if—\n(a) there is an identical kind of traffic control device (the first traffic\ncontrol device) on each road into the area; and\n(b) the traffic control device is a traffic control device applying to\nan area, or information on or with the device indicates that it\napplies to an area; and\n(c) information on or with a traffic control device on each road out\nof the area indicates that the first traffic control device no longer\napplies or that the area has ended.\nExamples—traffic control devices applying to an area\n1 a school zone sign (in some circumstances—see s 23)\n2 a shared zone sign\n3 a no stopping sign or no parking sign with the word ‘area’\n4 a permissive parking sign with the words ‘parking area’\n5 an end no parking area sign\n6 an end no stopping area sign\n7 an end parking area sign\n(3) A road marking applies to an area if—\n(a) it is on the surface of the area; and\n(b) the road marking, the position of the road marking, or\ninformation in or with the road marking, indicates that the road\nmarking applies to the area.\n(4) However, a traffic control device does not apply to an area if\ndoes not apply to the area.\n(5) A parking control sign that applies to an area applies to parking bays\non each length of road in the area, and to other parts of each length of\nroad, as if it were a parking control sign that applied only to that\n\nApplication of traffic control devices to people Division 20.3\ndevice, in subsection (1) (b), includes another traffic control device.\nroad, in subsection (2) (a) and (c) and for an area of road, does not\ninclude a road related area.\nroad marking, in subsection (3) (b), includes another traffic control\n","sortOrder":424},{"sectionNumber":"336","sectionType":"section","heading":"How separated footpath sign and separated footpath road","content":"336 How separated footpath sign and separated footpath road\nmarking apply\n(1) A separated footpath sign, or separated footpath road marking, on a\nfootpath applies in the way set out in this section.\n(2) The part of the footpath to the left of the centre of the footpath is\ndesignated—\n(a) if a pedestrian symbol is on the left side of the sign or the path—\nfor the use of pedestrians; or\n(b) if a bicycle symbol is on the left side of the sign or the path—\nfor the use of bicycles.\n(3) The part of the footpath to the right of the centre of the footpath is\ndesignated—\n(a) if a pedestrian symbol is on the right side of the sign or the\npath—for the use of pedestrians; or\n(b) if a bicycle symbol is on the right side of the sign or the path—\nfor the use of bicycles.\nDivision 20.3 Application of traffic control devices\nto people\n","sortOrder":425},{"sectionNumber":"337","sectionType":"section","heading":"Purpose—div 20.3","content":"337 Purpose—div 20.3\nThis division explains when a traffic control device applies to a\nperson.\n\n","sortOrder":426},{"sectionNumber":"338","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to traffic control device—application to people","content":"338 Reference to traffic control device—application to people\nIn applying this regulation to a person, unless the contrary intention\nappears, a reference to a traffic control device is a reference to a traffic\ncontrol device applying to the person.\n","sortOrder":427},{"sectionNumber":"339","sectionType":"section","heading":"When traffic control device applies to person—basic","content":"339 When traffic control device applies to person—basic\nrules\n(1) A traffic control device applies to a person if—\n(a) the device applies to the person under a provision of this\ndivision; or\nthe device, indicates that the device applies to the person.\n(2) A traffic control device does not apply to a person if information on\nor with the device expressly indicates that it does not apply to the\nperson.\n(3) Subsection (2) applies despite any other provision of this division.\n","sortOrder":428},{"sectionNumber":"340","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device (except road marking and parking","content":"340 Traffic control device (except road marking and parking\ncontrol sign)\n(1) A traffic control device (except a road marking or parking control\nsign) applies to a person if—\n(a) the device faces the person; or\n(b) the person has passed the device and the device faced the person\nas the person approached it.\n\nApplication of traffic control devices to people Division 20.3\n(2) However, the device does not apply to the person if the position of\nthe device indicates that it does not apply to the person.\n1 If a driver is driving in a marked lane of a multi-lane road, a traffic lane arrow\nabove another marked lane does not apply to the driver.\n2 If a driver is turning left using a slip lane at an intersection, a traffic light on\nthe right side of the painted island or traffic island that separates the slip lane\nfrom other parts of the road does not apply to the driver.\n3 If a driver is driving on a two-way road, a speed limit sign facing only traffic\ntravelling in the opposite direction does not apply to the driver.\n","sortOrder":429},{"sectionNumber":"341","sectionType":"section","heading":"Road marking","content":"341 Road marking\nA road marking on the surface of a road applies to a person on the\nroad unless the position of the road marking indicates that it does not\napply to the person.\n1 If a driver is driving on a road that is not a multi-lane road or one-way road, a\nroad marking to the right of the centre of the road does not apply to the driver.\n2 If a driver is driving in a marked lane of a multi-lane road, a road marking in\nanother marked lane does not apply to the driver.\n3 At an intersection, or on a roundabout, road markings indicating the edge of a\nmarked lane for use by traffic coming from another direction do not apply to\nthe driver.\n","sortOrder":430},{"sectionNumber":"342","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to","content":"342 Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to\nlength of road\n(1) A traffic sign (except a parking control sign) that applies to a length\nof road and to drivers applies to a driver driving on the length of road\nif the driver is driving in the same direction as a driver on the road\nwho faces the sign before passing it.\n(2) A traffic sign that applies to a length of road and to pedestrians applies\nto a pedestrian travelling on the length of road if the pedestrian is\ntravelling in the same direction as a pedestrian on the road who faces\nthe sign before passing it.\n\n(3) The traffic sign applies to the driver or pedestrian even though the\ndriver or pedestrian does not pass the sign.\nIf a driver turns from a side road or private land onto a length of road to which a\ntraffic sign applies, the traffic sign applies to the driver even though the driver does\nnot pass the sign.\n","sortOrder":431},{"sectionNumber":"343","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to area","content":"343 Traffic sign (except parking control sign) applying to area\n(1) A traffic sign (except a parking control sign) that applies to an area\nand to drivers applies to a driver driving on any road in the area.\n(2) A traffic sign that applies to an area and to pedestrians applies to a\npedestrian on any road in the area.\n(3) The traffic sign applies to the driver or pedestrian even though the\ndriver or pedestrian does not pass the sign.\nThe shared zone signs on the roads into a shared zone apply to a driver who starts\na journey inside the shared zone.\n","sortOrder":432},{"sectionNumber":"344","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to driver in marked lane","content":"344 Traffic control device applying to driver in marked lane\nA traffic control device applying to a marked lane applies to a driver\napproaching, in or leaving the marked lane unless the position of the\ndevice indicates that it does not apply to the driver.\nAn overhead lane control device above a marked lane that the driver does not face\nas the driver approaches it does not apply to the driver.\n","sortOrder":433},{"sectionNumber":"345","sectionType":"section","heading":"Traffic control device applying to driver in slip lane","content":"345 Traffic control device applying to driver in slip lane\nA traffic control device applying to a slip lane applies to a driver\napproaching, in or leaving the slip lane.\n\nPrescribed traffic control devices Division 20.4\n","sortOrder":434},{"sectionNumber":"346","sectionType":"section","heading":"Parking control sign","content":"346 Parking control sign\n(1) A parking control sign that applies to a length of road applies to a\ndriver on the length of road.\n(2) A parking control sign that applies to an area applies to a driver in the\n(3) A parking control sign applies to a driver mentioned in subsection (1)\nor (2) even though the driver does not pass the sign.\nDivision 20.4 Prescribed traffic control devices\n","sortOrder":435},{"sectionNumber":"346A","sectionType":"section","heading":"Preventing prescribed traffic control device being clearly","content":"346A Preventing prescribed traffic control device being clearly\nvisible\n(1) A person must not (except with the approval of the road transport\nauthority) place anything in a position that prevents, or is likely to\nprevent, a prescribed traffic control device from being clearly visible\nto the road users to whom it is intended to apply.\nNote Prescribed traffic control device—see the Act, dictionary and the Road\nTransport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 2017, s 11.\n(2) The road transport authority, a police officer or an authorised person\nmay—\n(a) orally or in writing, direct a person who has contravened\nsubsection (1) by placing something to remove the thing within\na stated reasonable time; or\n(b) remove the thing.\n(3) If a person is given a direction under subsection (2) (a), the person\nmust comply with the direction.\n\n","sortOrder":436},{"sectionNumber":"347","sectionType":"section","heading":"Meaning of abbreviations and symbols","content":"347 Meaning of abbreviations and symbols\n","sortOrder":437},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 1","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"(Abbreviations and symbols) provides the meaning of","content":"Schedule 1 (Abbreviations and symbols) provides the meaning of\ncertain abbreviations and symbols used in this regulation and on\ntraffic control devices and traffic-related items.\n","sortOrder":438},{"sectionNumber":"348","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to driver doing something etc","content":"348 Reference to driver doing something etc\nIf the context permits, a reference in this regulation to a driver doing\nor not doing something is a reference to the driver causing the driver’s\nvehicle to do or not to do the thing.\nThe reference in s 27 to a driver turning left at an intersection is a reference to the\ndriver causing the driver’s vehicle to turn left at the intersection.\n","sortOrder":439},{"sectionNumber":"349","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to certain kind of road","content":"349 Reference to certain kind of road\nA reference in this regulation to a road of a particular kind is a\nreference to a road of that kind at any relevant place.\nSection 31 deals with a driver starting a right turn at an intersection from a road\n(except a multi-lane road). The section applies to a particular driver only if the road\nfrom which the driver is turning is not a multi-lane road at the intersection. In\napplying the section to the driver, it is irrelevant that the road is, or is not, a\nmulti-lane road at another place away from the intersection.\n","sortOrder":440},{"sectionNumber":"350","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to stopping or parking on length of road etc","content":"350 Reference to stopping or parking on length of road etc\n(1) A driver stops or parks on a length of road, or in an area, if the driver\nstops or parks the driver’s vehicle so any part of the vehicle is on the\nlength of road or in the area.\n\nGeneral Part 21\n(2) A driver stops or parks within a particular distance from, before, or\nafter, something if the driver stops or parks the driver’s vehicle so any\npart of the vehicle is within that distance.\nExample—s (2)\nSection 190 provides that a driver must not stop on a road within 10m before or\nafter a safety zone. The example diagram in s 190 shows a vehicle stopped so part\nof the vehicle is within 10m of the zone. For s 190, the vehicle is taken to be stopped\nwithin 10m of the zone.\n(3) A driver stops or parks on or across a driveway or other way of access\nfor vehicles if the driver stops or parks the driver’s vehicle so that any\npart of the vehicle is on or across the driveway or way of access.\n","sortOrder":441},{"sectionNumber":"351","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to left and right","content":"351 Reference to left and right\n(1) In applying this regulation to a person, a reference to left is a reference\nto—\n(a) in relation to the person—the left-hand side of the person; or\n(b) in relation to a line, sign or anything else—the left-hand side of\nthe line, sign or other thing when viewed from the person’s\nperspective.\n(2) In applying this regulation to a person, a reference to right is a\nreference to—\n(a) in relation to the person—the right-hand side of the person; or\n(b) in relation to a line, sign or anything else—the right-hand side\nof the line, sign or other thing when viewed from the person’s\nperspective.\n(3) A driver drives to the left, or right, of a line, sign or anything else only\nif the driver’s vehicle is completely to the left, or right, of the line,\nsign or other thing.\n\n","sortOrder":442},{"sectionNumber":"352","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to stopping as near as practicable to place","content":"352 Reference to stopping as near as practicable to place\nA requirement in this regulation for a driver to stop as near as\npracticable to a place is not complied with only because the driver\nstops behind a vehicle that has stopped at the place.\nIf a driver stops behind a vehicle that has stopped at a stop sign or stop line in\naccordance with s 67, s 68 or s 121, the driver must, after the vehicle has proceeded,\nstop at the stop sign or stop line in accordance with the section.\n","sortOrder":443},{"sectionNumber":"353","sectionType":"section","heading":"Reference to pedestrian crossing road","content":"353 Reference to pedestrian crossing road\n(1) If a driver who is turning from a road at an intersection is required to\ngive way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is\nentering, the driver is only required to give way to the pedestrian if\nthe pedestrian’s line of travel in crossing the road is essentially\nperpendicular to the edges of the road the driver is entering—the\ndriver is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the\nroad the driver is leaving.\n(2) In this regulation, a reference to a pedestrian crossing a road includes\na reference to a person who is crossing only part of a road (for\nexample, a person walking to a safety zone or a median strip, or to\nthe middle of a road to display a hand-held stop sign).\n\nAbbreviations and symbols Schedule 1\nSchedule 1 Abbreviations and symbols\n(see s 347)\ncolumn 1\nitem\ncolumn 2\nabbreviation/symbol\ncolumn 3\nmeaning\n1 MON Monday\n2 TUE Tuesday\n3 WED Wednesday\n4 THU Thursday\n5 FRI Friday\n6 SAT Saturday\n7 SUN Sunday\n8 JAN January\n9 FEB February\n10 MAR March\n11 APR April\n12 JUN June\n13 JUL July\n14 AUG August\n15 SEP September\n16 OCT October\n17 NOV November\n18 DEC December\n19 AM the time after midnight and ending at noon\n20 PM the time after noon and ending at midnight\n21 HOLS holidays\n22 MAX maximum\n23 MINS minutes\n\nSchedule 1 Abbreviations and symbols\ncolumn 1\nitem\ncolumn 2\nabbreviation/symbol\ncolumn 3\nmeaning\n24 PUB Public\n25 VEH Vehicle\n26 t Tonnes\n27 m Metres\n28 km kilometres\n29 km/h kilometres per hour\n30 ° Degree\n\n","sortOrder":444},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 2","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Standard or commonly used","content":"Schedule 2 Standard or commonly used\ntraffic signs\n(see s 316)\nArrester bed sign\nBicycle parking sign\n(s 201)\nBridge load limit (gross mass) sign\n\nBuses must enter sign\n(s 107)\nChildren crossing flag\nChildren’s crossing sign\n\nClearance sign\n(s 102)\nClearway sign\n(s 176)\nEmergency stopping lane only sign\n(s 95)\nEnd bicycle lane sign\n(s 153)\n\nEnd clearway sign\n(s 176)\nEnd keep left unless overtaking sign\nEnd no bicycles sign\n(s 252)\nEnd no overtaking or passing sign\n(s 93)\n\nEnd no parking area sign\nEnd no stopping area sign\nEnd parking area sign\nEnd road access sign\nEnd separated footpath sign\n\nEnd shared path sign\n(s 242)\nEnd speed limit sign\nEnd tram lane sign\nEnd tramway sign\n(s 155A)\n\n(End transit lane (T2) sign)\n(End transit lane (T3) sign)\nEnd trucks and buses low gear sign\nEnd truck lane sign\nEnd trucks use left lane sign\nGive way sign\n(s 69, s 70, s 71, s 122)\n\nGross load limit sign\nHook turn only sign\n(s 34)\nKeep left sign\n(s 99)\nKeep left unless overtaking sign\n\nKeep right sign\nLeft lane must turn left sign\nLeft turn on red after stopping sign\n(s 59)\n\nLow clearance sign\n(s 102)\nMail zone sign\n(s 186)\nMedian turning lane sign\n(s 86)\nMinibus zone sign\n(s 184)\n\nMotorbike parking sign\n(s 202)\nNo bicycles sign\nNo buses sign\n(s 106)\nNo hook turn by bicycles sign\n(s 36)\nNo overtaking on bridge sign\n(s 94)\n\nNo overtaking or passing sign\n(s 93)\nNo pedestrians sign\n(s 228)\n\nNo trucks sign\n(s 104)\nNo turns sign\n(s 90)\n\nPark in bays only sign\n(s 211)\nPedestrian crossing sign\n(s 81)\nPedestrians may cross diagonally sign\n(s 230, s 234)\nPeople with disabilities parking sign\n\nPermissive parking sign displaying a\npeople with disabilities symbol\nPermissive parking sign displaying a\npeople with disabilities symbol\n\nRight lane must turn right sign\nRoundabout sign\n(s 109)\nSafety ramp sign\nSafety zone sign\n(s 162, s 190)\nSeparated footpath sign\n(s 239, s 252)\n\nShared path sign\n(s 242, s 252)\nSlow vehicle turn out lane sign\nSpeed derestriction sign\nSpeed limit sign\n(s 21, s 316)\nSpeed limit sign\n(s 21, s 316)\n\nStop here on red arrow sign\nStop here on red signal sign\nStop sign\n(s 67, s 68, s 121)\nTraffic light-stop sign\n(s 63)\nTram lane sign\n\nTramway sign\n(s 155A)\n(Transit lane (T2) sign)\n(Transit lane (T3) sign)\nTruck lane sign\n\nTrucks use left lane sign\nTruck zone sign\n(s 180)\nTwo-way sign\n(s 98, s 132, s 136)\nU-turn permitted sign\n(s 40)\nWorks zone sign\n(s 181)\n\n(see s 316)\nNote The traffic signs in this schedule are alternative versions of the signs in\nsch 2. These signs are not included in the Australian Standard\nAS1742 (Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices), but are still in use\nin some jurisdictions.\n\nBuses must enter sign\n(s 107)\nChildren’s crossing sign\n\nEnd bicycle lane sign\n(s 153)\n\nEnd keep left unless overtaking sign\n\nEnd separated footpath sign\nEnd shared path sign\n(s 242)\nEnd speed limit sign\n\nEnd tram lane sign\nEnd truck lane sign\nEnd trucks and buses low gear sign\n\nKeep right sign\nLeft lane must turn left sign\n\nMedian turning lane sign\n(s 86)\nNo bicycles sign\n\nNo overtaking on bridge sign\n(s 94)\n\nNo wheeled recreational devices or toys\nsign\n(s 240A)\nNo wheeled recreational devices or toys\nsign\n(s 240A)\nPedestrians may cross diagonally sign\n(s 230, 234)\n\nRight lane must turn right sign\n\nSeparated footpath sign\n(s 239, s 252)\nShared path sign\n(s 242, s 252)\nStop here on red signal sign\n\nTram lane sign\n\nTruck arrester bed\nTruck arrester bed\n\nTrucks use left lane sign\nTruck zone sign\n(s 180)\nTwo-way sign\n(s 98, s 132, s 136)\nWorks zone sign\n(s 181)\n\nSymbols and traffic-related items Schedule 4\n","sortOrder":445},{"sectionNumber":"Sch 4","sectionType":"schedule","heading":"Symbols and traffic-related","content":"Schedule 4 Symbols and traffic-related\nitems\n(see s 320)\nDo not overtake turning vehicle sign\n(s 28, s 32, s 143)\nDo not overtake turning vehicle sign\n(s 28, s 32, s 143)\nElectric-powered vehicle symbol\n(s 203B)\nElectric-powered vehicle charging road\nmarking\n(s 203C)\nFire hydrant indicator (example)\nFire hydrant indicator (example)\n\nSchedule 4 Symbols and traffic-related items\nFire plug indicator (example)\nGive way to buses sign\n(s 77)\nGreen bicycle symbol\n(s 260)\nGreen pedestrian symbol\n(s 231)\nPeople with disabilities symbol\nPeople with disabilities symbol\n\nSymbols and traffic-related items Schedule 4\nRed bicycle symbol\n(s 260)\nRed pedestrian symbol\n(s 231, s 235A)\nWhite B light\n(s 285)\nWhite T light\n(s 278)\nYellow bicycle symbol\n(s 261)\n\n(see s 3)\nNote 1 The Legislation Act contains definitions and other provisions relevant to\nthis regulation.\nNote 2 For example, the Legislation Act, dict, pt 1 defines the following terms:\n• ambulance service\n• AS\n• AS/NZS\n• Commonwealth\n• contravene\n• corrections officer\n• exercise\n• fire and rescue service\n• medical practitioner\n• police officer\n• public holiday\n• rural fire service\n• SES\n• the Territory.\nNote 3 Terms used in this regulation have the same meaning that they have in\nthe Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Act 1999\n(see Legislation Act, s 148). For example, the following terms are\ndefined in the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)\nAct 1999, dict:\n• authorised person\n• indicated on\n• prescribed traffic control device (see also Road Transport (Safety\nand Traffic Management) Regulation 2017, s 11)\n• traffic offence detection device.\n\nNote 4 The Road Transport (General) Act 1999 contains definitions relevant to\nthis regulation. For example, the following terms are defined in the Road\nTransport (General) Act 1999, dictionary:\n• another jurisdiction\n• bicycle\n• combination\n• jurisdiction\n• learner licence\n• provisional licence\n• responsible person\n• ride\n• road\n• road related area\n• road transport authority (or authority) (see s 16)\n• trailer\n• use (in relation to a vehicle).\nadjacent land, for a road, means land next to the road (whether or not\nit adjoins the road), but does not include a road or road related area.\nADR—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nRegulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle standards), section 1.10.\naffixed to, in relation to a vehicle—see section 300 (7).\nalcohol interlock device—see section 221 (2).\nangle parking means parking in accordance with section 210.\napproaching, for a driver, means approaching from any direction.\napproved bicycle helmet means a protective helmet for bicycle riders\napproved by the road transport authority under the Road Transport\n(Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 2017, section 73 (1) (a).\napproved child restraint means a child restraint approved by the road\ntransport authority under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nManagement) Regulation 2017, section 73 (1) (c).\n\napproved child safety harness means a child safety harness approved\nby the road transport authority under the Road Transport (Safety and\nTraffic Management) Regulation 2017, section 73 (1) (d).\napproved e-payment method—see the Road Transport (Safety and\nTraffic Management) Regulation 2017, section 36.\napproved seatbelt means a seatbelt that complies with ADR 4 or\nADR 68.\narea includes—\n(a) a bridge; and\n(b) a network of roads; and\n(c) a slip lane.\narea of operations, for a parking authority—see the Road Transport\n(Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 2017, section 33.\navailable, for an approved child restraint in a motor vehicle, for\ndivision 16.3 (Requirements for seatbelts and seating positions—\npassengers under 16 years old)—see section 266 (1) (a).\naxle group—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nbicycle crossing light means a green bicycle crossing light, yellow\nbicycle crossing light or red bicycle crossing light.\nbicycle crossing lights means a device designed to show a bicycle\ncrossing light, or 2 or more bicycle crossing lights at different times.\nbicycle hook turn storage area means an area between an intersection\nand a marked foot crossing, or if there is no marked foot crossing, a\nstop line, before the intersection that has painted on it 1 or more\nbicycle symbols and 1 or more right traffic lane arrows, and includes\nany line that delineates the right side of the area, and any line that\ndelineates the left side of the area that is not also a stop line or part of\na marked foot crossing and excludes any bicycle storage area.\nbicycle lane—see section 153 (4).\n\nbicycle path—see section 239 (4).\nbicycle path road marking—see section 239 (4).\nbicycle storage area—\n(a) means an area of a road before an intersection with traffic\nlights—\n(i) that has painted on it 1 or more bicycle symbols; and\n(ii) that is between 2 parallel stop lines, regardless of whether\nthe lines are of equal length; and\n(iii) that opens out from a bicycle lane; but\n(b) does not include any stop line.\nbicycle symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a bicycle.\nbicycle trailer—see section 257 (2).\nB light means a red, white or yellow B light.\nB lights means a device designed to show a B light, or 2 or more\nB lights at different times.\nbuilt-up area, in relation to a length of road, means an area in which\neither of the following is present for a distance of at least 500m or, if\nthe length of road is shorter than 500m, for the whole road:\n(a) buildings, not over 100m apart, on land next to the road;\n(b) street lights not over 100m apart.\nbus means a motor vehicle built mainly to carry people that seats over\n12 adults (including the driver), but does not include a light rail\nbus lane—see section 154 (2).\nbus zone—see section 183 (3).\n\ncentre of the road, for a driver on a two-way road, means the far right\nside of the part of the road used by traffic travelling in the same\ndirection as the driver.\nchanges direction—see section 45 (1).\nchanges direction to the left—see section 45 (2).\nchanges direction to the right—see section 45 (3).\nchildren’s crossing—see section 80 (6).\ncontinuing road, for a T-intersection, means the road (except a road\nrelated area) that meets the terminating road at the T-intersection.\ncorrections vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person who is—\n(a) a corrections officer; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the person’s duties as a\ncorrections officer.\ncrash includes—\n(a) a collision between 2 or more vehicles; or\n(b) any other accident or incident involving a vehicle in which a\nperson is killed or injured, property is damaged, or an animal in\nsomeone’s charge is killed or injured.\ncrossing means a children’s crossing, level crossing, marked foot\ncrossing or pedestrian crossing.\ndemand responsive service vehicle—see the Road Transport (Public\nPassenger Services) Act 2001, section 81.\ndividing line means a road marking formed by a line, or 2 parallel\nlines, whether broken or continuous, designed to indicate the parts of\nthe road to be used by vehicles travelling in opposite directions.\ndividing strip means an area or structure that divides a road\nlengthways, but does not include a nature strip, bicycle path, footpath\nor shared path.\n\ndrawbar—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\ndrive includes be in control of.\ndriver—see section 16 and section 19.\ndriver’s vehicle, for a driver, means the vehicle being driven by the\ndriver.\nedge line, for a road, means a line marked along the road at or near\nthe far left or far right side of the road (except any road related area\nof the road).\nelectric-powered vehicle charging parking sign—see\nsection 203C (2).\nelectric-powered vehicle parking sign—see section 203B (2).\nelectric vehicle parking sign includes—\n(a) an electric-powered vehicle charging parking sign; and\n(b) an electric-powered vehicle parking sign.\nemergency stopping lane—see section 95 (3).\nemergency vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person who is—\n(a) an emergency worker; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the person’s duties as an\nemergency worker.\nemergency worker means—\n(a) a member of the ambulance service rendering or providing\ntransport for sick or injured people; or\n(b) a member of the ambulance service, the fire and rescue service,\nthe rural fire service or the SES providing transport in an\nemergency; or\n\n(c) a person who is declared by the road transport authority under\nthe Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)\nRegulation 2017, section 73 (2) (Approval etc by road transport\nauthority) to be an emergency worker.\nenclosed, for a part of a trailer—see section 298 (3).\nenter an intersection or crossing, for the driver of a vehicle or a train,\nmeans enter the intersection or crossing with any part of the vehicle\nor train.\nfootpath means an area open to the public that is designated for, or\nhas as 1 of its main uses, use by pedestrians.\nforward facing, for a child restraint, for division 16.3 (Requirements\nfor seatbelts and seating positions—passengers under 16 years old)—\nsee section 266 (2) (a).\nfreeway—see section 177 (2).\nfront fog light—see section 217 (2).\ngive way, for a driver or pedestrian, means—\n(a) if the driver or pedestrian is stopped—remain stationary until it\nis safe to proceed; or\n(b) in any other case—slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a\ncollision.\ngive way line means a broken line that is marked across all or part of\na road and is not part of a marked foot crossing.\ngreen bicycle crossing light means an illuminated green bicycle\nsymbol as shown in the diagram in schedule 4.\ngreen pedestrian light means—\n(a) an illuminated green pedestrian symbol; or\n(b) the word ‘walk’ illuminated in green (whether or not flashing).\ngreen pedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a\npedestrian as shown in the diagram in green in schedule 4.\n\ngreen traffic arrow means an illuminated green arrow.\ngreen traffic light means an illuminated green disc.\ngross vehicle mass—see GVM.\nGVM (or gross vehicle mass), for a vehicle, means the maximum\nloaded mass of the vehicle—\n(a) specified by the manufacturer on an identification plate on the\n(b) if there is no specification by the manufacturer on an\nidentification plate on the vehicle or if the specification is not\nappropriate because the vehicle has been modified—certified by\nthe road transport authority or the corresponding authority of\nanother jurisdiction.\nhalfway around, for a roundabout—see section 110.\nhazard warning lights—\n(a) means a pair of yellow direction indicator lights that display\nregular flashes of light at the same time, and at the same rate, as\neach other, fitted to the vehicle under—\n(i) for a light vehicle—the Road Transport (Vehicle\nRegistration) Regulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle\nstandards); and\n(ii) for a heavy vehicle—the Heavy Vehicle National Law\n(ACT); but\n(b) does not include warning lights fitted, under a law mentioned in\nparagraph (a), to a bus used for carrying children.\nheavy vehicle—see the Heavy Vehicle National Law (ACT),\nsection 6.\nhigh-beam, for a headlight fitted to a vehicle, means that the\nheadlight is built or adjusted so, when the vehicle is standing on level\nground, the top of the main beam of light projected is above the\nheadlight’s low-beam.\n\nhire car—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services)\nAct 2001, section 67.\nhook turn—see section 34 and section 35.\nintersection means the area where 2 or more roads (except any road\nrelated area) meet, and includes—\n(a) any area of the roads where vehicles travelling on different roads\nmight collide; and\n(b) the place where any slip lane between the roads meets the road\ninto which traffic on the slip lane may turn;\nbut does not include any road related area.\nkeep clear marking—see section 96 (2).\nland includes premises or a part of premises.\nleft, for a person or in relation to something—see section 351 (1)\nand (3).\nleft change of direction signal means a change of direction signal\ngiven in accordance with section 47.\nleft traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a direction to the left.\nlength, of road, includes—\n(a) a marked lane or a part of a marked lane; and\n(b) another part of a length of road.\nlevel crossing—see section 0 (1).\nlift and tow trailer means a trailer consisting of an axle group and a\ndrawbar designed to support 1 axle group of a vehicle under tow.\nlight rail stop—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services)\nRegulation 2002, dictionary.\nlight vehicle—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\n\nline of traffic means—\n(a) 2 or more vehicles travelling in line along a road (whether or not\nthe vehicles are actually moving, but not including vehicles in a\nmarked lane); or\n(b) a single vehicle, other than a vehicle that is part of a line of\ntraffic under paragraph (a), that is travelling along a road\n(whether or not the vehicle is actually moving, but not including\na vehicle in a marked lane).\n1 A vehicle travelling along a road (except in a marked lane) in line behind\nanother vehicle (the leading vehicle) forms part of a line of traffic with the\nleading vehicle.\n2 A vehicle travelling along a road (except in a marked lane) with no other\nvehicles in the vicinity constitutes a line of traffic by itself.\n3 Two vehicles travelling in the same direction on a road (except in a marked\nlane), but not in line, are 2 lines of traffic.\nloading zone—see section 179 (3).\nlow-beam, for a headlight fitted to a vehicle, means that the headlight\nis built or adjusted so, when the vehicle is standing on level ground,\nthe top of the main beam of light projected is—\n(a) not higher than the centre of the headlight, when measured 8m\nin front of the vehicle; and\n(b) not over 1m higher than the level where the vehicle is standing,\nwhen measured 25m in front of the vehicle.\nmail zone—see section 186 (3).\n\nmarked foot crossing means an area of a road—\n(a) at a place with pedestrian lights facing pedestrians crossing the\nroad and traffic lights facing vehicles driving on the road; and\n(b) indicated by a different road surface, or between 2 parallel\ncontinuous or broken lines, or rows of studs or markers, on the\nroad surface substantially from 1 side of the road to the other.\nExample—different road surface\nThe area of road could be indicated by brick paving across a bitumen road.\nmarked lane means an area of a road marked by continuous or broken\nlines, or rows of studs or markers, on the road surface that is designed\nfor use by a single line of vehicles.\nmechanical signalling device, in relation to a vehicle, means a device\nthat—\n(a) is fitted to the vehicle; and\n(b) is a mechanical signalling device or turn signal that complies\nwith—\n(i) for a light vehicle—the Road Transport (Vehicle\nRegistration) Regulation 2000, schedule 1 (Light vehicle\nstandards); and\n(ii) for a heavy vehicle—the Heavy Vehicle National Law\n(ACT).\nmedian strip means a dividing strip designed or developed to separate\nvehicles travelling in opposite directions.\nmedian strip parking area means a parking area on or in a median\nstrip.\n\nmedical certificate means a certificate that—\n(a) is signed by a medical practitioner; and\n(b) states a date of issue; and\n(c) states an expiry date that is not more than 1 year after the date\nof issue; and\n(d) has not expired.\nmetered parking area—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nmetered parking sign—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nmetered parking space—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nminibus zone—see section 184 (2).\nmobile device—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nManagement) Act 1999, section 25 (10).\nmobility parking scheme authority—\n(a) has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Safety and\nTraffic Management) Regulation 2017; and\n(b) includes a permit (however described) issued under the law of\nanother jurisdiction that includes a people with disabilities\nmotorbike means a motor vehicle with 2 wheels, and includes—\n(a) a two-wheeled motor vehicle with a sidecar attached to it that is\nsupported by a third wheel; and\n(b) a motor vehicle with 3 wheels that is ridden in the same way as\na motor vehicle with 2 wheels.\n\nmotor vehicle means a vehicle that is built to be propelled by a motor\nthat forms part of the vehicle.\nNote Vehicle does not include a personal mobility device (see s 15).\nmulti-lane road, for a driver, means a one-way road, or a two-way\nroad, with 2 or more marked lanes (except bicycle lanes) that are—\n(a) on the side of the dividing line or median strip where the driver\nis driving; and\n(b) for the use of vehicles travelling in the same direction.\nnature strip means an area between—\n(a) a road (as defined in the Road Transport (General) Act 1999,\ndictionary); and\n(b) adjacent land;\nbut does not include a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\nnight means the period between sunset on 1 day and sunrise on the\nnext day.\nno bicycles road marking means a road marking consisting of a\nbicycle symbol with a diagonal line across it, or the words ‘no\nbicycles’, or both the symbol and the words.\nobstruction includes a traffic hazard, but does not include a vehicle\nonly because the vehicle is stopped in traffic or is travelling more\nslowly than other vehicles.\noncoming vehicle, for a driver, means a vehicle approaching the\ndriver travelling in the opposite direction to the direction in which the\none-way road means a road with 1 or more marked lanes, all of which\nare for the use of vehicles travelling in the same direction.\noverhead lane control device means an overhead lane control sign or\nsignal.\n\noverhead lane control sign means a traffic sign displaying a red\ndiagonal cross that is installed on a structure over a road or part of a\noverhead lane control signal means—\n(a) an illuminated red diagonal cross (whether or not flashing); or\n(b) an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow pointing\ndownwards or indicating 1 or more directions.\noverhead lane control signals means a device on a structure over a\nroad, or part of a road, that is designed to display an overhead lane\ncontrol signal, or 2 or more overhead lane control signals.\noversize vehicle means a vehicle with a dimension that, including the\ndimension of any load, exceeds a relevant dimension limit under—\n(a) the Heavy Vehicle National Law (ACT); or\n(b) the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2000.\novertake, for a driver, means the action of—\n(a) approaching from behind another driver travelling in the same\nmarked lane or line of traffic; and\n(b) moving into an adjacent marked lane or part of the road on\nwhich there is room for a line of traffic (whether or not the lane\nor part of the road is for drivers travelling in the same direction);\nand\n(c) passing the other driver while travelling in the adjacent marked\nlane or line of traffic.\npainted island means an area of a road—\n(a) that has painted on it stripes or chevrons in white or another\ncolour that contrasts with the colour of the road; and\n(b) that is surrounded either—\n(i) by a line or lines (whether broken or continuous); or\n\n(ii) partly by a combination of a line or lines (whether broken\nor continuous) and partly by a kerb or by a structure on or\nnext to the road.\npark, for a driver, includes stop and allow the driver’s vehicle to stay\n(whether or not the driver leaves the vehicle).\nparking area means a length of road or area designed for parking\nvehicles.\nparking area for people with disabilities—see section 203 (2).\nparking authority—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nparking bay means an area for parking a single vehicle (other than a\ncombination) that is indicated by—\n(a) road markings consisting of lines, studs or other similar devices;\nor\n(b) a different road surface.\nparking control sign means any of the following:\n(a) a bicycle parking sign;\n(b) a bus zone sign;\n(c) a clearway sign;\n(ca) an electric vehicle parking sign;\n(d) a loading zone sign;\n(e) a mail zone sign;\n(f) a minibus zone sign;\n(g) a motorbike parking sign;\n(h) a no parking sign;\n(i) a no stopping sign;\n(j) a people with disabilities parking sign;\n\n(k) a permissive parking sign;\n(l) a permit zone sign;\n(m) a taxi zone sign;\n(n) a truck zone sign;\n(o) a works zone sign.\nparking meter—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nparking meter hood—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nManagement) Regulation 2017, section 11.\nparking permit—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nparking ticket—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nparking ticket machine—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\npart of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles means the\narea of the road, except—\n(a) any road related area; and\n(b) if the road has 1 or more service roads—the area of any service\npedestrian—see section 18.\npedestrian crossing—see section 81 (3).\npedestrian level crossing—see section 235A (1).\npedestrian lights means a device designed to show, at different times,\na green pedestrian light or red pedestrian light.\npedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a\npedestrian.\n\npeople with disabilities road marking—see section 203 (2) (c).\npeople with disabilities symbol means a picture of a person seated in\na wheelchair as shown in the diagrams in schedule 4.\npermit zone—see section 185 (2).\npersonal mobility device—see section 18A.\npolice vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person who is—\n(a) a police officer; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the police officer’s duties as\na police officer.\nportable warning triangle means a portable warning triangle that—\n(a) is in the form of an equilateral triangle; and\n(b) has a minimum height of 300mm; and\n(c) has, on the front and back, red reflecting sheeting or material, or\n9 red reflectors arranged in a triangular shape, causing a red\nreflection that would be clearly visible to a driver at night when\nthe upper beam of light from any headlight on the\nvehicle (complying with the relevant provisions to the Road\nTransport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2000), schedule 1\n(Light vehicle standards) is projected directly onto the sign from\na distance of 200m; and\n(d) is of a robust and durable construction, capable of being readily\nerected to stand in an upright position and capable of remaining\nunaffected (to any material degree) by any reasonable force of\nwind or variation in weather conditions.\npostal vehicle means a vehicle driven by a person who is—\n(a) a postal worker for the provision; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the postal worker’s duties as\na postal worker.\n\npostal worker means a person who delivers letter mail and parcels\nwithin Australia, on behalf of Australia Post, as an employee or as a\ncontractor.\npublic bus—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services)\nAct 2001, dictionary.\npublic minibus means a vehicle that is declared to be a public minibus\nunder another territory law.\nrear fog light—see section 217 (2).\nrearward facing, for a child restraint, for division 16.3 (Requirements\nfor seatbelts and seating positions—passengers under 16 years old)—\nsee section 266 (2) (b).\nred bicycle crossing light means an illuminated red bicycle symbol\n(whether or not flashing) as shown in the diagram in schedule 4.\nred B light means an illuminated red B.\nred pedestrian light means—\n(a) an illuminated red pedestrian symbol (whether or not flashing);\nor\n(b) the words ‘dont walk’ illuminated in red (whether or not\nflashing).\nred pedestrian symbol means a symbol consisting of a picture of a\npedestrian as shown in the diagram in red in schedule 4.\nred T light means an illuminated red T.\nred traffic arrow means an illuminated red arrow.\nred traffic light means an illuminated red disc.\nregular route service—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger\nServices) Act 2001, section 12 (What is a regular route service?).\nrelevant parking fee, for parking on a length of road or in an area—\nsee the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)\nRegulation 2017, dictionary.\n\nrider—see section 17.\nrideshare vehicle—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger\nServices) Act 2001, section 60A.\nright, for a person or in relation to something—see section 351 (2)\nand (3).\nright change of direction signal means a change of direction signal\ngiven in accordance with section 49.\nright traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a direction to the right.\nroad—see section 12.\nroad marking means a word, figure, symbol, mark, line, raised\nmarker or stud, or something else, on the surface of a road to direct\nor warn traffic, but does not include a painted island.\nroad train—see the Heavy Vehicle National Law (ACT), section 5.\nroad user—see section 14.\nroundabout—see section 0.\nsafety zone—see section 162 (2).\nschool zone—see section 23 (2).\nsemitrailer—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\nseparated footpath—see section 239 (4).\nseparated footpath road marking—see section 239 (4).\n\nservice road means the part of a road that—\n(a) is separated from other parts of the road by a dividing strip that\nis not designed or developed, wholly or mainly, to separate\nvehicles travelling in opposite directions; and\n(b) is—\n(i) designed or developed to be used, wholly or mainly, by\ntraffic servicing adjacent land; or\n(ii) indicated to be a service road by information on or with a\ntraffic control device on the road.\nshared path—see section 242 (2).\nshared zone—see section 24 (2).\nsheriff’s officer—see the Court Procedures Act 2004, section 40.\nsheriff’s vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person who is—\n(a) a sheriff’s officer; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of the sheriff’s officer’s duties\nas a sheriff’s officer.\nshoulder, of a road—\n(a) includes any part of the road that is not designed to be used by\nmotor vehicles in travelling along the road, and includes—\n(i) for a kerbed road—any part of the kerb; and\n(ii) for a sealed road—any unsealed part of the road, and any\nsealed part of the road outside an edge line on the road; but\n(b) does not include a bicycle path, footpath or shared path.\nslip lane means an area of road for vehicles turning left that is\nseparated, at some point, from other parts of the road by a painted\nisland or traffic island, but not by a median strip.\n\nspecial purpose lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked\nlane, that is a bicycle lane, bus lane, emergency stopping lane, tram\nlane, transit lane or truck lane.\nspeed limited area—see section 22 (2).\nstop, for a driver, includes park but does not include stop to reverse\nthe driver’s vehicle into a parking bay or other parking space.\nstop line means a continuous line that—\n(a) is marked across all or part of a road; and\n(b) is not part of a marked foot crossing, a keep clear marking or a\nbicycle storage area for hook turns.\nstraight ahead includes substantially straight ahead.\nsuitable, for an approved child restraint or approved seatbelt, for\ndivision 16.3 (Requirements for seatbelts and seating positions—\npassengers under 16 years old)—see section 266 (1) (b).\nT-intersection means an intersection, other than a roundabout, where\n2 roads meet (whether or not at right angles) and 1 of the roads ends.\nT light means a red T light, white T light or yellow T light.\nT lights means a device designed to show a T light, or 2 or more\nT lights at different times.\ntaxi—see the Road Transport (Public Passenger Services) Act 2001,\nsection 45 (Meaning of taxi).\ntaxi zone—see section 182 (2).\nterminating road, for a T-intersection, means—\n(a) if a road (except a road related area) at the intersection is\ndesignated by traffic signs or road markings, or in another way,\nas a road that ends at the intersection—that road; or\n(b) in any other case—a road (except a road related area) that ends\nat the intersection.\n\nticket parking area—see the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic\nticket parking sign means a permissive parking sign with the word\n‘ticket’ on or with the sign.\nticket parking space means a ticket parking space under the Road\nsection 39.\ntow truck—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\ntractor—see the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration)\ntraffic includes vehicles and pedestrians.\ntraffic arrow means a green, white or red traffic arrow, or a yellow\ntraffic arrow (whether or not flashing).\ntraffic arrows means a device designed to show a traffic arrow,\nor 2 or more traffic arrows at different times.\ntraffic control device means a traffic sign, road marking, traffic\nsignals, or other device, to direct or warn traffic on, entering or\nleaving a road.\ntraffic island means a structure on a road to direct traffic, but does\nnot include a road marking or painted island.\ntraffic lane arrows means a traffic sign, road marking or device that\ndisplays arrows indicating 1 or more directions and is designed to\napply to 1 or more marked lanes, but does not include traffic arrows.\ntraffic light means a green traffic light, or a red or yellow traffic light\n(whether or not flashing).\ntraffic lights means a device designed to show a traffic light, or 2 or\nmore traffic lights in a vertical arrangement and at different times,\nand includes any traffic arrows installed with or near the device.\n\ntraffic lights pole means a pole or other structure on which traffic\nlights are installed.\ntraffic-related item means any of the following:\n(a) a do not overtake turning vehicle sign;\n(b) a give way to buses sign;\n(c) a fire hydrant indicator or fire plug indicator.\ntraffic sign means a board, plate, screen, or another device, whether\nor not illuminated, displaying words, figures, symbols or anything\nelse to direct or warn traffic on, entering or leaving a road, and\nincludes a children crossing flag, a hand-held stop sign, a parking\ncontrol sign and a variable illuminated message sign, but does not\ninclude traffic signals.\ntraffic signals means bicycle crossing lights, B lights, overhead lane\ncontrol signals, pedestrian lights, T lights, traffic arrows, traffic lights\nor twin red or yellow lights.\ntram includes a light rail vehicle.\ntram lane—see section 155 (3).\ntram recovery vehicle means a vehicle used by a tram operator to\naccess and recover disabled trams for which the tram operator is\nresponsible.\ntram stop—\n(a) means a place on a road at which there is a sign indicating that\ntrams will stop to enable people to get on or off; and\n(b) includes a light rail stop.\ntram tracks includes a rail designed for a light rail vehicle to run on.\ntramway—see section 155A (3) and (4).\ntransit lane—see section 156 (2).\n\ntravelling along tram tracks, for a bus, means being driven along the\narea where the tram tracks are laid.\ntrolley includes a shopping trolley and any other kind of handcart.\ntruck means a motor vehicle with a GVM over 4.5t, except a bus,\ntram or tractor.\ntruck lane—see section 157 (2).\ntruck zone—see section 180 (2).\nturning lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane, for\nvehicles travelling in one direction to which—\n(a) a left turn only sign, a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic\nlane arrows apply; or\n(b) a right turn only sign, a right lane must turn right sign or right\ntraffic lane arrows apply; or\n(c) a U-turn permitted sign or U-turn traffic lane arrows apply.\nturn line means a road marking, at an intersection, consisting of a line\n(whether broken or continuous) that is designed to indicate how a turn\nis to be made at the intersection.\ntwin red lights means a device showing, in a horizontal or diagonal\narrangement, 2 illuminated red discs that flash alternately.\ntwin yellow lights means a device showing, in a horizontal or\ndiagonal arrangement, 2 illuminated yellow discs that flash\nalternately.\ntwo-way road means a road for use by vehicles travelling in opposite\ndirections.\nU-turn means a turn made by a driver so that the driver’s vehicle\nfaces in approximately the opposite direction from which it was\nfacing immediately before the turn was made, but does not include a\nturn made at a roundabout.\n\nU-turn traffic lane arrows means traffic lane arrows applying to a\nmarked lane that indicate only a U-turn direction.\nvariable illuminated message device means a device designed to\ndisplay, and to change or turn off from time to time by electronic or\noptical means, illuminated words, figures, symbols, or anything else,\nto direct or warn traffic on, entering or leaving a road, but does not\ninclude traffic signals.\nvariable illuminated message sign means the illuminated words,\nfigures, symbols, or other things, displayed at any relevant time on a\nvariable illuminated message device.\nvehicle—see section 15.\nwheelchair means a chair mounted on 2 or more wheels that is built\nto transport a person who is unable to walk or has difficulty in\nwalking, but does not include a pram, stroller or trolley.\nwheeled recreational device means a wheeled device, built to\ntransport a person, propelled by human power or gravity, and\nordinarily used for recreation or play, and—\n(a) includes rollerblades, rollerskates, a skateboard, scooter,\nunicycle or similar wheeled device; but\n(b) does not include a golf buggy, pram, stroller or trolley, personal\nmobility device or other motor-assisted device, a bicycle,\nwheelchair or wheeled toy.\nwheeled toy means a child’s pedal car, scooter or tricycle or a similar\ntoy (other than a motorised toy), but only when it is being used by a\nchild who is under 12 years old.\nwhite B light means an illuminated white B as shown in the diagram\nin schedule 4.\nwhite T light means an illuminated white T as shown in the diagram\nin schedule 4.\nwhite traffic arrow means an illuminated white arrow.\n\nwindow, in relation to a vehicle, includes any sunroof fitted to the\nwith, for information about the application of a traffic control device,\nincludes accompanying or reasonably associated with the device.\nworks zone—see section 181 (2).\nyellow bicycle crossing light means an illuminated yellow bicycle\nsymbol (whether or not flashing) as shown in the diagram in\nschedule 4.\nyellow B light means an illuminated yellow B.\nyellow T light means an illuminated yellow T.\nyellow traffic arrow means an illuminated yellow arrow.\nyellow traffic light means an illuminated yellow disc.\nyouth detention officer—see the Children and Young People\nAct 2008, dictionary.\nyouth detention vehicle means any vehicle driven by a person\nwho is—\n(a) a youth detention officer; and\n(b) driving the vehicle in the course of their duties as a youth\ndetention officer.\n\n1 About the endnotes\n1 About the endnotes\nAmending and modifying laws are annotated in the legislation history and the\namendment history. Current modifications are not included in the republished law\nbut are set out in the endnotes.\nNot all editorial amendments made under the Legislation Act 2001, part 11.3 are\nannotated in the amendment history. Full details of any amendments can be\nobtained from the Parliamentary Counsel’s Office.\nUncommenced amending laws are not included in the republished law. The details\nof these laws are underlined in the legislation history. Uncommenced expiries are\nunderlined in the legislation history and amendment history.\nIf all the provisions of the law have been renumbered, a table of renumbered\nprovisions gives details of previous and current numbering.\nThe endnotes also include a table of earlier republications.\n2 Abbreviation key\nA = Act NI = Notifiable instrument\nAF = Approved form o = order\nam = amended om = omitted/repealed\namdt = amendment ord = ordinance\nAR = Assembly resolution orig = original\nch = chapter par = paragraph/subparagraph\nCN = Commencement notice pres = present\ndef = definition prev = previous\nDI = Disallowable instrument (prev...) = previously\ndict = dictionary pt = part\ndisallowed = disallowed by the Legislative r = rule/subrule\nAssembly reloc = relocated\ndiv = division renum = renumbered\nexp = expires/expired R[X] = Republication No\nGaz = gazette RI = reissue\nhdg = heading s = section/subsection\nIA = Interpretation Act 1967 sch = schedule\nins = inserted/added sdiv = subdivision\nLA = Legislation Act 2001 SL = Subordinate law\nLR = legislation register sub = substituted\nLRA = Legislation (Republication) Act 1996 underlining = whole or part not commenced\nmod = modified/modification or to be expired\n\nLegislation history 3\n3 Legislation history\nRoad Transport (Road Rules) Regulation 2017 SL2017-43\nnotified LR 21 December 2017\ns 1, s 2 commenced 21 December 2017 (LA s 75 (1))\nremainder commenced 30 April 2018 (s 2)\nas amended by\nRegulation 2018 (No 1) SL2018-3 sch 1 pt 1.2\nnotified LR 12 April 2018\ns 1, s 2 commenced 12 April 2018 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 1 pt 1.2 commenced 30 April 2018 (s 2 (1) and see SL2017-43 s 2)\nRoad Transport Reform (Light Rail) Legislation Amendment Act 2018\nA2018-19 sch 1 pt 1.7\nnotified LR 17 May 2018\ns 1, s 2 commenced 17 May 2018 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 1 pt 1.7 commenced 24 May 2018 (s 2)\nRoad Transport (Road Rules) Amendment Regulation 2018 (No 1)\nnotified LR 11 October 2018\ns 1, s 2 commenced 11 October 2018 (LA s 75 (1))\ns 3, s 4 commenced 12 October 2018 (s 2 (2))\nremainder commenced 29 October 2018 (s 2 (1))\nRoad Transport (Road Rules) Amendment Regulation 2019 (No 1)\nSL2019-14 pt 3\nnotified LR 27 June 2019\ns 1, s 2 commenced 27 June 2019 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 3 commenced 1 July 2019 (s 2)\nRoad Transport Legislation Amendment Act 2019 A2019-21 pt 12\nnotified LR 8 August 2019\ns 1, s 2 commenced 8 August 2019 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 12 commenced 22 August 2019 (s 2 (4))\n\n3 Legislation history\nRoad Transport Legislation Amendment Regulation 2019 (No 1)\nSL2019-31 pt 2\nnotified LR 19 December 2019\ns 1, s 2 commenced 19 December 2019 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 2 commenced 20 December 2019 (s 2 (1))\nAct 2021 A2021-14 sch 1 pt 1.3\nnotified LR 1 July 2021\ns 1, s 2 commenced 1 July 2021 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 1 pt 1.3 commenced 12 August 2021 (s 2)\nRoad Transport Legislation Amendment Act 2022 A2022-3 pt 3\nnotified LR 30 March 2022\ns 1, s 2 commenced 30 March 2022 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 3 commenced 13 April 2022 (s 2)\nRoad Transport Legislation Amendment Act 2022 (No 2) A2022-5 pt 6\nnotified LR 13 April 2022\ns 1, s 2 commenced 13 April 2022 (LA s 75 (1))\ns 26 commenced 27 April 2022 (s 2 (1))\npt 6 remainder commenced 11 May 2022 (s 2 (2))\nElectoral and Road Safety Legislation Amendment Act 2023 A2023-43\npt 5\nnotified LR 15 November 2023\ns 1, s 2 commenced 15 November 2023 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 5 commenced 15 May 2024 (s 2 (3))\nRoad Transport (Road Rules) Amendment Regulation 2023 (No 1)\nSL2023-40\nnotified LR 18 December 2023\ns 1, s 2 commenced 18 December 2023 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 1 pt 1.2 commenced 25 May 2024 (s 2 (2) and see Road Safety\nLegislation Amendment Act 2024 A2024-20 s 2 (1))\nremainder commenced 21 December 2023 (s 2 (1))\nRoad Safety Legislation Amendment Act 2024 A2024-20 pt 7\nnotified LR 24 May 2024\ns 1, s 2 commenced 24 May 2024 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 7 commenced 25 May 2024 (s 2 (1))\n\nLegislation history 3\nRoad Safety Legislation Amendment Regulation 2024 (No 1)\nSL2024-11 pt 5\nnotified LR 28 June 2024\ns 1, s 2 commenced 28 June 2024 (LA s 75 (1))\npt 5 commenced 29 June 2024 (s 2 (1))\nAct 2025 A2025-21 sch 1 pt 1.2\nnotified LR 12 September 2025\ns 1, s 2 commenced 12 September 2025 (LA s 75 (1))\nsch 1 pt 1.2 commenced 3 November 2025 (s 2)\nRoad Transport (Road Rules) Amendment Regulation 2025 (No 1)\nSL2025-23\nnotified LR 30 October 2025\ns 1, s 2 commenced 30 October 2025 (LA s 75 (1))\ncommenced 3 November 2025 (s 2 (a))\n\nCommencement\ns 2 om LA s 89 (4)\nReferences to road include road related area\ns 12 sub SL2019-14 s 18\nMeaning of vehicle\ns 15 am A2019-21 s 95\nMeaning of personal mobility device\ns 18A ins A2019-21 s 96\nam SL2019-31 s 4\nMeaning of changes direction\ns 45 am SL2019-14 s 19, s 20\nGiving way at marked foot crossing (except at intersection) with flashing\nyellow traffic light\ns 65 am SL2019-14 s 21, s 22\nGiving way at intersection (except T-intersection or roundabout)\ns 72 am SL2019-14 s 23\nGiving way at T-intersection\ns 73 am SL2019-14 s 23\nGiving way at pedestrian crossing\ns 81 am SL2019-14 s 23\nOvertaking or passing vehicle at children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing\ns 82 am SL2019-14 s 24\nDriving in roundabout\ns 115 hdg sub SL2019-14 s 25\ns 115 am SL2019-14 s 26, s 27\nNo overtaking etc to left of vehicle\ns 141 am SL2019-14 s 28\nDriving within single marked lane or line of traffic\ns 146 am SL2019-14 s 29, s 30\nMoving from 1 marked lane to another marked lane across continuous line\nseparating lanes\ns 147 am SL2019-14 s 31\nMotorbike lane filtering\ns 151A am SL2018-19 s 4; SL2019-14 s 32, s 33\n\nTransit lane\ns 156 am SL2019-14 s 34, s 35\n(1) (a) (iv), (3) def zero emissions vehicle, (4) exp\n31 December 2023 (s 156 (4))\nApplication—pt 12—bicycles\ns 166 am A2023-43 s 89\nStopping on roads—heavy or long vehicle\ns 200 am SL2019-14 s 36\nStopping in parking area for people with disabilities\ns 203 am SL2019-31 s 5\nStopping in parking area for electric-powered vehicles\ns 203B ins A2022-5 s 24\nam SL2024-11 s 12\nStopping in parking area for charging of electric-powered vehicles\ns 203C ins A2022-5 s 24\nam SL2024-11 s 13\nTime extension for people with disabilities\ns 206 am SL2019-31 s 6; A2022-5 s 25\nSigns attached to vehicles parked in designated place\ndiv 12.12A hdg ins A2023-43 s 90\nVehicle parked in designated place must not have sign attached\ns 213SA ins A2023-43 s 90\nInterfering with parking permit and mobility parking scheme authority\ns 213U am SL2019-31 s 7, s 8\nUsing lights when driving at night or in hazardous weather conditions\ns 215 am SL2019-31 s 9\nUsing fog lights\ns 217 am SL2019-31 s 10\nPedestrian not to cause traffic hazard or obstruction\ns 236 am SL2018-19 ss 5-8; SL2019-31 s 11, s 12\nMeaning of scooter and motorised scooter\ns 244A om SL2019-31 s 13\nMotorised scooter not to be used\ns 244C om SL2019-31 s 13\nTravelling in or on personal mobility device on bicycle path or separated\nfootpath\ns 244FA ins SL2019-31 s 14\n\nSpeed limit travelling in or on personal mobility device\ns 244FB ins SL2019-31 s 14\nUse of mobile device in or on personal mobility device\ns 244GA ins SL2019-31 s 15\nam SL2023-40 s 4, amdt 1.3\nPerson travelling in or on personal mobility device must wear bicycle helmet\ns 244H am SL2019-31 s 16\nCarrying passenger in or on personal mobility device\ns 244HA ins SL2019-31 s 17\nChild using personal mobility device\ns 244HB ins SL2019-31 s 17\nWarning device—personal mobility device\ns 244I sub SL2019-31 s 18\nTravelling in or on personal mobility device—maintaining proper control\ns 244K ins A2022-3 s 7\nTravelling in or on personal mobility device without due care etc\ns 244L ins A2022-3 s 8\nBicycle helmet\ns 256 am SL2019-31 s 19\nRiding with person on bicycle trailer\ns 257 am SL2019-31 s 20\nProceeding when bicycle crossing at an intersection or another place on a\nroad\ns 262 hdg sub SL2019-14 s 37\ns 262 am SL2019-14 s 38\nProceeding when bicycle crossing light is green\ns 262A om SL2019-14 s 39\nApplication—pt 16\ndiv 16.1 hdg ins SL2025-23 s 4\nWearing seatbelts and seating positions—drivers and passengers\ndiv 16.2 hdg ins SL2025-23 s 5\nWearing seatbelt and seating position—driver\ns 264 sub SL2025-23 s 5\nWearing seatbelt and seating position—passenger 16 years old or older\ns 265 sub SL2025-23 s 5\nDriver to ensure passengers comply with seatbelt and seating position\nrequirements\ns 265A ins SL2025-23 s 5\n\ndiv 16.3 hdg ins SL2025-23 s 5\nDefinitions—div 16.3\ns 266 am SL2019-14 ss 40-42\nsub SL2025-23 s 5\nWearing seatbelts—passengers under 6 months old\ns 266C ins SL2025-23 s 5\nWearing seatbelts—passengers 6 months old or older but under 4 years old\ns 266D ins SL2025-23 s 5\nWearing seatbelts—passengers 4 years old or older but under 7 years old\ns 266E ins SL2025-23 s 5\nExemption for driver—passenger’s medical condition etc\ns 266F ins SL2025-23 s 5\nSeating position—passenger under 4 years old\ns 266G ins SL2025-23 s 5\nSeating position—passenger 4 years old or older but under 7 years old\ns 266H ins SL2025-23 s 5\nSeating position—passenger 7 years old or older but under 16 years old\ns 266I ins SL2025-23 s 5\nPassenger sitting in seating position fitted with particular seatbelt\ns 266J ins SL2025-23 s 5\nExemptions for driver—public minibus, taxi, hire car or tow truck\ns 266K ins SL2025-23 s 5\nExemptions from wearing seatbelts\ndiv 16.4 hdg ins SL2025-23 s 5\nExemptions—wearing seatbelt\ns 267 am SL2019-14 s 42, s 43; SL2025-23 ss 6-9\nOther rules for people travelling in or on vehicles\ndiv 16.5 hdg ins SL2025-23 s 10\nWearing motorbike helmet\ns 270 am SL2019-14 ss 44-46; A2022-5 s 26\nRiding on motorbike\ns 271 am SL2019-14 s 47, s 48\nDuties of driver involved in crash\ns 287 am SL2019-31 s 21\nInsecure or overhanging load\ns 292 am SL2019-14 s 49\n\nRestricting movement of load\ns 292A ins SL2019-14 s 50\nDriving without due care etc\ns 296A ins A2022-3 s 9\nTelevision receiver or visual display unit in motor vehicle\ns 299 am SL2019-14 s 51; SL2019-31 s 22; SL2023-40 s 5, s 6,\namdt 1.4\nUse of mobile device\ns 300 hdg sub SL2019-14 s 52\ns 300 am SL2019-14 ss 53-60; SL2019-31 ss 23-26; A2021-14\namdt 1.9, amdt 1.10\nsub SL2023-40 s 7\nam SL2023-40 amdt 1.5\nUse of mobile device—learner and provisional licence holders\ns 300AA ins SL2019-14 s 61\nam A2021-14 amdt 1.11, amdt 1.12\nom SL2023-40 s 7\nApproaching and passing stationary or slow moving emergency vehicle etc\ns 300C ins SL2018-3 amdt 1.3\nDirection by police officer to get off, or not get on, vehicle or animal\ns 304A ins A2022-3 s 10\nStopping and parking exemption—mobile device detection system or\nseatbelt detection system\ns 307A hdg sub A2025-21 amdt 1.2\ns 307A ins SL2023-40 s 8\nam A2025-21 amdt 1.3, amdt 1.4\nExemption—road worker etc\ns 310 am SL2025-23 s 11\nParking control sign applying to length of road in area to which other\nparking control sign applies etc\ns 333 am A2022-5 s 27\nStandard or commonly used traffic signs\nsch 2 am SL2019-14 s 62, s 63\nOther permitted traffic signs\nsch 3 am SL2019-14 s 62, s 63\nSymbols and traffic-related items\nsch 4 am SL2019-14 s 64; A2022-5 s 28; SL2024-11 s 14\n\ndict am SL2019-14 s 65, s 66; A2019-21 ss 97-99\ndef affixed to sub SL2023-40 s 9\ndef approved child safety harness ins SL2025-23 s 12\ndef available ins SL2025-23 s 12\ndef electric-powered vehicle charging parking sign ins\nA2022-5 s 29\ndef electric-powered vehicle parking sign ins A2022-5 s 29\ndef electric vehicle parking sign ins A2022-5 s 29\ndef forward facing ins SL2025-23 s 12\ndef light rail stop ins A2018-19 amdt 1.14\ndef mobile device ins A2024-20 s 64\nsub A2025-21 amdt 1.5\ndef mobility parking scheme authority sub SL2019-31 s 27\ndef motorised scooter om SL2019-31 s 28\ndef motor vehicle am SL2019-31 s 29, s 30\ndef nature strip sub SL2019-14 s 67\ndef parking permit for people with disabilities om\nSL2019-31 s 31\ndef personal mobility device ins A2019-21 s 100\ndef rearward facing ins SL2025-23 s 12\ndef scooter om SL2019-31 s 32\ndef suitable ins SL2025-23 s 12\ndef tram stop sub A2018-19 amdt 1.15\ndef wheeled recreational device am SL2019-31 s 33, s 34\ndef wheeled toy sub SL2019-31 s 35\n\n5 Earlier republications\n5 Earlier republications\nSome earlier republications were not numbered. The number in column 1 refers to\nthe publication order.\nSince 12 September 2001 every authorised republication has been published in\nelectronic pdf format on the ACT legislation register. A selection of authorised\nrepublications have also been published in printed format. These republications are\nmarked with an asterisk (*) in column 1. Electronic and printed versions of an\nauthorised republication are identical.\nNo and date\nEffective Last\namendment\nmade by\nfor\n30 Apr 2018\n30 Apr 2018–\nSL2018-3 new regulation and\namendments by\nSL2018-3\n24 May 2018–\n11 Oct 2018\nA2018-19 amendments by\nA2018-19\n12 Oct 2018\n12 Oct 2018–\n28 Oct 2018\nSL2018-19 amendments by\n29 Oct 2018\n29 Oct 2018–\nSL2018-19 amendments by\n1 July 2019–\n21 Aug 2019\nSL2019-14 amendments by\nSL2019-14\n22 Aug 2019\n22 Aug 2019–\n19 Dec 2019\nA2019-21 amendments by\nA2019-21\n20 Dec 2019\n20 Dec 2019–\n11 Aug 2021\nSL2019-31 amendments by\nSL2019-31\n12 Aug 2021\n12 Aug 2021–\n12 Apr 2022\nA2021-14 amendments by\nA2021-14\n13 Apr 2022\n13 Apr 2022–\n26 Apr 2022\nA2022-3 amendments by\nA2022-3\n27 Apr 2022\n27 Apr 2022–\nA2022-5 amendments by\nA2022-5\n11 May 2022–\n20 Dec 2023\nA2022-5 amendments by\nA2022-5\n21 Dec 2023\n21 Dec 2023–\n31 Dec 2023\nSL2023-40 amendments by\nSL2023-40\n\nEarlier republications 5\nNo and date\nEffective Last\namendment\nmade by\nfor\n1 Jan 2024\n1 Jan 2024–\nSL2023-40 expiry of provisions\n(s 156 (1) (a) (iv),\n(3) def zero\nemissions\nvehicle, (4))\n15 May 2024–\nSL2023-40 amendments by\nA2023-43\n25 May 2024–\nA2024-20 amendments by\nSL2023-40 and\nA2024-20\n29 June 2024–\n2 Nov 2025\nSL2024-11 amendments by\nSL2024-11","sortOrder":446}],"analysis":{"issue_detection":{"absurdities":[],"contradictions":[]},"flash_summary_failed":{"failed":true,"reason":"A positive credit balance is required for all requests, including BYOK, so fallback providers remain available. Add credits at https://vercel.com/d?to=%2F%5Bteam%5D%2F%7E%2Fai%3Fmodal%3Dtop-up to continue.","source":"analysis-cron"},"kimi_summary":{"_metrics":{"completionTokens":825},"content_quality":"ok","complexity_score":8,"scope_assessment":{"changed":false,"description":"The legislation remains focused on its original purpose of establishing uniform road rules for the ACT. While it has expanded to cover modern transport modes (personal mobility devices, electric vehicles) and new safety features (bicycle storage areas, seatbelt detection systems), these represent natural evolution within the road safety framework rather than scope creep. The core structure—covering vehicles, road users, traffic control, and parking—has remained consistent since 2017."},"complexity_factors":["Extensive cross-referencing between Parts (e.g., parking rules reference Division 12.11, 12.12, etc.)","Multiple defined terms with signpost definitions pointing to other regulations (e.g., 'parking permit—see Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 2017')","Nested exceptions and conditional logic (e.g., section 165 provides 5 different emergency defences, each with temporal limits)","Age-based tiered requirements for child restraints (6 months, 4 years, 7 years, 16 years) with cascading fallbacks","Geographic and temporal conditions (school zones, shared zones, clearways, metered parking hours)","Technical specifications for personal mobility devices (60kg max, 25km/h max, dimensional limits)","Dual penalty structures (individual vs corporation) and penalty unit calculations requiring external Legislation Act reference"],"plain_english_summary":"This is the ACT’s comprehensive Road Rules: the rulebook for drivers, riders (bikes, animals, PMDs), pedestrians and passengers. It sets defaults for speeds, turning, signals, giving-way, parking, bike and personal‑mobility device use, seatbelt/child‑restraint requirements and safety distances when passing cyclists.\n\nIt modernises rules for e‑scooters, EV charging bays and mobile‑device detection, aligns with national norms, and enforces breaches with penalties up to 20 penalty units."},"flash_summary":{"complexity_score":9,"scope_assessment":{"changed":true,"description":"Compared with a simple road‑rules code focused on core driver and pedestrian behaviour, this version has grown substantially in scope. It now regulates new device classes (personal mobility devices—s 18A and Part 14 div 14.3), electric‑vehicle parking and charging bays (ss 203B–203C), motorbike lane‑filtering (s 151A), and authorises and exempts enforcement deployments using detection systems (s 307A). It also layers in detailed administrative controls (approvals, permits, declarations by the road transport authority, and medical‑certificate defences for seatbelt/child restraint rules). Those additions move the instrument beyond pure traffic conduct rules into regulatory territory that governs infrastructure, enforcement technology, and the commercial use of curbspace—creating new compliance costs and administrative discretion (see ss 203B–203C; s 151A; s 307A; Part 20)."},"complexity_factors":["Large scale: ~350+ numbered sections across 21 Parts plus 4 Schedules and a long Dictionary (full operational code).","Extensive definitions and special‑case definitions (personal mobility devices, EVs, trams, heavy vehicles, seatbelt/child restraint categories) requiring technical thresholds (s 18A; Part 16 div 16.3).","Heavy cross‑referencing to other ACT instruments and the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) and Vehicle Registration regulations and the Heavy Vehicle National Law (multiple cross-references throughout).","Numerous conditional rules, exceptions and ‘unless’ clauses (eg exemptions for emergency/police vehicles, training, enforcement deployments) producing nested logic (see Parts 17, 19, s 307A).","Multiple sector‑specific regimes (trams, buses, taxis/rideshare, heavy vehicles, tow trucks) each with bespoke rules (Parts 11, 12, 16–18).","Detailed signage and marking regimes with legal effect rules and spatial application tests (Part 20, ss 316–336; Schedules 2–4).","Many offence provisions are strict liability with statutory defences and evidential burdens in some cases (ss 8–9; ss 266F, 267 — evidential burdens referenced).","Technical conditional behaviour rules (lane filtering, minimum passing distances to bicycles, trailer/towline rules) that require factual assessments in enforcement (ss 151A, 164B, 295).","Frequent time/area dependent permissions (school zones, shared zones, parking control signs) increasing operational complexity for enforcement and users (Parts 3 and 12)."],"plain_english_summary":"**What this instrument does (mechanically)**\n\n- This Regulation is the ACT’s detailed rule‑book for using roads and road‑related areas. It sets out who counts as a road user, what counts as a vehicle, speed limits, how to turn, signalling rules, traffic‑light behaviour, give‑way rules, lane and overtaking rules, roundabout rules, level crossing rules, parking and stopping rules, lighting and horn rules, pedestrian rules, and special rules for trams, buses, bicycles, motorbikes and personal mobility devices (eg electric scooters). (See Parts 1–21 and the Dictionary.)\n- It prescribes the look and legal effect of traffic signs, road markings and traffic‑related items (Schedules 2–4 and Part 20) and the legal ranges of application (how a sign applies to a length of road, a lane, an area or a person). (See s 316–335.)\n- It creates offence provisions (mostly strict liability) with standard penalties (typically up to 20 penalty units per breach) and explains limited defences (for accident or reasonable avoidance). (See ss 7–9, penal provisions across Parts.)\n- It contains many specific technical measures: child‑restraint and seatbelt rules (Part 16, div 16.3), detailed bicycle and micromobility rules (Part 15; s 18A and Part 14 div 3 on personal mobility devices), motorbike lane‑filtering rules (s 151A), electric‑vehicle parking and charging bays (ss 203B–203C), and interaction rules for trams and buses (Part 17).\n\n**Who it affects**\n\n- All road users in the ACT: drivers, riders, passengers, pedestrians. (See s 14–19.)\n- Specific industries and operators: public transport operators (trams, buses), taxi/hire‑car/rideshare drivers (special lane/stop rules and limited exemptions), heavy vehicle operators (load/clearance/arrester rules), tow‑truck operators, delivery and waste‑collection businesses (specific stopping/parking exceptions), and micromobility businesses insofar as their devices meet the Regulation’s technical limits. (See Parts 11, 12, 13, 16–18 and many sign/zone rules.)\n- Property owners, parking authorities and the road transport authority, because the Regulation empowers installation and interpretation of signs, parking zones, permits and enforcement devices (schedules and Part 20). (See s 315–336; Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation cross‑references.)\n\n**Why it matters (official claim, then tested against trade‑offs and costs)**\n\nOfficial rationale (stated): the Regulation “provides rules for all road users in the ACT that are substantially uniform with rules elsewhere in Australia” and specifies behaviour that “supports the safe and efficient use of roads” (s 10).\n\nHow that works in practice and the trade‑offs to watch for:\n\n- Scope expansion to new vehicle types and technologies. The regulation has been extended to cover personal mobility devices (s 18A; ss 244D–244L) and electric vehicle parking/charging bays (ss 203B–203C). Mechanism: precise technical definitions (weight, speed, dimensions) and dedicated parking/charging signs. Trade‑off: clarity for users and enforcement, but extra compliance costs for local governments and businesses that provide charging infrastructure (install signs, mark bays) and potential enforcement complexity where devices blur the line between pedestrian and vehicle rules.\n\n- Enforcement technologies and automated detection. The Regulation includes specific exemptions and operational rules for vehicles used in enforcement (mobile device detection systems and seatbelt detection systems) and gives the road transport authority power to approve such systems (s 307A; cross‑refs to the Safety & Traffic Management Regulation). Mechanism: exemptions to stopping/parking rules for enforcement deployments. Trade‑offs: improves automated enforcement and revenue capture, but raises compliance and privacy considerations, and creates implementation cost for the authority and potential points of contest in enforcement (e.g. evidential burdens for drivers in some defences).\n\n- Detailed safety regulation with strict liability. Seatbelt, child‑restraint and helmet rules (Part 16 div 16.3; ss 256, 270) are highly prescriptive. Mechanism: age/height/seat position rules, approved device definitions and administrative exceptions for medical certificates (s 267, s 266F). Trade‑offs: clearer safety standards and easier prosecution, but increased compliance burden for private households and transport operators (need approved restraints, documentation), and administrative workload for issuing and checking medical exemptions.\n\n- Differential rules for public transport and commercial fleets. The Regulation grants operational differences and exemptions for police, emergency vehicles and some public transport drivers (Parts 17, 19). Mechanism: explicit exemption provisions and narrow operational criteria (lights, alarms, training, approvals). Trade‑offs: necessary operational flexibility for emergency services, but broad exemption wording requires careful operational controls to avoid misuse.\n\n- Who pays and who decides\n  - Who pays: road users and vehicle owners pay the primary compliance costs (installing approved child restraints, helmets, complying with lane/parking rules) and fines for breaches. Businesses that operate fleets or charging infrastructure incur installation and operational costs; enforcement agencies and the road transport authority bear implementation costs for signage, detection systems and staff. (See penalty framework and sign/permit rules in Part 12 and Part 20.)\n  - Who decides: the road transport authority has central discretion to approve devices, declare areas, and set certain operational details (signage, permitted exemptions) (see Part 20 and references to approvals in divs and schs). Police and authorised persons have on‑the‑spot direction powers (s 304) and may remove obstructions to signage visibility (s 346A).\n\n**Implementation and compliance risk**\n\n- High administrative complexity: the Regulation is long and highly cross‑referenced (many interactions with other ACT laws and regulations). That raises implementation risk for consistent enforcement and for citizens trying to comply.\n- Compliance burden is concentrated on vehicle operators (fleet owners, bus/tram operators, taxi/rideshare drivers) and businesses installing EV charging/parking infrastructure. Small businesses that deliver goods or run rental fleets will bear incremental costs to meet device, signage and parking rules.\n- Bureaucratic discretion: the road transport authority has approval powers and can declare designated places or exemptions (eg for enforcement deployments, permit zones, sch 1 declarations), which concentrates decision power in an administrative agency and requires transparent, consistent use to avoid arbitrary outcomes.\n\n**Concentrated benefits, diffuse costs, and substitution effects**\n\n- Concentrated benefits: companies that supply approved child restraints, helmets, parking meters, EV chargers, or automated enforcement tools can gain steady demand. Public transport operators get clear operational rules (benefit to incumbents). (See Parts 11–13, 16 and 20.)\n- Diffuse costs: the general driving public and small businesses face many small compliance costs (time, purchase of equipment, familiarisation with hundreds of rules).\n- Substitution effects: tighter micromobility rules (personal mobility devices) and bicycle rules push some users to footpaths or private transport; EV parking rules may shift curb space from general parking to charging bays, affecting retail access and on‑street turnover.\n\n**Key cross‑references you may want to read**\n- Definitions and micromobility: s 18A and Part 14 div 14.3 (personal mobility devices).\n- Motorbike lane filtering: s 151A.\n- EV parking and charging bays: ss 203B–203C.\n- Enforcement/deployment exemptions for detection systems: s 307A (and cross‑refs to the Safety & Traffic Management Regulation).\n- Seatbelt/child‑restraint detail and medical exemptions: Part 16 div 16.3 (ss 266–266K) and s 267.\n- Signage, legal effect, and how signs apply to roads/lanes/areas: Part 20 (ss 314–336) and Schedules 2–4.\n- Penalty regime and strict liability: ss 7–9 and penalty unit information in the preamble.\n\nSummary sentence: this is a comprehensive, highly prescriptive operational code for road use in the ACT that has been extended over time to cover new vehicle types and enforcement technologies; it centralises sign/zone decisions with the road transport authority and shifts much of the compliance burden onto vehicle owners, transport operators and infrastructure providers (see ss 10; Parts 12, 16, 20; s 307A)."}},"importantCases":[],"_links":{"self":"/api/acts/road-rules","history":"/api/acts/road-rules/history","analysis":"/api/acts/road-rules/analysis","conflicts":"/api/acts/road-rules/conflicts","importantCases":"/api/acts/road-rules/important-cases","documents":"/api/acts/road-rules/documents"}}